Graphic Design Bootcamp - Learn Essential Design

1. Intro of combo graphics design: Hello everyone. Welcome to our class of Essential Graphics Design. We're learning how to do graphic design with Adobe Photoshop, Illustrator, and in design, if you're planning to learn from the beginning, then you are in the right place. Because we will cover in this class from the Basic to Advanced. This is a beginner level class. If you have no previous experience, then you can join in this class. Let's take a look at what you will learn from this class in Adobe Photoshop. There's going to be introduction to Adobe Photoshop, usage of basic tools, all ribbons workspace commands, simple photo manipulation and edits. Three D elements, customizing elements, usage of different format of graphics in Adobe Illustrator. Introduction to Adobe Illustrator user interface collaboration tools and functionality, Mastering tabs and ribbons visualizations and the usage in Adobe in design. There's going to be introduction to Adobe in design. Usage of basic tools, all verbons work space commands, simple animation, interactive pages, customizing elements, usage of graphics. After completing this class, you'll be able to use Adobe Photoshop, Illustrator and in design, easily learn how to use the tools, find the tools or commands when you need it. Apply best practices for designing. This is a project based class. During learning you'll have class project. So you will, you can learn what. You will be able to participate in class projects. You can practice while you are learning. You will have supporting resources in the class, so it will be easier for you to learn during learning. If you face any issue or if you have any question, then feel free to ask me. I'm always there to help you. Let's start learning Essentials, Graphic Design. 2. Key features of Adobe Photoshop: Welcome to our course of Adobe Photoshop essential. Before getting into our first lesson, let's learn about what Adobe Photoshop is. What is Adobe Photoshop? Adobe Photoshop is a powerful and popular raster graphics editor developed by Adobe Inc. It is widely used for various image editing tasks, including photo retouching, image creation, graphic design, and digital art. Photoshop offers an extensive array of tools and feature that allow users to manipulate images, enhance photographs, create digel paintings, and design graphics for print or web use. Now, what are the key features? Some of the key features of Adobe Photoshop include layers, masks, filters, brushes, and a wide range of editing tools enables user to adjust colors, contrast, brightness, and other aspects of an image. It supports various file formats and is used by photographers, graphic designers, web designers, artists and professionals in many other fields. Due to its versatility and robust capabilities, Adobe Photoshop is a part of the Adobe Creative Cloud suit, which means it can be accessed through a subscription based model and often receives regular updates with new features and improvements. An Adobe Photoshop course typically offers a comprehensive introduction to the software, catering to beginners and individuals with varying levels of experience in graphic design, photography, or digital arts. It aims to equip students with foundational squills and confidence to navigate the software. Encouraging creativity and proficiency in image editing and graphic design. These courses may vary in duration, format, online, in person, and depth based on the intended audience and learning objectives. As I'm going to be showing you all the essential tools and all the essentials of using Adobe Photoshop. It's going to be very basic and it's going to be up till 3 hours or so. I hope to see you on my first lesson. Thank you for watching this video and hope you, and I hope you will understand whatever I teach you. If you have any questions, are you face any problems, then feel free to ask me and I will guide you and help you through the whole process. Let's move on with our first lesson of Adobe Photoshop Essential. 3. Interface and tools part 1: File, Ribon and five basic tools of Adobe Photoshop. On my screen, you can see that this is how Adobe Photoshop looks like on the interface. Just as it is the first lesson where we are going to learn about the File Tab, or let's say the File Ribbon, and also about the five basic tools. But let's start off with a bit of basics. Okay, let's learn about what the interface of Adobe Photoshop works and how it looks like. We're going to separate this lesson in two different sections, because I'm going to be giving you a whole separate lesson about how it actually looks like. So this is basically the interface or let's say the home page or the workspace of Adobe Photoshop. Well, not the actual work space where we're going to do is customize a lot of photos or do graphic designing a lot of artworks. But this is how it looks like when you open up Adobe Photoshop. One thing before starting Adobe Photoshop, or start working on Adobe Photoshop, is that I'm going to suggest you to use the newest version of Adobe Photoshop. There is, and also make sure that you have a subscription. Or also make sure that you're connected to the Internet so that you get full functionality of Adobe Photoshop. Because let's say if you have a previous version of Adobe Photoshop, sometimes you might see that there are not all the tools or let's say not all the buck fixes that there is on the newest one. Another thing is that if you have, let's say an older device and it's not working on, then I'm going to suggest you to maybe drop down one or two versions. Okay? And then you can use them however you want, but it's obviously going to get the work done for you. This is how it looks like on the interface, or let's say on the home page. Now you can see that there are a couple of these ribbons, or let's say this ribbon panel where I'm going to be using. But in this lesson, I'm going to be showing you the file now before getting into it. So this is how it looks like. You can drag and drop any file you have over here and you can start working on it. But as I'm not going to be doing that because I'm going to go off step by step. So first thing you're going to see this is how it looks like. Then we have this new file. You can up a new file whenever you want to. If you've worked previously on maybe Adobe, you know, let's say Illustrator and all of those, you'll basically see that this is how it actually looks like. It just makes you select one of a preset, which you have on Adobe Photoshop or maybe Adobe Illustrator, and then start working on it. Then you're going to do is select whichever preset you want to use. Whether these are kind of like the art boards, but these are basically documents over here. Okay? There are several categories such as photos, print art and illustration, Web, mobile and film and video. Use whichever one you want according to your need. And after you are done selecting anyone. And you can also see that if you have any saved preset, you will be able to select it from here. Then you can also go find more templates according to your need. And also you recently used presets will appear over here on rests. And then after you're done, you'll see it on the right side. It's all about the preset properties and you'll be able to customize them too. Now the first one is going to be the preset details. Let's say I'm going to do type in our first, this is going to be our first preset which we're going to use. Then fix the width and also the hide. And what type of format do you want? Do you want it in inches? Do you want it in centimeters? Do you want in millimeters point or pics? I'm going to do, suggest you to use pixels because it just does all the work for you. Then fix out your orientation, landscape or portrait. And then we have a number of art boards. Which artboard you want or not want is going to be up to you. I'm going to do is fix out the resolution, whichever resolution you want. You can see that this is 72. I'm going to use that. I'm going to use 300 PPI, which I most of the time use. I'm going to use keep it orientated and portrait. And then we have is this color mode. You can use CMYK, you can use RGB, gray scale, bitmap, lab color, whichever one you want. But I'm going to suggest you to use RGB or CMYK. It's more preferably suggested to use RGB because you can just go through each and every of the panel, each and every of the color, whichever one you want, according to your need. After you're done, make sure to select the bits. There is eight bits, 16 bit and 32 bit from among here. I don't want neither the lowest, neither the highest I'm going to do is, most of the time I try keeping it on 16 because it is middle and it also works really good with my device. You can also use 32 bits. It just takes a bit more time to render your photos or whatever graphics you are working on. I'm going to do is a later on, step by step, I'm going to make you understand what these actually do and then we have is this background content. From here you can select the color of the artboard. Let's say you want the art board or the background to be black or maybe colorful or maybe transparent or customized. It's going to be up to you whatever you want and whatever you put is going to be applied on your background, so you don't have to worry that much. Okay. Then from here you can change the color according to your need. But one thing is that what you have to do is select on this color. I'm going to do, cut this off first. And if you want a different color, you can select on background color and select whichever color you want. Let's say I want a bit of grayish and paste on okay, Or press on Okay. And it will take the changes. Whenever I start working on it, you can see the custom. And then I will also be able to select my color profile, whichever color palette or whichever color settings I want to use. You can see I'm using now working SRGB E C six. But you can also use RGB 90 98. Because I'm not going to suggest that it is because it is not SRGB, it's only RGB. So there's like tons of colors missing. And you can also use CMYK or SRGB I, Ec61, 9,662.12, at the same time. That is also good, but I will also most of the time, suggest you to use working SRGB or RGBSRGB. This one, which is most of the time on default on pixel aspect ratio, make sure to use square pixel. It just helps you to work a lot more better. We're going to keep this how it is, but I'm going to do. At the same time, I'm going to show you a couple of these interfaces, how it basically works I'm going to do cut this off. Then we have this open. If you want to open up any recent files from a PC, make sure to select on it and this interface opens up. Use whichever drive or whichever folder you have your file or document on, select on it, press on open. It will open up on your Adobe Photoshop. Now you can see this is the home tab and it can drag and drop any file from your PC and then open it up whenever you want. Then we have is your files. If you want to open up any of your files over here on Adobe Photoshop, make sure to click on it and there we have it. Now, another advantage of using Adobe Photoshop or let's say as it is cloud suit based, okay, You can have your cloud connected to Adobe Photoshop or was just creative cloud and you can like, you know, just cycle it through the whole cloud system and also use it whenever you want. Let's say you are working on Adobe Illustrator or maybe Adobe Photoshop on your phone. Not on your PC, but you want to work on your PC now. But you did the work on your mobile now, you can just connect it to your cloud, which is Creative Cloud. And then you will be able to use it on whichever device you want to use, but make sure you are connected to the Internet so that you can use them whenever you want. Then we have, is this shared with you? Now you can see which photos or whichever graphics has been shared with you. It could be a different person or maybe from you from a different device. And they will appear over on this panel. And then we have is one of the very advantageous method or process, or the thing which Adobe Photoshop really took in mind and also did this for you, is that, you know, Adobe Photoshop, Adobe Lightroom is basically a photo manipulating software. And you can do a lot of stuff like let's say, manipulating and also editing and Adobe Loge Room, which is kind of really basic and very user friendly for the beginners and you can use that. And later on if you want to know direct it or maybe take it to Adobe Photoshop, you can directly connect your lightroom photos to Adobe Photoshop. And that is very advantageous and it saves up a lot of time. Then we have is this deleted section. In this deleted section, you will basically find out whatever you deleted, it works like a recycle bin in Adobe Photoshop. So you don't have that. You know, you will not be stressed out about losing your files. Even if you do, you will obviously find it in the like deleted section of Adobe Photoshop. Then we have is whatever type of, you know, view you bond, maybe grids or list, you'll be able to select that. This is going to be our cloud storage. You can see no cloud storage is available because I don't have any and this is my newest account. And then we have this search bar, you can search up for anything in Adobe Photoshop, let's say. It could be your video, it could be your image, it could be your graphics. It's all up to you. And then we have is this gift section where it's going to generate and a lot of things which are basically given in Adobe Photoshop, the newest versions. And then there's your account. You will be able to select your account and do whatever you want with it. It's going to be up to you. You can see Adobe account is over here. Use whichever one you want and customize your account. Maybe get into subscriptions and then get back to Adobe Photoshop. Okay, this is basically their website. Now let's open up a new file which is going to be over here. This one I'm going to do use portrait, I'm going to do use 16 bits. I'm going to do, make sure that it was gray. So I'm going to select on its, there we go. We're going to use this color press on. Okay, and S RGB and all of them are quite done. I'm going to do is change it to first. Okay, first, here we get now is going to open up that interface for me. You just have to wait for a bit, and this is how it looks like. Well, you might see that Adobe Photoshop is quite identical to Adobe Illustrator. But one thing over here is that the tools are different and then the layer option is different. And if you look through it and if you focus on Workspace a bit more, you will find a lot of differences. Now the first thing when you open up Adobe Photoshop is that I'm going to suggest you to change your workspace. Now click on Windows, click on Workspace, and make sure to select on Essentials Default. Well, sometimes it's on different ones, maybe new workspace or a different workspace which you have. But obviously, I'm going to suggest you to use Essentials Default because it allows you to use almost all the tools which you have in Adobe Photoshop on your POV. Now as this lesson is about the file ribbon and also the first five basic tools of Adobe Photoshop. Without any further ado, let's just start off our second part of this lesson, where we're going to learn about the ribbon and also about the five tools. 4. Interface and tools part 2: File ribon and five basic tools part two. Welcome to our second part of our file ribon and also the five basic tools. Now let's start off with our file Ribbon. When you click on file ribon, you will basically find out the first command is new. Now what happens if you press on new? It just basically makes up another workspace for you or another document. You can make up or select whichever preset you want, Customize it according to your need, and then press on Creates. And then you'll basically see the next one has been opened up. On our first part, we created the first one which is called first, and it is over here. So you can select whichever one you want. And I'm going to do is remove the second one, which I used as the first command. Now you can also open up whichever file you have on your PC while being on this interface or in this workspace, it will just open up that interface for you. We'll use whichever one you want and then you're good to go now on file again. And then we have a Browse and Bridge. Now you can also Browse and Bridge whenever you want, but if you don't have it, just make sure that you don't use it. And we have is also opens. Now what format you want to open it as? You can also open up the Cloud document and select whichever format you want. Let's say you want maybe a PDF or maybe a Tre DS or maybe EPS or maybe GIF. Whichever one you want, select that. And all of those files which you have on your PC according to whichever category it is, is going to open up. And you can also select it and open it up in Adobe Photoshop. Then we have is open as smart object. You can also open up any object. I'll say it could be a shape, it could be a photo. And if you want that to be a smart object, you can open it up as a smart object. It's going to be an object, even if you import or export a photo and you open it up as a smart object, it's going to turn into an object. It will not be termed an image anymore. Okay, well I'm going to give you, you know, the like a full on review of that or let's say a full on lesson of that later on. Then we have a close, you can also close up certain documents like this the first. You can also close all of them at once whenever you want to. But I'm not going to do that because you can fill through it later on. And these are quite basics. And then we have a close and go to bridge. You can close it off and go to bridge, which is going to be our home page. And you can go over there. Then what we have is Save and Save As. If you want to save up any document or save up any project which you have already running, just make sure to click on Save and Save As. And they also have specific keybinds, or let's say keyboard shortcuts, But you can see most of them have keyboard shortcuts. You can try using them so they can save up a lot of time. And I'm going to suggest you to use, you know, keyboard shortcuts because it makes you, or makes your work a lot more smoother, takes a lot less time, and also it just, you know, saves up a lot of time. That is one of the main factors which I'm going for why I suggest you to use keyboard shortcuts. Then we have a save as a copy. You can also save a copy of it. And you can save, you can click on it, save it as it will pop up over here. Make sure to select it wherever you want. Maybe on your cloud or maybe on your computer and click on your computer maybe. And then you'll basically see this interface opens up, then you can just select on Don't Show Again, maybe. And then click on Save on your computer, and it will be saved on your computer like this. Now use whichever format you want and how you want to save it As, and then select the folder where you want to save it As, and click Save. And then you're good to go. Okay, now the next one or the next command which we have is revert. Well the revert is basically undo and redo. It just basically reverts any customization back to its default self. Let's say you have an object which is red in color. Now you customize that red colored object into a blue one and when you revert it back, it will just turn back into blue. That is basically how the revert works. And then we have is Invite Edit. Now obviously Adobe Photoshop, or the newest version of it has that functionality of, you know, working simultaneously and collaboration. Now if you want to invite any person to edit it at the same time as you are, so that you can save a bit of time, get more motivation, get more inspiration, and also more creativity. So you can just invite any person you want and then start working on it or work on at the same time. And you can also share it for a review. Then you can export it and also generate it whenever you want. When you click on Export, you will basically see a lot of these options or commands are there. Use whichever one you want. Let's say you can artboard. You can use the artboards to export. You can export the artboard to PDF. Export for arrow layer, comes or maybe comes or PDF, whichever one you want. And it can also send the path to Illustrator directly. It just saves up a lot of time. And it can also generate image assets by using AI, which our, let's say Adobe Photoshop has that functionality. Then we have a search Adobe Stock. It will just take you to the Adobe Stock website where you'll be able to use whichever resource you want to download it and you just use it basically. And then we have this place embedded. If you want to place anything on a specific object, I'm going to show you to you later on as I don't have any object right now. You'll be able to embed any photo in any certain place or any certain object. Then we have is place links. You can also place the links whenever you want. And then we have this package. Next one we have is automate. Now how do you want to automate your workspace And you know the whole thing. Now you have batch PDF presentation, create droplets, crop and street and photos. Contact sheet conditional mode changes, fit image lens correction, merge the ACR pro photo merge. Well, you're going to get all of these through here. Now we have a script. In the next one we'll be able to load in or load multiple scripts or files. Delete MT layers, process the image, all you can do it from over here. You can also browse up whichever file you want and use it whenever you want. And then you'll be able to import your data or any progress or any project you have, Job Photoshop, and import it through this option. We have variable datasets. You can import it through datasets. You can use video frames, layers, and you can also put it notes and also WIA support. Then we have this file version or file info. It will give you all of the information about the document, all of you know the data or all of the origin and everything of the info about whatever you're working on. Even it's going to give you the photo details. If you have clicked any photo, let's say the what lens has been used, what camera has been used, the location, and all of it. Then we have this, you know, let's say the next one is version history. It will give you the version history of let's say your Adobe Photoshop or whatever history you have in Adobe Photoshop. Okay, now let's go off the files again. And then we have is this pre section. In the print section, you'll be able to print out your, you know, whatever document or photo you have or graphics you have. Select whichever one you want. Customize it with the printer. Customize it with the copies, the print settings, the layouts, the color handling printer profile and how you want it. Normal printing or hard proofing. Then you can select the rendering intent. Let's say you want saturation or relative color metric. And most of the time use relative color metric because it matches up with the color which I have on my screen and also which I know put it as print on my, you know, printer. Okay, So make sure to use this relative color metric. But if you use saturation, it's going to be a lot more color popped up which will not look good sometimes. And then we also have this absolute color metric and it will also look really good. And after you're done, just make sure to press on print and then you're good to go. And then we have the last one is print one copy. You can also print one copy at a time if you want to do that. And you can see you'll be able to select whichever document you have on your PC, select the file, and then you can press on Save, and then print out that specific one document or that specific photo or whatever graphics you have which you opened up. Okay, so as we're done with this file ribbon, the last one is exit. If you want to exit Adobe Photoshop, just press on control on a queue or you can go off the file and then exit it whenever you want. Then the next one is, the next part is going to be the five basic tools which are going to be over here. The first tool is going to be our move tool. Well, you can move any object. You can see it over here. I'm going to convert it to the normal layer. Then I can move it wherever I've won by using this move tool. And then from right clicking on it, you'll find out the artboard tool, you'll be able to create more artboards over here. So you'll see it like this. There we go. We have another artboard, which is artboard one. Okay? Now you know how you'll be able to create an artboard. Then the next one is going to be a rectangular marked tool. Well, you'll be able to mark up specific object or mark it up just like that, select a specific part. Now it's just not rectangular. You have other elliptical mark to single row mark tool and single column mark tool. Use whichever one you want and you can just press on M so that you can use it. The next one which you have is the lasso tool. You can select specific object by using this tool and you can also drag them wherever you want. Now you're going to click on this, you know, lasso tool and there we go. We can mark a specific object and then move it whenever we want. Okay, you can just select on it and you can drag it out, but it will not take the whole thing out, so you don't have to worry that much. You can just select it and also drag the whole thing. And then we have this polygonal mark tool. You'll be able to make lines and then select a specific area. And there we go, we have it when you select this part, and there we go, it is done, okay? You just have to complete the whole thing. Next one is going to be the magnetic mark tool. Now, it will work like this. You can see how it works. You don't even have to do anything. Okay. You can just select any part and then we're, we get to go see, this is how it works. The next tool which we have is going to be our object selection tool. It just helps you to select any object which you have on your screen. There's three types of brushes or three types of tools over here. Now you can also select any object like this or maybe you can select on the other one which you have is the brush, where you can select or select the parts and then use it whenever you want. Then there are also a couple of other tools which you'll find out in Adobe Photoshop. One thing is that when you see that there is this corner button over here, our corner symbol or icon. That means that there are more than one tools in that specific area or that specific tool, which you can see on this basic tool panel. Make sure to use it wisely. And as you can see that I'm going to go step by step so you can make sure that you know where those tools are. And if you have any question, if you feel like you're facing some problems, then feel free to ask me. I'm going to do is help you through the whole process and also show to you how it works, okay? So make sure to use, or let's say, make sure to see all the videos from the beginning to the end. Because if you skip apart, you might miss a couple of things which you will later on, you know, face some problems about it. Then the next one we're going to select on this or maybe right click on it. And then we have this quick selection tool. It just helps you to select specific part like a brush. And then you go, you can select it like this That we have is this plus and minus. You can select the plus if you want to select the parts. If you want to deselect the part or remove the part, just drag it out and you can see the parts have been removed. This is basically how it works. Then the next tool which we have is going to be the crop tool. You'll be able to basically just crop up certain parts. And you can see Artboard two is now a lot shorter. The next one we have is perspective crop tool. You will be able to fix out the perspective however you want. Just select the part first and then drag it out how you want the part to be. It will be like certain parts like this where you'll be able to select certain areas just like this. Okay, there we go. And press on here and you'll see basically the art board will now be changed and looks like this. Okay, So I'm going to do is first off zoom out and see how basically looks like. There we go. We have artboard two I'm going to do is press on control shift and old I'm going to use. First off click on edit and I'm going to do is Red. The last process I'm going to do is control Z. There we go, we have it back over here. You can also change up the perspective of like use the slice tool if you want to make up certain sections, slice up different parts, and there we slice has been created. You can also slice, select tool, or select the parts and customize it according to your need. And the last tool which we have is going to be our frame tool. If you want to make a frame, just select on it. And there we go, we have our frame ready, which is going to be this part, okay? And you can also make a circular frame according to your need. What I'm going to do is make a circular frame over here. And there we go, we have our circular frame totally ready. You can see Frame one and Frame 22 has been added in two of these boxes. I hope you understood everything in this lesson from the ribbon to the tools. And in our next lesson, we're going to learn about this Edit, ribbon, whatever commands we have, whatever tools we have. And then we're going to start off from this eyedropper tool to the next five tools which we have, an Adobe Photoshop. So thank you for watching this video again, and let's move on to our next lesson. 5. Edit ribbon and related tools: Edit Ribbon and five Basic Tools. Welcome back to our second lesson of Adobe Photoshop. In this lesson, we are going to learn about Edit, Ribbon and also the five basic tools Starting from our eyedropper tool. Now I'm going to do is open up a new file by clicking on one of the presets, which I want to use. Now what I'm going to do is use this. What I'm going to do is use the portrayed version of it. Okay? Whichever orientation you want. And it's up to you. Now, as you can see that I've ended on this part, I'm not going to be needing that right now. I'm going to start off with my Edit ribbon first. In our Edit ribbon, it's start off with our undue redo and toggle last state, let me put something on my page. I'm going to do is let's say maybe a text. Okay. I'm going to go through them later on too, but let's just start off with this one. Okay, After I put in a couple of my texts. And then what I'm going to do is going to be using the commands which I have on my Edit ribbon. And in the Edit ribbon there are also a couple of things, Okay? Instead of those, as you can see now, I'm going to click on my Edit ribbon. And then we have is this undo and redo. First off I'm going to do is take this text, which I already have, and click on Edits. And then we have this undue layer. Okay I'm going to do is click on Undo, and you'll basically see that it will be removed from my page. Now if I want to redo the process, I'm going to click on Edit and click on Redo New Type Layer. Now there is also a shortcut key which is going to be control shift and Z. Our control Z for undo it, control Z for undo and control shift Z for redoing the process back again. Now there is also another one which we have is Togo, last state. Now, how was the last state? First off, let me click on this text over here. I'm going to do triple click on it. Now after I selected the text, I'm going to do is change it to maybe something different. What I'm going to do is use strong. Now as I've used strong, you will basically see the strong has been applied on my text. Now instead of that, I'm going to do is change the font to something like, let's say 18, only one of the word. Now if I want that to revert back to its last date, I'm going to click on this, which is also the shortcut key off All Control and Z, press on that, it will revert back to how it was. Okay, so make sure to use it whenever you want. It's basically reverting back to how it was but it's going to be the last positive like last which has been applied state. Now we know already about this undue redo and toggle last state. Now we have is this fate. Now as I don't have any faded text right now, I can also apply a bit of fade whenever I want. Now I'm going to use triple click on its control. Now all of them has been clicked. I'm going to click on Edits and still we don't have fade. Now if you want anything or any object to fade up in your, let's say artboard, you can click on it or press on shift control and, and it will be faded. Then we have is cut, copy, paste, paste, special clear copy merged and all of those. Well, these are very basic, but we're going to go through that. So control is for cut, control is for copy. But we're going to go through the next ones. Now I'm going to do is click on Copy. I'm going to go off to Edits, and then we have is Paste special. Now if you want to paste it without formatting, you can paste in place, Paste into, and also paste outside. It's going to be up to you. Now if you want to paste without formatting, you can click on it and there will be no formatting. Let me just show it to you right now. I'm going to click on it. I'm going to do change it to Bold. I'm going to do change it to 24. And there we go. I'm going to do control. I'm going to copy this, and I'm going to paste it without formatting. Now when I press on it and paste it with that formatting, I'm going to take this back again. I'm going to take it, let's say I'm going to go off to edit. There we go. We already have it. I'm going to select the tool of selection there. I'm going to do, take this part, press on control, you'll basically see the part which has been selected. Take this one over here. I'm going to click on this text option again. I'm going to select on this text over here, control A. I'm going to change it to a different font. Let's take it to maybe this one man, dra, GD. Okay, I'm going to make another layer or Sm, make another preset. I'm going to make another preset over here. Now, new control. I'm going to just press on Creates as it opens up on Untitled two. I'm going to paste that part over here. I'm going to click on Edits. I'm going to go off the file first. Or maybe I'm going to go off to this untitled first. I'm going to click on this text over here. I'm going to copy the whole thing, Control a. Control C. Okay, control C. I'm going to go over here and then I'm going to do is on untitled two, I'm going to paste. Click on it. I'm going to do is paste it without anything. I'm going to take this part which is already over here, cut off as I've cut this off, I'm going to go off over here again. I'm going to take this part, which you can see over here, control a, control C. I'm going to do it. I'm going to paste special paste without formatting tro a. There we go. I'm going to paste it right over here as I've pasted. Now you can see that there is literally no formatting on this. Okay, You can see the difference of this one and also an untitled, which is this one. Okay, then we have other ones which we have a copy merged as we did not do any merged object or merge anything yet. So I'm going to do skip this part and show it to you later on. Now we have a search if you want to search anything in your document or anything in Adobe Photoshop which you worked on or may be working on, such as Quick Actions, hands on tutorial and maybe other stuff. You can just click on it and you'll be able to even find tools and also tutorials according to your needs. And you can find the same thing over here on the right side or the right top of this panel. I'm going to go off to edit again. And then we have a spell checking. If you want to spell check anything in your document or anything in your preset, just click on Spell checking and it's going to find out anything that there is any mistake and it's going to help you to correct it up. Then we have is fine and replace text. Well, Adobe Photoshop also has this feature of finding and also replacing text whichever one you want and also working it according to your need. Then on the next one which we have is going to be Fill Stroke Content Aware, Fill. Now let me just click on this. First I'm going to select the Text Control A. Now all of them has been selected. I'm going to go off to edit. And then you can also add up fill stroke and also Content aware fill according to your need. Well, we don't have anything to fill up right now or any object to apply strokes, so let me just try off putting in maybe a shape so that you can use it or fill it up later on and also show you how it works. Some of you just use a basic rectangle. Now as a habit, I'm going to go off to edits, which you can see over here as my shape has been created. And I'm going to do is make sure there is a bit of fill on it. I make sure to cut this off. I'm going to select on this, I'm going to do take this part. And you can also select on different tools according to your need. If you don't need anything, just make sure to just select on Control and T and there we go. Like this part has been selected. Then you can also apply and fill Sure you and also content aware according to your need. Now if you want it to be a free form, make sure to click on the free form if you want to. Then there's also puppet warp and also perspective warp according to your need. Now the first thing I'm going to do is going to be converting it into a smart object so that I can customize it whenever I want. I'm going to do is click on this object to do, take this part I'm going to do. Right click on this. I'm going to do is maybe convert a smart object. There we go. It has been converted into a smart object. I'm going to do is take this control T, control T, It has been selected. I'm going to go off the edits. And then there we have a transform. You can align it, scale it, rotated, skewed, distort perspective warp and all of those. And also rotate it according to your need. And there are also a lot of things that are now grayed out because I have not applied all of the objects right now. And I also don't have a couple of photos which I'll be able to edit it now. You can see that the pup perspective warp and all of them are quite active right now and I can make those changes over here on these basic shapes. Now I'm going to do is press on control Z so that I can undo the process and apply the next one. And if you don't want to just press on this option and it will be removed. Now, go off to edit again. And then we have is puppet warp and also perspective warp. And you can see there, is this how it will look like. You'll be able to change the perspective according to your need, by making the grid on it according to your desire, you can also warp it up and also you'll be able to change it like this. Move war pins to manipulate perspective. Now these pins are the ones that is going to manipulate your perspective like this. It is basically kind of like three D, but you'll be able to change the perspective according to your need. And after you've done, just press on this tick mark and then you're good to go press on Edit again. And then we have a Sky replacement Auto Align, Auto, Blend, and all of those, just use it however you want and see how it actually works. Then we have is this, auto. You know, transform. It's going to be up to you how you're going to transform it according to your need. Then we have is defined brush, preset defined pattern, defined custom shape. And also purge and all of those. Well, use whichever one you want according to your need because it's going to depend up to you how you're going to work with it and also customize it. It's going to be based up to your creativity. Now, the next one which we're going to talk about is going to be our perche. Well, the perche, let's just, you know, just click on Okay. And you can see that there are a couple of commands which are great out, but when you don't click on any object, you will basically see it like this. Now there is histories, all and also video cache. You can go through them, customize it, and also remove it whenever you want. You can also define the brush preset, just like this, and this will basically be the brush name and it will basically turn into a brush. Now when you use the brush, it will basically work out like this. You can see it over here. As I don't have any place to use it, I'm going to press on, okay. And you'll basically see that this has turned into kind of a brush. So this is how it will work. Make sure to use it, and this is quite fun to do Well, when you have a specific object and you want to turn it into a brush and also use it well, it is kind of fun. You can also define the brush pattern or define it whenever you want. Let's say this is basically naming the brush how you made it and what name you're going to give it to. Okay, Now let's go up to the next one, which we have is Adobe PDF presets. You can also use presets which is going to be Adobe PDF. And there are also other presets which you'll be able to use which you will find add on Preset manager, migrate the presets and also export, import the presets. Let's say if you have any presets saved on your PC, make sure to use it whenever you want and you'll be good to go. So here we go, we are done with this. Then we have this remote connection. Now how does remote connection help you out? Well, the remote connection basically helps you out in several ways. Let's say you don't have the actual, you know, your device where you want it, okay? Or let's say you worked on your phone, but now you want to work it on your PC. This just helps you out to collaborate and also work simultaneously on several devices. And also work it up according to your need. Hope you know about it and also if you want to fill with it, just make sure they're connected to your other PC or device. Whichever one you have or you can also do with the friend whenever you want. Now let's go off to Edit again, and then we have is color set. When you click on Color Settings, there's going to be a lot of color settings which you'll be able to select. Now you can see that I'm using N A general purpose two, but there are also other ones according to your need. I'm going to suggest you to use the default one which is going to be SRGB C six, and you can also use CMYK according to your need. But as you can see that there are a lot of things over here, such as the CMYK, the gray, the spots, the RGB, CMYK, gray, color management policies which are using, and also the working spaces. Now can select whichever one you want. Let's say on CMYK, I'm using US web coded, but I can use let's say GFA standard. Okay. But I'm going to use on gray most of the time I use it gamma ray 1.8 and on spot I most of the time use dot gain 10% It just helps you to define different colors and also find at the colors whenever you want it. But most of the time as I'm using SRGB, RCM, Y, K, it doesn't matter that much to me when I'm using gray or spot. Okay. And on the color management policies, I'm going to suggest you to use them on default because if you go through a couple of them, you might be facing a couple of, you know, problems or hassle finding out the colors from your palette and also working with it. And you can also, you know, profile mismatches. And also you find the missing profiles and also ask when pasting it's going to be up to you, so use whichever one you want and press on. Okay. And then you will be good to go. As you can see that even though I'm using RGB, the colors are still the same even when I change it. But if you're using CMYK, it will basically change a bit. So make sure to use the default. You know, if you don't have much knowledge about, you know, changing the profiles and also using which policy you want to. So then we have is the other ones which are assigning profile. You can assign profile to whenever you want. And also change the, you know, let's say layers. And also change the color pattern whenever you want. You can click on profile. When you click on profile, just change it to whichever one you want. Let's say I wanted to use Fuji Film. And you can see this is how it looks like and all of them are different according to their need. But I'm going to do is use obviously SRGB, which I most of the time use, and obviously you'll also find SRGB and also CMYK. It's going to be up to you, but I'm going to use the SRGB like this one, which I'm using most of the time because it works just better on my profile and also I'm just more used to it. But totally up to you how are you going to work with it. Then I'm going to go off to edit and then we have is convert profile. You can also convert your whole layer into a total profile and also your work space into a total profile. So that let's say you're going to select this profile and only those workspaces and only those color patterns and also engine intent. All of them will be applied and you can go off advanced if you want to, but I'm going to do is skip it. And after done, just press on. Okay. And my profile has been safe, and you can see this is now CMYK, but I'm not going to use CMYK, I'm going to use RGB color. And there we go, our back on our RGB. But one thing is that in RGB, it's just kind of hard to find out different colors or, you know, all the colors on your palette and all on your work space. And then we have is keyboard shortcuts. If you want to go through or learn all the keyboard shortcuts, all of them are over here, basically all. Okay, just make sure to select on them and select whichever one you want. And there is also not application menu, but also tools and also task spaces according to your need. And also panel menu, they use whichever one you want. And also you can memorize it if you want to, but it just saves up a lot of time when you're using keyboard shortcuts. And then we have this menu. You can see the menu over here, well, basically the same. These are basically the shortcuts. And then we have this toolbar. And also the last one is preferences. You can use whichever preference you want, such as interface workspace tools, history, file handling, and when you select any one of them, you'll basically see an interface open up. And there will be basically opened up on your workspace and you'll be able to work with them whenever you want. You can select on them, you can select on image processing how you want it. You can go to performance. You can see how it works, let's say this is how it's going to work. And you can also minimize the Photoshop usage on your gram, okay? You can see 5,020 but you can also reduce it. Also increase it so that you can save up a lot of things. And also on the GPU, you'll be able to change it whenever you want. If you have any external GPU, then there are a lot of things except for these. You can also change the workspace according to your work. And after you're done, just press on. Okay, so we're basically done with this Edit ribbon on our Adobe Photoshop. Now let's go off to the five tools which you're going to learn about. Now. The first tool which you're going to learn about is going to be our Eyedropper tool. It basically just helps you find out which color you're using. Now you can see I'm using black. And you can see it over here that the black has been selected. If I select on over here, you can see the white has been selected. Even if I have other colors, it's going to be up to me. Now. You can also use the same thing on three D materials and also on color samplers. Okay. You can find out which color you're working with and it will also give you know where it is and also what are the codes, or what are the hex codes. Now on the next one we have is ruler tool. You'll be able to use the ruler tool and also find out the range of it. And on the next one we have is the not too we'll be able to apply in whichever note you want. And also it just works like a comment over there. So I'm going to remove this Person controls, and you can see it has been removed. The next one is going to be the counto. Now select on whichever object you want, you can see 123 and just ongoing. Okay. Just select on whichever part you want and there we go, we have it. Okay. So it just basically helps you to find out which object is first or it just helps you to find out layering each and every object. Now, the next tool which we have is the spot healing. It would just help you to heal up specific parts of, you know, specific images and, you know, if you have any problems with it, you will be able to heal it up. Well, I'm going to show the extra ones to you on after, you know, using a photo on it, there is this past two. And also Content aware and also red eye fixing tool, we're going to go through that later on. Next one we have is this brush tool, pencil tool, color replacement, and also mixer brush. It just helps you to use the brush tool. You can see it over here as I'm using white. If I'm using this one and also changing the size, let's may is change it to something around over here. And you can see that I'm using this one right now. We can use the same thing on the pencil tool. You'll be able to use the pencil, you can see it like this. Then we have this color replacement. You'll be able to change the color of specific parts by selecting on it and also changing the color. And this is the mixer brush tool. It just basically helps you mix up like certain parts, you can see the white and also this color is now blending up and you'll basically see white and black mixing up. So it just helps you to mix up separate or different colors. The next one which we have is going to be our clone stamp tool. It just helps you find out different parts and also clone up certain parts. Well, I'm also going to show you later on, and this is going to be our pattern stamp tool, which you'll be able to stamp up parts. You can see it over here. This is how it works. And also change it how it looks like. You'll be able to use whichever one you want, and you can see that has been added. Okay. Now on the next one which we have is going to be our, let's say history brush tool. It just helps you use whichever one you used previously and also art history brush tool which you can see how it works right now. Okay, This is how it works. This is our history brush and this is how I applied it in the last one. That is why it is applying it like that. On the last one we have is this eraser tool just basically helps you erase certain parts. Also there is also a background eraser. You can also erase the background and you can see the transparency over there. There we have is the magic eraser. It just helps you remove certain parts by selecting on certain areas. When you select on this, you can see that these parts are now being removed and you just have to select on it. And there we go, we have it. So hope you learned everything in this lesson about the Edit Ribbon and also the five basic tools. And in our next lesson, we're going to learn about this Image ribbon and also the next five basic tools of Adobe Photoshop. Till then, stay with us and hope you learned everything. And if you didn't understand a part, please let us know and we will guide you through the whole process. 6. Image ribbon and related tools: Welcome to another lesson of Adobe Photoshop Essential. In this lesson, we're going to learn about all about the image ribbon and also five basic tools which we are going to uncover without any further ado. Let's just hop onto the lesson by opening up Adobe Photoshop. On my screen, you can see that I have opened up Adobe Photoshop. Now one thing you have to keep in mind is that make sure to use the newest version of Adobe Photoshop. Well, now I'm using Adobe Photoshop 2024 because there's this new update. Through each update, there's going to be a lot of changes, lot of buck fixes and a lot of features to stay updated with these facilities. Make sure they're updated whenever the new update comes up. The first thing we're going to do is going to be clicking on new file. Let's just say I'm going to use this default Photoshop size, I'm going to press on Create. Now you can also customize it by naming your preset, fixing your width and your heights, and fixing what format of these sizes you want. You can use pixels, inches, centimeters, millimeters, point Pis. It's up to you. Then fix out the color mode. You can use CMYK, which I most of the time use. But for this lesson I'm going to be using RGB color and then fix in the bits. If you have like an older device, make sure to use eight bit or 16 bit because the higher the bit is, the more process it's going to take up on your CPU. Most of the time I prefer using 16 bit, even though whenever or whichever device I try to use, it's not going to be bad. Most of the time I try keeping a 16 bit because it's just those medium resolution. Then you can fix out your background, you can use black, white background color. You can also use transparent or even customize it according to your need. Then from color profile like make sure to use SRGB. This is the most used color profile used worldwide. And then you can also fix in whatever type of pick cell aspect ratio. Make sure to keep that on default and then press on Creates. And when it has been created up, you can see this is how it will look like. Just like I said in this lesson we're going to cover up all about this image ribbon. And also we're going to start off from this history brush to let's start off with our, let's say our image ribbon and what it has for us. The first option that we see over here is going to be mode. So these are basically all about image mode. Now the first thing we're going to do is going to be opening up one of the image which I have on my resource file. You can also use those photos whenever you want. And if you want to use any type of photos or use them on your own, you can also use it. And I will also show you a website, or let's say a web page where you can download royalty free photos. So first off, go off to your web browser. You can see that I have opened up my web browser and I'm going to search for Picksales.com it on Enter. And there you go. You have Pick Sales.com You can go off to Pick Sales and use whichever photo you want. Another royalty free photo where you can download from is Unsplash.com it on Enter, and there we go, we have Splash. You can download it whenever you want and then use it as I already have my resources. So I'm going to do is click on File. Click on, you can see it over here. I'm going to click on this, press on open. The photo will appear up on my screen. It will take a bit of a time to process it up. Now you can see that the photo has been applied. Now what I'm going to be doing is obviously make sure to apply changes on these. First, I'm going to click on, let's say Image. Click on Mode, and then you can select whichever one you want. Now first off, let's just convert it into a normal layer and click on Image. Click on Mode and click on gray scale. Do not show this card. There we go. Now you can see that our gray scale has been applied to our photo. Now if you want a different type of mode, let's say I want a bitmap. Now, fix in the resolution. It will just make you a bitmap and you can use whichever output you want, whatever format you want, and also fixing whichever method you want. Let's say what we're going to do is just show it with you, show it with diffusion data. I'm going to press it on K. And you can see now this looks a bit grainy right now. One thing you have to keep in mind that obviously you can use control Z so that you can undo the process. It's fine. I'm going to click on Image again. Now let's use duotone. You can use duotone now if I do not use gray scale, we can also apply different type of colors. Let's go to use duotone now. In the next color I'm going to do is put red. You can see this is how it looks and put in red. Now if you want a different type of color, let's click on Tritone. Now from here I'm going to put in a bit of this, Press on. Okay, and this is going to be a bit of can. The last one I'm going to do is quatone. Now from here I'm going to do is using a bit of yellow press on. Okay, yellow. You can customize it if you want to. You can see these are basically like effects which you can apply yellow L there, we have yellow L two, you can fiddle through it and apply whichever one you want. And I'm going to go off the image again. And there we have is indexed color. You can also apply indexed color if you want to. You can see this is now the index color, because we've already applied in our color over here. This is now the index. This is the default. Now, let's go off the image again. Now, the next one is RGB color. Now, if you want to apply in a bit of RGB color, you can also apply it. It will make it totally RGB. It will not show S RGB. So all the colors inside of it will be formed with red, green, and blue. Let me just show it to you. I'm going to press on Images, we're going to click on mode. I'm going to do is instead of that, I'm not going to put an indexed color. I'm going to go back, I'm going to do controls, controls. There we go, we have it. Image mode, RGB color. Now all is red, green, and blue, you cannot see it. But if you go off to color patterns, you will basically see that RGB is being used. And it can also go off the gradient as well. These are basically it. You can use them whenever you want. Now, let's go off the images again, and let's go off the CMYK color. I'm going to press on. Okay. Now this has turned into CMYK. Now you can see the difference. You can see this is now a bit darker control shift, and now you can see this is a bit brighter. Okay? So this is basically how it looks. Obviously, I try to use CMYK most of the time because the color ranges are a lot more bigger, a lot more larger than RGB. Because RGB basically means red, green, and blue. But when you use SRGB, it counts up to a vast number of colors which you can use, like 16,000 or so, so you can use them whenever you want. Then we have is lab color. Well, this is basically lab color which you use. And it doesn't make any difference from CMYK or SRGB because, you know, the lab which, you know, sometimes you go off to like, you know, Photo Studios. And they most of the time use lab color because it just gives you the exact color what you need. Okay? So you can use it if you are working professionally, you can use CMYK or, you know, Lab color. It's all up to you. Then for the next one we have is multi channel. Now for multi channel, it helps you to apply in two channels of color. Now you can either put like the green SRGB or R GB. It's up to you, but it's going to mix both of them up. But now you can see it's gray scale because we already put in our index color on this. That is why it's putting up a bit of that. The next one, which we're going to learn about, is going to be the adjustment. Now if you want to fix out the way your photo looks, you can go off to adjustment and apply whatever effect you want. Now let's first off, not going to click on them, I'm going to do, go back, let's just go back and apply the green on it. Go off the image. There we go. We have it now. You can also fix in the channels like 16 bit or eight bits. Let's say I got to go off to 16 bit. It's also good. It looks quite the same, but like, you know, let's say when you print it up or use it for channeling the data or projecting the data, you will basically see the difference. And when you export it, some details might crack up because obviously you're using eight bit, not 16 bit. If you are using like a higher end PC, you can also use 32 bit and also use 16 bit. It's all up to you. It's going to be very smooth if you are using a higher end PC or a higher end device. Now let's go off the images again, and let's go off the adjustment. Now let's fix up the brightness a bit. You can use this slider, you can use this number over here. And you can also fix this contrast from over here. And you can also click on auto. It will be perfect. Okay, I'm going to do is make sure to tweak it a bit and press on. Okay. And you can also use a bit of legacy if you want to, but as I don't want to, so I'm going to do is keep it just the way I kept it. Now let's go off the images and go off the adjustments. And let's fix our levels. Now you can see this color over here. These are the whitest parts or the brightest parts. Now if you go over here, you can see these bright parts are not being visible. To keep those bright parts over here, you have to keep them over here. Now you can see this lighter over here. This is fixing your bright part. This most of the time stays over here. But make sure to fix it in such a way. You can see, most of the time people keep it somewhere around in the middle, somewhere over here. Or most of the time keep it like one. Which is most of the time on default. Okay, this is one. Let's go off to images again, adjustment level, you can see now most of the time stays one. But if you take it over here, you will see that it will get darkened up and also this will move at the same time because both of them are connected. Okay. So it just basically fixes out your black part and also your dark part. You can see there is no whites over here. That means this part over here is dark and this part is white over here. So that means this part is bright, okay? Until this part, it's white. Now if you want to apply a bit more of brightness or a bit of exposure, you can also see this over here. This is basically kind of like exposure. It just makes out your white balance go a bit higher. You can see the white parts are now increasing until it is like super bright. Fix it up according to your need, and then we have this output level. You can also see the same thing, but this is quite the opposite. This part is the black, but this part makes it white. Because you can see this is the black holder, right? Black. And when you take it to this part, this becomes white. And when you take it to this part, it becomes black. So it's all up to you how you're going to work with it. You can also fix it on auto. You can also fix it up with custom dark, whichever one you want. It's all up to you. You can fiddle through it and apply whichever one you want. Then let's go off to the next one, which we have curves. Now, a curve is a very professional type of thing. Well, you don't need to work on all of it because it works a little bit of too much with the lights. Now, if you do not understand the inputs of the lights, the exposure and everything, so you will most probably not be able to fix it up because it also is intimidating to people who are quite intermediate. I would suggest you can fiddle through it, but check because there are a lot of points which you can make. And tweak up a little bit of these details. Let's say I'm going to do is use a very basic. You can see this is how it will look like. You can see the details are tweaking out and I'm going to put another one over here. There we go. This is how it should look like. Now you get the details. Then you can also fix in the B points and points which is darker, higher. These are basically points which are the highest in lights and colors. You can fix them up whenever you want. You can also draw in whichever line you want to put. You can see this is how it might look like. You can see you can also use different type of colors according to your need. And if you don't want it, just press on cancel and then you're good to go. Now let's go off to our next one. You can see exposure is not available right now because we already applied in our exposure. Then we also have our vibrants, we already applied those. Then we have is hue and saturation. You can also fix in your hue and saturation. The hue basically works in a way that it will change the way it looks like it changed the color. You can see most of the color inside of it are green. But what if you want a bit of pink? You can see it will mix a bit of pink to it. It will mix a bit of white and purple and blue to it. Okay, So you can use whichever one you want to let, semino keep it. This then you can fix in the saturation. It just basically fixes out the color output. Now if you take it to the left side, it will become darker and loose color. If you take it to the right side, it will gain more color. You can see now this is becoming more green. And then you can also fix the light. You can see this is bright and this is darker. So make sure you keep it I most of the time, try keeping it under, you know, minus because it just gives you a better output. But if it needs or if you want more details out of it, obviously, try tweaking it a bit and fixing how it looks like. And it can also change the colors from over here. You can select it from over here. And you also have these color options and you can fix it. After you've done this, press on. Okay. And that color will be applied to your image, so do not worry. Then we have this color balance. Well, this is basically one of the most important features in Photoshop and this is how we are. All of them are quite important, but this is quite like the end. Now obviously, if you want your color to pop up, you should use these features. Now, the color balance works in such a way it fixes your lights and your colors, your exposure, brightness, contrast, and saturation at the same time. But one thing is that it only takes in green and blue, and magenta and yellow. Let's Samin to do is make sure to put a bit of green, put a bit of blue, or maybe put a bit of magenta and a bit of over here. Now you can also fix in the tone balance. What part do you want to fix? Do you want to fix the shadows? Do you want to fix the highlights or do you want to fix the midtones? Now, most of the time when I use our fixed highlights, I try to keep it a bit darker because it just helps you to fix out the shadows or fix out the highlights so that it doesn't look too white. Okay. It fixes up the details. Now if you want to fix your shadow, you can try to increase the brightness so that the parts which are dark will obviously shine up. But obviously if the details are corrupted or the details are not that good, it will not look good. Let's go to do make it wider. You can see the parts which are underneath are not looking that good, so make sure to use fix it according to the needs. Now if I put in a bit of green, you can see all of them are turning green, but no, no difference are being seen. Because, you know, it's just fixing the shadows, not the midtones. Now if you want to fix the midtones, it will apply effects on all of them or let's say most of the details which are visible on the photo. So you can use whichever one you want to fiddle with it. And you can also get a preview if you want to. You can see the changes. And after I'm done, I'm just going to press on. Okay. Now let's go to the next one, which we have on adjustment. Then we have a photo filter. You can apply whichever filter you want. You can see all of them. You can just apply and fiddle through each filters if you like it, make sure to use it, because obviously it gives you a very good type of filter. Not too intimidating, not too deep, neither too light. It's all up to you. And you can also fix up the color. Let's say I want to use a bit of blue. There we go. Now the photo is looking blue. You can also add it to swatches. Press on. Okay, Let's say to use a bit of different color, press on. Okay. And you can fix in the density. You can see now it is looking totally pink. You can also fix it up. Most of the time I try keeping it like on 30 or 20, so it gives off a bit of tint and a bit of shade to it, so I'm going to keep it to 30. Now, you will obviously find out a bit of pink on each and every one of them, but it just turns out to be like a shadow. Now let's go off to our next one. Let's go off the images. And then we have a color lookup. Now, you can look up colors. It's like finding out whichever color you want. I would like you to skip it because obviously you have the picker tool, so I'm going to skip this for a while. And then let's go off the adjustment again. And then we have this invert. Now if you want to invert the effect of any part or any subject, then you can also use this invert. Okay, When you click on invert, it will invert the whole application of whatever effect you put. Now if I put effect on only this one and put on invert, then it will invert or put the effect on all of these. Now you can see all of the features or all of the edits that I put on these image. Okay, so this is how it looks like, let's say without the default photo or the index photo. So if I did not have the index photo, this will basically just look like this. Okay? Without the details and all of it, But this is how the light looks like. So I'm going to press on control Z and you can see the actual photo with the details and with the edits. Now let's go off the adjustments. And then we have is posterized. You can also posturize effect if you want to. You can see this is how it looks like when you poster it. You can fix out the levels. This is basically like density, so you can posturize it just like this, you can make it something like this. So it just looks animated. It's all up to you, even though you can see the details are very good. So I go to press on cancel because I'm not going to be applying it because I have a lot of things to edit over here and a lot of things to show. Then we have is threshold. Well, threshold basically you can work with multiple colors at the same time. So you can use it, press on Threshold, and then you can fix it up, Just like this. You can fix it up the details. And you can also apply different type of colors. But I'm not going to be using it for this lesson. I'm going to be applying or, you know, showing you how you'll be able to make like streetwear designs or something like those. You can make it through threshold because it just allows you to work with multiple colors but obviously vibrant and very good looking. Okay, and then let's go off to image. And the next one which we have is going to be gradient map. If you want to make a gradient map, it's also up to you. It's basically like bitmap. So just without the color, you can use it, and if you want to fiddlterate, you can. The next one which you have is shadows and highlights. You can also fix in the shadows and you can fix in the highlights. It's all up to you. Now, You can fix in the shadow just like this. And highlights increase it just a bit. And there we go. It is now looking a lot more better. Now let's get to adjustment again. And then we have is desaturate. Now you can see that we obviously saturated the photo in such a way the color pops up. Now if you want to desaturate it, you can press on this and the photo will be desaturated. It happens that you will have no color, it's basically like gray scale. Okay. So I'm going to do is go off to adjustment again and I'm going to do is replace the color. I'm going to pres on the control Z first I'm going to go off the image and then we have is replace color. You can replace whichever color you want. Let's, I'm going to do is use this and I'm going to do is change it with a bit of this. Press on, okay, Press on, okay. And you can see this is now looking a lot like brighter. And you can go off over here. Go off to adjustment, Replace color. I'm going to do is going to be click on Image, Click on the Color. And then I'm going to do is going to be Localized Color Cluster. I'm going to do select on it and I'm going to select whichever color I want to press on. Ok. Do fixing the hue. Fixing a bit of this, this, and press on Ok. And there we go. Well, you cannot see most of the changes, but obviously there's a bit of tint which you can see on the white parts that are looking a bit of pink. This is how it basically works. Then we have is the last one which is called equalized. You can equalize the color however you like, but obviously it will not look good because it just equalizes the, the ray, the light of all the details. So it's up to you if you want to apply it, then we have this auto tone, auto contrast. If you want to apply those auto tone and auto contrast, it's up to you. Let's have to press on this. And you can see auto tone has been applied, but no changes because we apply all of it on our own. Press on controls, you, I'm going to keep it just the way it is. Then you have is this image size. You can fix out the image size if you want to. You can fix out the width. Height, fit, resolution centimeters. And also what type of resolution it is. And you can also resample it if you want to, so I'm going to keep it on however it is. Then we have is the canvas size. This is basically the canvas size which we are using, which is Adobe Photoshop default. You can use it whenever you want. And you can also apply an anchor if you want to. It's all up to you and you can fiddle through it whenever you want. And then we have a trim and crop. There we go. We can trim out the parts. Press on, okay. And it will obviously trim out the parts. But there is nothing to trim over here. So this is how it will look like. Now if you want to duplicate this layer or duplicate this specific part, you can obviously go off here. Click on Duplicate, Leaves Copy, and there we go, it's going to open up another duplicate over here in another tab. And you can see we have the color two color profile which we are using is called Lab Color. Then the next one which we have is going to be let's say Apply Image. You can also apply images. If you want to click on Apply Image, you can use whichever color you want. And then it will apply the same image wherever you are trying to apply it. Then we have this calculations. You can also fix up the calculation if you want to. Let's say the opacity, the blending the channel, the layer, the sources, and also each and every one of them. You can also mask it up if you want to, It's all up to you. But as this is Photoshop, masking is not that important because obviously you can remove and apply it wherever you want and also save it with a transparent background. But masking is most important in like when you use softwares like Adobe Illustrator because it works a bit too much with graphics and that is obviously a software which manipulates graphics. Okay, so you can like skip masking part in Adobe Photoshop. The next one which we have is called Analysis. You can fix out our set measurements and sect data points. Ruler tool, count tool. We can see that like data points custom. Then we have ruler tool. It will just show up the ruler over here and you can fix out the details all about it. I'm going to press on Control Z. I'm going to click on over here Analysis. I'm going to click on Ruler Tool, and we don't need it. I'm going to do is just keep it wherever it is. I'm going to do cross on here. There we go. It's not visible anymore. Then the next one we have is the council. You'll be able to count parts just like this. If you have multiple data, you can work with it. Because it just helps you to remember what part you want to edit. It just helps editors to fix out or select parts which they want to fix consecutively. It just counts out that part and then on the next part which we have is the last one which is place scale marker. You can fix in the marker, you can fix in the scale if you want to. You can fix in where you want to put the color or scaling part on. And you can also put in the display text if you want to. You also have this font option which one you want, and you have only three fonts which you'll be able to use. We're going to skip that part, and we are done with this image ribbon in Adobe Photoshop. And what facility and what tools it has to offer. Now as we're done with our ribbon tools, let's head off to our five basic tools of Adobe Photoshop. Now, just like I said, we're going to start off with this history brush tool. Now, how does this work? You can see other tools over here too, but this basically helps you to heal out certain parts. Now it doesn't match the color history states, so I'm going to use Click on Image, click on Mode, click on RGB Color. Now when you click on this, you can see it could not use the history brush because of the current bit depth does not match. Now you can also fix in the current bit depth a bit. Now you can see you will be able to fix it. Now it doesn't show up. Something like this I'm going to do is fixing the size. There we go. You can see it is fixing out the parts and removing the edits that we did. Now you can see the brush is now working. It just basically helps you out something just like that. Now what I'm going to do is going to be clicking on this and then we have is art history brush too. It also works the same way. It just helps you to remove the parts and blend it up, just like this. But one thing is that it also blends up the part and also applies the same, or let's say the default color which was over there. Let's part on control Z, I'm going to reduce the size first. Let's, I'm going to take it right over here. There we go. We have our brush and then let's go over here. When you click on it, you'll basically see that parts of it are now you can see it like this. Let it up in the right, click on its history art brush tool. There we go. Fixed. Okay. Next we have our erasor tool. This basically just helps you erase the photo or whatever element you have. Then we have this background erasor tool. It just basically removes the background too At the same time, then we have this magic erasorol. It helps you to remove 13 parts of it. Let's press on controls Z. Now from this part, let's say I want this specific part to be kept on the rest to be removed. Now it basically identifies the borders and then removes the part. You can see this, Let's go to select. On this part, you can see the only the leaf parts are being removed and nothing outside of it. But as this part was merged, it has removed that part. There we go. Basically this leaf has been removed. Now let's go out to the next one, which we have is this gradient tool. It just basically helps you to fix the gradient. You can see this like this. You can also fix the transparency if you want to. But that is how it works. I'm going to do pre on control Z and keep it just the way it was. Let's show you the other tools of Adobe Photoshop. Now the next one I'm going to, there we go. Then the next one we have is the pain bucket tool which just helps you to fix out the color of a specific part. And the next one is treat material drop. As we don't have any treat material, we cannot use it. I'm going to press on control Z. Then the next one which we have is the blurred tool which just basically helps you to blur up certain parts. I'm going to use increase size fix in the hardness. Now if I select on this, we can see the part is now being blurred up. You can see the details, now it is getting blurred. Let's zoom in a bit more and let's show you. You can see now it is turning blur. It just helps you to make portrait quality photos whenever you want so that you can use it. You also have the sharpened tool. You can zoom in and sharpen out certain parts. When you click on this, let's increase the size of bit, Fix the hardness, and let's use it. You can see this is now getting sharper. You can see the colors are now too much. So I'm going to press on control Z and keep it just the way it is. Next we have is this much tool. It also helps you to smudge up certain parts. Let's say'm smug this up like this, smudge this up. Well, similar. Take this smudged, see this is how it works. And you can also use it with this water over here, which is now dripping. It is basically very simple to use these tools, and the next one which we have is going to be the Dodge Tool. You can see the Dodge Tool, we'll be able to dodge out certain parts. It will make it a bit brighter. Okay? You see it is basically used on dark areas to make it a bit more highlighted. The next one is called the burn tool. You can burn up 13 parts to it, will make it a bit more darker and give it a bit more blackish vibe to it. You can see the difference, now you can see it looks a bit burnt. Okay. That is why it is called the burn tool. And then we have the sponge too. It just basically helps you to sponge out the part to make the burnt and those dust part a bit more smoother. You can see this is how it works. Sponge it is now extracting or removing a bit of color when you like drag it, they're too much. You can see the colors are now being removed just a bit. Not too much, but not too less either. You can see on the white parts, it is a bit more visible. So these are the five basic tools on and after the image ribbon in Adobe Photoshop. So hope you learned everything in this lesson. And if you have any question about any tools or any work, or any let's say step, then feel free to ask me anything and I will help you and guide you through the whole process. So thank you for watching this video up till the end. And let's move on to our next lesson where we're going to learn about the layer ribbon, all of the tools over here. It's going to take a bit of a time. If the next video doesn't end in like, let's say in 25 or 30 minutes, I will make sure to make two parts of it and show you and complete the whole thing to you and clear it up. So thank you for watching this video again, and let's move on to our next lesson. 7. Layer ribbon and related tools: We welcome to another lesson of Photoshop. In this lesson, we're going to learn about layer, ribbon and five basic tools. Let's start off by opening up Adobe Photoshop. Just like I said, we're opened up Adobe Photoshop. Now in this lesson, we're going to learn about all about the tools and layers. And also the next five tools which we've used. Okay, now we're going to start off by opening up a new file. I'm going to click on New File and this interface opens up. So I'm going to select this default Photoshop size, which is useful for everything. You can use that and customize it according to your need. You can fix out the width height, You can fix out whichever format of size you want. You can fix in the orientation and also add in artboards if you want to. Now on the resolution I'm going to use, most of the time, I keep it 300. It gives you off a decent quality picture. Now there we have is also what type of resolution you want, is it pixels per centimeter or pixels per inch? Select that too, and fix out your color mode, which I most of the time use RGB and CMYK. From here, you can also select whichever bit of file you want. Let's say we have eight bits, 16 bit and 32 bit. Well, if you've seen my previous lesson, you already know about these now. Then we have is background content. Then select whichever color you want. Fix out your color profile, also your aspect ratio, and then press on Create. Now after I press on Create, you can see that an open page for me appears up. And it also shows me the last tool which I used from here. I used this punch too. In this lesson or at the end of this lesson, we're going to learn about pen tool, the text tool or horizontal text tool. Then we have is this path selection tool. And then we have rectangle tool and then we have the hand tool. Now on the corners you can see that there is something pointy over here. Now those mean that there are more tools inside of that. If you want to expand that selection of tool, just right click on it. And you'll basically see that multiple tools will appear up from over here. And it goes for the same, those who have it. Okay, now let's start off by learning and knowing all about this layer panel or this layer ribbon. Now it's all basically about layers. Okay, In Adobe Photoshop, layers play a very vital role. Now what you can do is, first off just click on Windows, and then from here, select on Layers. When you click on Layers, you will basically see this layer panel open up right over here on the right bottom corner. It basically helps you to create layers after layers. So that when you add in or edit any photo or any object inside of that layer, you can also like discard the layer if you don't like it. You can also see and preview a lot of edits. First things first, I'm going to do is added another layer, you can already see the background and this is layer one. Now what I'm going to be doing is clicking on Layers, and then we have is new CSS, copy SVG, duplicate layers, and also delete. Now when you press on new, you'll basically see a lot of these. But the main part of it is how you can open this layer. You can also select it from over here from the layer panel. Or you can select open up those tools and use those tools by clicking on from over here. As Sma do is click on Layer. You can name the layer and select whichever color you want. Fix out the mode, whichever type of transparency you want, and blending option you want, and then press on. Okay, you can also use previous layers to create clipping mask if you want to. Well, I will also show to you what clipping mask is that I'm going to use press on. Okay, But you can also name which whatever layer you want to name it as after you've done this, press on. Okay. And you'll basically see another layer will open up over here. Now let's start off with the next one, which is going to be layer from background, group, group from layers, artboard and all of those. You can fiddle through these tools and see how those work. When a person layer for background, you can see you'll be able to make a background and fix it up person, okay. And you can fix this background over here and also make more background layers. Now then we have is the next one, which we call it the group. Now if you want a group multiple layers at the same time, just select them first. Press on Group, and press on. Okay. And you can see a group has appeared up, but this is only the background. Now what if I want all of them grouped up? If you want to group up all of them, you can do it from over here, or you can also go and do it from over here. Well, I will show you both of the methods. Now I can click on New. Now click on Group from Layers. Now select whichever groups you want, Select them. Group two, press on, okay. And you can see groups who has been made. It can also drag it right inside of that group. You can also do that, or you can also keep it, however it was, control Z. And you can see, now this is also a background, now I'm going to go off on Layers, click on New, and then we have this couple of art boards. They can also fix out whichever artboard you want to save it as a group or as a layer. Click on Artboard and then fix it up. Press on. Okay. And then you'll have another artboard. In the background you can see Ard board one. And also group one where we have another background. Now what I'm going to do is going to be control Z and undo all the process and group all them up together. I'm going to click on them, press on Control, and with your mouse, select the layers or click on it. You can also group it up from over here. Click on New Group and you'll be able to make a group over here. Or you can also press control and G on your keyboard. That's for the shortcut method control. There we go. We have our group one and all of the layers are inside of it, including the background. Now I'm going to do is click on Layers and then we have is copy CSS. If you have any CSS file or any CSS data in let's say your panel and you have a couple of designs. You can also take those CSS files and group them up over here, and you can also copy the CSS. Now you can also see that we have SVG. Svg stands for Standard Vector Graphics. If you have any SVG files opened up on Adobe Photoshop and also on your panel, you can copy the SVG and apply it in whichever software you want, and it will start working well. The advantage of using SVG is that you can take it and applied anywhere you want, and it is scalable. Now, there we go. We have duplicate the layer. Now if you have any edited layer which is edited and you want to make a layer or make a duplicate out of it, you can write, click on it and then you can duplicate layer from over here. Or you can go off the layers and then duplicate the layer however you want. Then you can see layer to copy press on. Okay, and on. The layer will open up right over here. Now let's go off the layers again. And then we have is delete. If you want to delete any layer, just click on Layers, press on. Okay. Yes. And there we go. The layer has been removed. I'm going to do the next one, which is quick export to SPNG. If you want to save any file or any layer SPNG as a photo type of format, you can click on Quick Export SSVG and it will be saved up on your PC or on your device. Then we have Export. As you can also export whichever layers you want. It is going to be up to you and you can configure it however you want. Fixing the format, the width, the hide, the scale, and everything. As I don't have any data over here, it is not showing me anything. If I had something, it will show me a previews. Go off the layers again. And then we have is rename layers. You can rename your layer from double clicking on this and you can also name it from over here. Now the next tool which we're going to see is going to be layer style. Now whatever type of filters you want to apply it on, your specific layer is going to be over here. Now you can see blending option, Bevel, emboss stroke, inner glow, inner glow, satin color, overlay gradient overlay pattern, overlay, outer glow and drop shadow. And you can copy and clear and also global light each and every one of them. Then we have a smart filter. It only appears up when I apply in a layer style, as I don't have one now. It's not showing me anything and is also grayed out. In our next lessons, I'm going to be showing you how these layer styles work. Then we have is this new fill layer. Then we have a solid color gradient pattern. You can also apply whichever type of background you want. Then we have is also a new adjustment layer. Now if you want to adjust, customize any of the newer layers, you can customize it from over here. Well, most of the time when you have a default or a background, you cannot do it directly. You have to select the layer first and then apply it. But if you apply or make changes on any background or a default layer, you can customize it directly from over here. But not from there. You can use this new adjustment layer. Then we have this layer mask. If you want to mask up any layer or any subject from an image, you can do it from over here and you can fiddle through these tools. Then we have this vector mask. If you have an SVG opened up or any Vectorgraphic open up, you can reveal them, hide them, fix the current path, delete, enable, or link it up according to your need. Then we have this create clipping mask. Well if you want to create a clipping mask, it's basically something like let's say circle and then showing you how you can put it inside of it. Well, I'll show it to you in this lesson now. First off, let's just finish up the next tools. Then we have a Smart object. If you want to convert any item extracted from, from here, what you're going to do is you can create your smart object. If you extract any element from any image, you can convert it into an object and into an icon, or maybe as an SVG, or maybe even a PNG or JPG. You can use it. Then we have update all modified content. You can also update the modified content or all the SVGs or smart Art objects. Then we have is embed all links. Now if you want to embed any link or convert any link into an element, you can also do it from over here. Then we also have rasters. As I don't have anything, you cannot see it. Let's go off to the next one, which is video layers. If I have any video or customize any video over here, you can use the options as I don't have any. Let's move on to the next one. Now it's new layer based slice. Now if you have any slices or sections in your background or in your panel, so you can customize it from over here. Then we have this group layers which is the same thing. Control and G, ungroup the layer, shift control and G. And then we have is hide layer. If you want to hide any layer or make it invisible for a while, you can also hide it just like that. Okay, now the next ones we have is arrange. If you want to arrange any layer, bring it forward or take it backward, you can do it from over here. You can also send it all the way back and bring it all the way front if you want to. Then we have this combined shapes. If you want to merge all the shapes into one, you can combine the shapes, but it has to be a shape. It does not work with photos. But if you turn that photo into a smart object, then you can do it. Then we have is this lock layers. You can also lock up the layer so that no edit can be done on that layer. Then we have merged down, you can merge it down. You can merge the visible and also flatten the image if you want to. Then we have matting. If you want to matt up differing, remove black mat or remove the matt, white matt, you can also remove it directly from over here. We are basically done with this image or let's say our layer ribbon. Now let's go after the tools. But before going into the tools, let's show you how you can make a smart, or let's say a clipping mask and also a smart art object. Now first things first, I'm going to click on File, click on Open. Then I'm going to do is going to be opening one of the resources which is named Leaves, which I've used in my previous lesson. I'm going to click on that, press on Open. There we go. We have our leave photo processing up. And it will appear up in just a moment. I can see that we have our image over here and we also have our untitled one. Now the first thing I'm going to do is going to be turning this into a normal layer. Just drag it somewhere and you will basically see that it will turn into a normal layer. Now you can see it is not. Now first off, select this move tool and then drag it somewhere can convert it to a normal layer. Now you can see that this has been converted into a normal layer. Then I'm going to do is going to take this directly on layer one. Okay? And can see that we have this layer over here of photo. And then I'm going to do is going to be right clicking on it. And then I'm going to do is going to be converted into smart objects so that it will turn into a shape. Okay? Now when it turns into a shape or an element, what I'm going to be doing next is going to be right clicking on it. And then I'm going to do is first off, let's make a shape, okay? I'm going to be clicking on this rectangle tool, which is, I'm going to be over here. I'm just showing you how you can do it. I'm going to do is make a rectangle first. When I make this rectangle first, what I'm going to be doing is going to be clicking on this sue. As the rectangle is done I'm going to do is click on this move tool and then I'm going to do, take this over here, take this at the top. And I'm going to do right. Click on it and create a clipping mask. You can see the photo is now inside of this rectangle. Now you can take this over here and move it up and customize it according to my need. This is basically how you make a clipping mask. You can also do it with different type of shapes. It's all up to you, but the method is quite the same. But there's going to be another method of how you can do it, right in person control Z. I'm going to do is take the image out. I'm going to click on Delete. Okay. Now it is deleted. Now I'm going to do is go over to file. Okay. Now as I go over the file I'm going to do is find out Place Embedded. Click on Place Embedded, and then find out the photo which you want. Click on this, click on Place, then we have this layer over here. Now it will turn this photo over here. Take it right over to Rectangle. Then I'm going to do is going to be doing the same step. Right click on it. Correct clipping mask. And there you go. You have it. Now you can see that this clipping mask has been done. Now what I'm going to be doing next is clicking on this rectangle. And I'm going to do is take this over here. First off click on Rectangle and then move it. What you can do is click on both of them, right click, and group them up or convert it into a smart object, two, so that this turns into a shape. It's going to take a bit of time and you can see this has turned into a shape. This is the process of how you can make clipping mask and how the smart object also helps in this process. Then we have is this tools. Okay. The first tool which we're going to show you is going to be the Pen tool. Now it helps you to fix out, obtain parts and also make masks out of it. Or you can also convert it into a shape and take that specific part out. Okay, You can select on it and click on Mask and then take the part out. Or can press on control C, control V and also fix that part out and also copy it. Then the next tool which we have, we're going to write, click on it and then we have is free form. It helps you to use the pencil in a free form. Okay? You can see this is how it works. You can use it as a pencil. This is how it is. Okay? Then you can also take that part out, out, copy that part out. It's all up to you. Press on control Z to under the process and remove those out. Now I'm going to do is show the next one which is going to be the curvature pen to. It also helps you to make the same type of selection, but this is going to be curvature. First off, make a line and then you can curve it up. This is how it works. You can make logos by using these tools. Well, I'm going to be showing it to you at the end of this course, then I'm going to right click on it. And then we have a anchor 0.2 It helps you to put up an anchor on L. It helps you to put up an anchor on any of the image or any element which you have. Then I'm going to do is going to be right clicking on it. And then we have is delete anchor Point. If you want to remove the anchor point, it's all up to you. You can remove it by using this tool and also clicking on the anchor where you put it now. Right click on it and then we have is convert point to. Now if you have any one of these points, you can convert it by using this tool. It is basically kind of like an editor for these lines, okay? Then you can also convert it from over here. If you have another line, there we go, I can convert it from over here. And I'm going to do is just click on free form tool and show to you how that editor works. Now as you can see that I have the points I'm going to do, click on this and convert points too. And I can take or convert any one of these points. I'm going to pres on control Z and remove all of these lines as we're done with this pen tool. The next one we have is this text tool. First off is going to be our horizontal type tool. Now if you want to apply in any text in your panel, just click on this. And there we go, we have our text over here. Animado is going to be clicking on this part. And there we go, as the text is wide, it is not visible, Soma is going to be clicking on text again. And you can see the color has changed. Then we have this vertical type tool. If you want vertical text, it's all up to you. Click on this and it will open up. Or text will appear up in just the way it appeared up horizontally. Then I'm going to do is going to be showing you the next which is vertical type mask too. If you want to mask up any object or mask that up in such a way so that you can also convert or take a certain part of your background as an image or maybe any element and also apply directly over there as an object. Then you can use these tools. I'm going to just like click on this and there we go we have a vertical mask. You can see this has turned into an object. Then I'm going to press on control Z. You can see this is how it looks like. We can also do the same on horizontal type mask tool. I'm going to be clicking on this and there we go. We have our mask over here. Select any one of these options over here. And there we have it. We can also take it in such a way that the background moves or the element moves. You can see this is how it works. Now I can convert it or take it wherever I want. I hope you understood everything about this one. Now, the next tools which you're going to learn about is these tools, which is path selection tool. If you want to select any path so you can also take those parts. Okay, just like these mask tools, if you want to make a mask, then you can use the path selection tool. Now when you have those masks, if you want to convert it or take it away, you use these tools. Now there is also direct selection tool. If you have any pad, you can also directly select it and customize it according to your need. The next tools are these, the rectangle tool, ellipse tool, triangle to polygon tool line two, and custom shape to. If you want to make any shape, just make sure to click on them and we have our shapes. Now let's do the next ones. There we go. We have ellipse tool is going to be, wait for a while. There we go. We have our lips tool. Then the next ones which we have are going to be the polygon tool and triangle to meds. Right click on its triangle two, there we go. The next one is going to be the polygon tool, right click polygon, there we go. The last one is going to be our custom shape tool. It basically depends on your resource. If you have any custom shape tool on your PC or on your device, then you can also use those. Then I'm going to press on the Shape tool. Then I'm going to do is going to be selecting any one of the shapes I want. Now I'm going to be clicking on this. Then we have color bust or there we go. We also have shapes, leaf tree, wild animals. You can use whichever one of these packs and then select the shape. There you go, you have your shape created. The last one we have is line tool. If you want to make a line, you can use this tool to make that line or into a shape. Click on this, There we go. We have our line. We can make more lines if you want to. We're done with these tools too. The last tool which we're going to learn about is going to be the hand tool. It basically helps you to hover or navigate through Adobe Photoshop or the panel. Now if you want to just move, just click on this. And there we go. You can use this move tool and then Recconics. Then we also have Rotate View. You can also rotate the panel and see how it looks like. Okay, hope you learned everything about this lesson on how you can use this layer ribbon and also the next five basic tools of Adobe Photoshop. Thank you for watching this video till the end. And in our next lesson we're going to learn about how we can use this type ribbon and also the rest of the tools over here on this side panel. I hope to see you in my next lesson. 8. Type ribbon and related tools: Welcome to a new lesson of Adobe Photoshop Essential. In this lesson, we're going to show you all of the type ribbon tools and commands and the five basic tools, or the rest of the basic tools from the last one we left from. Without any further ado, let's just hop on the lesson by opening up Adobe Photoshop on our device. As you can see on my screen, I have Adobe Photoshop opened up. Now I'm going to do is open up a new file and show you everything about this type ribbon. First thing I'm going to do is going to be, let's make sure to go off the prints and find out a four. I'm going to press on Create. If you want to make any customizations before getting into the lesson or before getting into the file or making your artboard, make sure to do that, because later on you have to customize it a lot more. Just like I said in the beginning of this lesson about, we are going to learn everything about the type ribbon, all the tools and commands. And we're going to also show you each and every one of these tools. The tools which you're going to use is going to be the zoom tool. Then we have the edit toolbar, the colors, foregrounds, how we can swatch it up. Then how we're going to do is use the quick mask mode and also the chain screen mode. Without any further ado, let's just hop onto it and start from the type ribbon. So the first tool, or the first command which you find out in Adobe Photoshop is called more from Adobe Fonts. Now what does it do? It will open up a web browser for you. And what happens is that it will take you directly to Adobe Fonz.com or Adobe Dot Funds. From there, you'll be able to use whichever font you want. Let's say I'm going to go off the Photoshop again. First things first I'm going to do is make sure to put a text and show you how it works. Click on Text option, and then I'm going to do is going to be putting in a text box just like this. Now as I have my text box, I can go off on Properties and change whichever font I want. But obviously we cannot find every one of the funds there is over here. We have to go off the Creative Cloud. And even some funds are also missing in the creative cloud. For that purpose, what we have to do is go off to atopy funds. I'm going to go off to my web browser. And from here you'll be able to search for any sample funds you want to use. And if you find anything useful or if you want to use any specific ones, you have this option over here called Ad Family. It will be added directly to your creative cloud app or your software on your device, which is going to be Creative Cloud Dektop. You'll be able to use it or applied directly on Adobe Photoshop or whichever software you are using by Adobe. Okay, so that is the advantage of having Creative Cloud or Adobe account, so that even if you apply one thing or apply an extension on one software, or directly from Adobe Creative Cloud, it will be directly downloaded already and be saved. And you can just apply it later on from any software you want to use it. Now you know how you'll be able to use this more from Adobe Fonts. Now the next one is called the Panels. Now we have a different section or different lesson about the panels. But this is going to be a different type of panel, just like it says from the ribbon. It's all about the type. That means it's going to be typography type of panels. Now there could be character panels, paragraph panels, glyph panel, character style panel, and also the paragraph styles panel. From here, I'm going to use this character panel. Now on the character panel, when you click on it, you'll basically see a character panel appear up on your workspace. And you also have a paragraph panel on your workspace. So make sure to fiddle through them and check how it works. Well, these are really basic, so make sure to use them and fiddle through each and every one and see how it is being applied to your text. Now, on the next one on the panels, we have glyphs Panel glyphs are basically like symbols which you can use on your workspace as a text or not even as a text, directly as a graphic. Now from here, you'll be able to apply whichever one you want. Let's go off to my text box and apply the ones which you want. If it doesn't get applied on your screen, what you have to do is make sure to put another text box and then you'll be able to apply them. And it can zoom in and out in this workspace or in this space too. Now let's go off to the next workspace, which we'll find out on this type panel. Now we have a character styles panel and paragraph styles panel. Well, these are going to be conjoined together, so we just click on any one of them. And you can see we have the character styles. Now if you want to save up any font or any alignment, any dent, and save it up so that you can apply the same features or the same formatting on a different text, on different documents. Then you can save it up directly over here, as you do on your layers. You'll be able to click on here and you'll be able to customize the style which you want to save. And you can also delete them whenever you want to. And the next one is the paragraph styles panel. So every alignment about your paragraph is going to be saved over here if you want to save it as a preset. Make sure to file through each and every one of those to see how these actually work. Now let's go off to the next tool which we'll find out over here is called the anti alias. The anti alias is going to be performance dependent. Now first things is that you have to have a higher end device if you want smoother, crispier, and sharper graphics. If you do have let's say a low end or a medium end device, then I would suggest you to keep it on Windows LCD. But the higher you keep it or the higher you keep the quality. Let's say smoother, stronger, crisper, and sharper, it's going to take a toll on your device, which is going to be your CPU and your GPE. So if you want a smoother experience on Adobe Photoshop, then just keep it on Windows LCD or keep it on Windows. And it can also change it off to smooth because it puts up a bit of feather on each and every one of your graphics when you're editing up any elements on Adobe Photoshop. So you can also file through them. Now, the next one over here is called the orientation. Now if you want landscape or portrait, make sure to select them. You can change up your workspace or change up the way it looks like on your workspace by fixing it up, and you'll be able to see that now it is vertical. Press on control, sets under the process and keep it horizontal. If undo doesn't work, what you're going to do is going to be selecting it up. Let mad is going to be selecting this part. Click on it. Let's go off the text first. As I have selected all of the texts, I'm going to do is go off the type again and go off the orientation and select on horizontal. And there we go, we have it. Let's move on to the next one. Over here on this type ribbon we have open type. There are a couple of references which you can use on your text. Now you can see that we have contextual alternates, old style, let's say I want to change the style bit, let's say want to use ordinal. I'm going to click on it and it will be applied. But if it doesn't make a difference, make sure to use all the ones which it does show a bit of difference on it. You can also use dials, alternates. There we go, we have it. I'm going to select on it again. Let's go off to the next tool which we have is extrudy tread. If you want to turn any elements or let's say your text panel or let's say text panel from here into a treat panel or treat extrude. You'll be able to apply directly, but first thing, you need a bit of stroke on it, go off the type, and then we have extruded treat. It will take a bit of toll on your CPU and make it stutter. If you have a lower end or a mid end device, make sure to use it carefully. Let's go off to the next one. We have create work Path if you want to make a work path or outline. If you've used Adobe Photoshop. If you've used Adobe Illustrator, you already know how this outline works. You can turn any element to any text into a shape. You can even put a photo inside of the text, listen to you. Zoom in a bit and show it to you how it works. Now as you can see that there are a couple of outlines at a couple of points from here. I'll be able to edit them just the way I want to. 70 is going to be customizing them a bit. Now you can see that we have the outline now. I can also edit them up whenever I want to. And I can also use the Outline. Just the outline, so that I can put a couple of elements inside of it and mask it up. Make sure to use them too. And if you want to go off to something advanced, you'll be able to use this outline option to turn it into a shape and use a bit more customizations on it. Let's got the type ribbon again and then after you make your outline, your extruded three D will be available. You can click on it and you'll be able to put up it on your outlines. Okay. The next one over here is called the Convert to Shape. If you want to convert any of your text or any of your elements, any of your photo into shape directly, you can just click on this and it will turn into a shape. Okay, So click on the selection tool. You can see now we have an outline over here. You can also customize it. And you can take it out individually, or take every individual alphabet over here and turn it into a text. And customize it individually too. Let's go to the next one over here. Let's undo the process so that I can turn it back into a text and I can use it. Here we go, We have our text layer back again. If it still is not, just make sure to undo the process until you see this option over here. So do use that text option, rest on this. Here we go. Let's go to the type ribbon again. And the next option over here is called the rasterized type layer. If you want to rasterize any of the layers or any of the type layer so that it doesn't lose any resolution, then you can click on this sized type layer and it will be turned into a shape, or it will turn into a vector graphics. No matter how much you extend it or increase the size of the text or any of the elements, it will not lose its resolution. So you can rasterize it. And it is mostly used when you are masking up any element or masking up any photo inside of it. You can try using this rasterizing effect. Let's go to the next tool over here, which is going to be converted point to text. So first off, you're going to need an outline for this. Select on this text option. First you can see it has been rasterized on press on control Z to undo the process into a text. There we go, induce click on this text option. Make sure to select on every one of its. I'm going to go off to type. The first thing you're going to do is going to be converted or create work path. After you are done with this, you go to type and then you can convert to point text two, you can press on a K, and you can see that it will take a bit of time to turn it into a point text to K. Then you'll be able to customize it however you want. And you can see this is how it will look like. Well, it doesn't look any different from how it looks like on the work path. But there is, it basically helps you to select a particular area of a shape in a photo and it is still doing it. Are doing the same type of process on the text. Now you know the difference. Let's got the type. Now the next option over here is called the Warp Text. This is like an effect which you can apply on your text. Let's click on Warp Text, and your cursor will turn into something different. But first off, this type of interface opens up on your screen. First thing you're going to do is going to be selecting the style. Let's say I'm going to do is use maybe arc lower. And you can see it has turned into this. You can fix it out on which scale you want it or which orientation you want it. Let's say I want to use it non vertical. Here we go. It has been applied on the vertical scale. You can also keep it on the horizontal, which looks a lot more better. You can also fix the bend. You can fix the horizontal distortion and also the vertical distortion according to your need. After you're done, just press on, okay, and it will be applied directly on your text. You can see this is how it looks like. You can also remove it or change it wherever you want to. Some of us take it a bit at the bottom. There we go. There we go. We have our text, and we have warped it up. Let's go to the next one on this type ribbon, and now we have this match font. Now how does this match font work? What happens is that it selects up a certain area in your workspace or your file and it detects the text or detects the font which you're using. After you have selected the area, just make sure to press on. Okay. While seven is going to be selecting the part, click on Match font and there we go. It has been analyzing. Now one thing about this is that it will detect up, no matter what format you're using. These are the types of fonts it has been using. So make sure to use the ones if you want to use the same matching font on different documents or files. And select the ones or like remember the name and just press on. Okay. And it will be applied directly or you can select up the text again and apply it from over here to both of the method works. You can change it directly from the panel and you can also directly change it from the properties panel to Let's go to the next tool, which we have is called the font Preview size. Now it's going to depend on the size of the font. Whichever size you want, you'll be able to select it. Let's say I want a small one. Let's say I want a large one, extra large, and also huge. What I'm going to do is click on Extra Large. And you can see that the preference is going to be used. Now you can see that there is no difference when I apply it, but as I've already applied this text over here and also customize it, it will not make any changes. What you have to do is that when you are reviewing any text on a customization, then it will be applied, or then you will see that it is going to be extra large. But the size this is using right now is going to be from the properties panel and what size I want or desired. Now the next tool which we have over here is going to be the Language options. Now if you want to use any specific language, native language you want to use in Adobe Photoshop, make sure to use it and just click on the one which you want. And there are a couple of options too that we have East Asian features, Middle Eastern features. Now these are like work spaces, which is going to be based on your region. Make sure to use those two. Then we also have top to top leading. Bottom to bottom leading. Then we have this RTL, Arabic digits, kind digits, varsity digits. Make sure to use the one which you want and just press on its. Or let's just click on, let's on direct or default direction. So make sure to click on the ones which you want. And it will be applied as it is already default. It is not making any changes, but if you want a specific work space for your specific region and how the people work in that specific region, you'll be able to change that option directly from this language option from here. The next option over here is called update all text layers. If you have a couple of text layers on your workspace are opened up on your option or your layers in your workspace. Well, sent, make a couple of these texts. I go to click on this text option. There we go. We have a couple of these texts right now. Just make sure to put in a couple more. Here we go. So now you can see that I have three of these text options, right? But I want to update all of them together. I'm going to go off the Type ribbon and then I'm going to do is going to be update all text layers. First off, select on any place of your background. What I'm going to do is just select on the background. There we go. I'm going to do is go off the type and update all text layers. And you will see that all of the layers or all of the text updates will be done like at the same time. But first thing you have to do is put in what updates you want to put in. And for that purpose you have to go off the type again. And then we have this option of manager rising costs. Now when you are updating all the text, there could be replaced text, there could be change of spellings. First off, you have to load it up and then you're going to update it altogether. What we have is managed missing fonts If you are using any fonts or if you're using any file which someone else worked on it or you downloaded a preset. But on your version of Adobe Photoshop, you do not have that file or you don't have that font. Then make sure to click on Managed Missing Fonts. And it will detect a the font which you're using on your workspace and show it to you in a different panel. And you can see that whatever text I have is already on my workspace or I already have it on Adobe Photoshop. So it will not show you any warning or any pop up panel. So the next tool over here on the type ribbon is going to be Paste, Lora Mipsm. This is basically like the cut and paste as the text or the fill text is going to be loamibsm. You can paste it up in whichever text box you want to use. The next ones or the last ones are going to be low default type styles, if you have any type styles on your workspace or if you have saved it up on your work space on a toy Photoshop, you can load them up and you can also delete them if you want to. Let's go off the type again. And then we have a save Default Types styles. It will save up the default type styles which you're using right now. If you want to customize them, what you have to do is go off the type, go off the panels. Go off the character styles panel. And then you'll be able to save it and also delete it whichever one you want, and you can load them up directly from Low default and save default type styles tube. So I hope you understood everything about this Type Ribbon in Adobe Photoshop. How these tools work and how the commands work. And there are also a couple of, you can see that there are a couple of extensions which you'll be able to use. But one thing about this is that on the type Ribbon there is no shortcut key. But you can also use the tools according or along with these commands in this type ribbon. As we are done with this type ribbon, let's go off the tools or rest of the tools which we have to cover up in this lesson. In our previous lesson, we covered up until this hand tool over here. Now we're going to start off from the zoom tool. Now the zoom tool is basically very simple. What you have to do is just zoom in and you can also zoom out, but there is a shortcut key for it. You can select on this minus two if you want to, but if you want to toggle through minus and plus in an easier way, just make sure to click on Alt or hold onto Alt. And you can see the minus will turn into plus and let it go again, and it will turn into minus. Okay, it works the same way. Just make sure to click on this Zoom tool or click on the Zoe tool over here. If you click on this, you can see there's this Plus option. But when you hold on the Alt again, it will turn into a minus. So make sure you use them too and see which one is more comfortable. This option or the shortcut key on your keyboard. The next tool over here is basically the edit tool bar you're going to write. Click on it and you can see the Edit toolbar option appears up. Now from here, you'll be able to see what key or what shortcut key is assigned to which command or which tool. You can see Move tools V, Arbors V. Then we have different ones of them, you can basically see all of them. And you can also remove any specific tools out of this panel over here. Now, one thing about this panel is that we are using essentials. You can go off the Windows, go off the workspace, let's just show it to you. Go off the Windows work space and we are using essentials default. That is why we have all the tools opened up directly on our workspace. It makes our work space a lot more easier and it makes, you know, beginners to be, you know, very basic or let's say it will be very easy for beginners. Okay, You have to just click on this option. Click Edit Toolbar, and you can select the ones which you want. And you can also remove the ones which you want. Let's say I don't want to use this treaty material. Click on that, You'll be able to clear the tool. Okay. You'll be able to clear the tool and you can also restore the defaults. We can save it up and you can also remove them if you want to. After you're done, just make sure you click on Done and then you're good to go. And if you have any extra tools over here, that means that a specific tool is not enabled. Then what you're going to do is just keep it on over here. Let's, I'm going to do is keep it over here. There you go. You can see that this is not available or this cannot be found over here. Just press on Done, this is going to be polygon. And last, the tool to click on. Okay. And basically you will find out that Polyol lassitude is not over here. You can see only magnetic lassitude if you want to enable that. Again, go off to edit tool bar. You can see it over here I'm going to do is take it directly on this panel. You can also take it inside of another word space or another section over here. But make sure you keep it on the category of tools which you have opened up. After you're done, just make sure you click on Done and then you're good to go. Now the next one is called the color panel. Now this is basically the background color. And in different type of software there is this, the field color and stroke color. But this is both the background color. The one which is at the top is going to be, let's say the primary color. And then we have a secondary color, we, Sema is going to be making a shape. If you've seen my previous lesson, you already know how to make the shape. There we go. We have the shape over here and then we have is this green color. You can see that when I clicked on this or when I made the shape, it already turned into green. But what if I swatch it up sauce, make another shape. And you can see that this might be red. Keep it on. Over here, press on. Okay. And then I'm going to do is go off the properties. Go off the fill, then I have to select it up. Okay. This is how this watch option works. This mainly works in cases of brushes, Led. Reduce the brush tool. There we go. We have red, but when I swatch it up, it's going to be green. Now, now you know how you'll be able to use this watch up color. But there is another method. Now let's say you are working with different type of colors, but you want to get back to black and white very fast. Okay, One method is going to be clicking on these colors that will click on it. And this type of interface opens up. From here, you'll be able to select the black, press on K, then you're going to watch it. Click on this, and you're going to click on White and press on K. You can see that we have black and white, but this takes a lot of time. Now another method of swatching this up or toggling into them is pressing on X. You can see when you press on X it will just change the color. Now we can do the same thing, let's just change it back again to something different. Let's use red. Swatch, it up, I'm going to use green. I'm going to just press on K, the Reg Habits, and then I'm going to use green and suddenly I'm going to press on X and that we have is red. Okay, so this is how this shortcut key works and this is quite helpful. Now, just like I said, if you want to get back to the default color, which is black and white, just click on this option over here, which is D on your keyboard. Click on X, and there we go, you have black and white enables again, press on X. There we go, we have white over here to see. This is how simple it is now about this color like palette or foreground color. You'll be able to use these hex codes, RGB codes, HSB codes, LAB codes, and also CMYK codes. Make sure you use that. You can also add this watch if you want to. After you've done this, press on. Okay. And you can also go off to color libraries and select out whichever theme or whichever palette you want to use. Now the next tool over here is called the Mask Tool or add to Mask Tool. Now you can see that if you want to apply in quick mask mode, you'll be able to apply it in quick mask mode. You can select on this and already all the object has been masked. If you select on this, then you or you have to select the subject and also remove the background. This is how these two options work. You'll be able to quick mask up certain objects in your file, so I will have a separate lesson for this. Let's move on to the last tool Over here on this tools panel is called the chain screen mode. You can toggle through different screen modes using a shortcut key. I'll show that to you later on, but if you right click on it, there are three of these modes. One is standard screen mode, which is already opened up. And we have is full screen mode with menudar. You can see now this is how it looks like, we do not have the UI to close the OB Photoshop. Then the last one is called the full screen mode. You can see this type of panel opens up, don't show again full screen, and if you want to get out of it, just press on Escape and then you get to go. Now we're going to do is use the shorted keys to fiddle through each and every one of these viewing panels, our viewing sizes click on, there we go, full sized with the tools. And again, to make it full screen without anything. Okay, so make sure to hit on Escape or you can also go after the last one and press on F again and it will revert back to how it was at the beginning. Hope you guys understood everything about this lesson on this type ribbon and also the rest of the tools, or rest of the basic tools in Adobe Photoshop. Make sure to not skip any part, because if you do, you might miss out on something very important. Later on, you might face a couple of hassles. Hope you understood everything, and if you have any confusion or any question about any part of this lesson, then feel free to ask me and I will guide you and help you through the whole process without any further ado. Let's move on to our next lesson where we're going to cover up everything about this Select ribbon and all of the tools and also show you a couple of shortcuts in this ribbon. 9. Select functions: Welcome to a new lesson of Adobe Photoshop Essential. In this lesson, we're going to cover up all the tools and show you how the tools work in the select ribbon of Adobe Photoshop. Without any further ado, let's just hop on the lesson by opening up Adobe Photoshop on our device. As you can see that I have opened up Adobe Photoshop and I'm going to do is going to be opening up a new file number. Just click on 84. If you want to make any customization by even naming your preset details, you'll be able to customize it from over here. Now from here I'm going to do use CMYK color that I'm going to press on Create. After this file or this page has been created, this is basically like a layer or a background, and we also call it a canvas. So we're going to go off directly on the Select ribbon. Now the first thing I'm going to do is going to be import a photo and also a shape. So first thing I'm going to do is going to be clicking on the Shape option for a tangled tool. And there we go, we have Shape over here, and it will already have a field which is white. What I'm going to do is to make sure they use different color so that we can see the difference. Sat, click on In Y, K, use this purple color. Okay, there we go. We have the shape over here applied directly. Now I'm going to do is go off the file, click on Open, and I'm going to do is make sure to use another file or another resource I have attached in a couple of resource files with this whole horse. So make sure you use them. If you don't want to use them, you can go off to the browser and download it on your own. There are a couple of specific sites which you'll be able to download resource from. Some going to do is go off to Adobe Photoshop essential. This is the resource going to do is open up the web browser. Now from here, what you're going to do is search for Pick Cells.com Okay, good Sales.com And you can see that all of the photos over here, even the videos, are royalty free. So that you can use it for your resource to work on it, or to work on Adobe Photoshop. I'm just cut off this and you can use them for this lesson. I'm going to use this Leaves, okay, leaves file. I'm going to press on open, and it will open up directly on Adobe Photoshop. It will take a bit of time to process it up on Adobe Photoshop, and it will open up directly. You can see that this is still RGB and this is CMYK. We can change out the color option or the color space over here, so induce pert, take this whole thing, convert it into a normal layer, and then I'm going to take it over directly on this untitled one file as this opens up. And then press on control to select this file. And then I'm going to do is going to be reducing the size so that it fixes or it is fitted to the workspace or this canvas. Now as this has been fitted to canvas, I'm going to show you all of it. Okay, I'll show you all of the changes or all of the tools in the Select Ribbon. Click on the Select Ribbon and the first option that appears up is all. If you want to select all the elements in your workspace of Adobe Photoshop, even if you're using different type of softwares, you can use Control as a shortcut to select all of the files, even text and all elements. Click on Control A select on this, all and all of the elements will be selected all at once and you can drag all of it together. First thing you have to do is press on control A on your panel. Then, there we go, we have all of them selected. You can go off the background to and press on control A, and you can go off the layers and press on control A. And that specific file will be selected or the specific elements will be selected all at once. You can see now we have the outline. You can see this is how it works. But I'm press on control Z so that I can selected. You can also de select any specific file by going off to select. And click on the select so that it will be selected. The short key for de select is Control Control A for selection of all and everything. And control D for deselecting everything in your work space. The next to which you have is called the reselect. If you've selected any file and you want to, or you accidentally selected, you can press on Re select, which is shift control and D, and then all of them will be selected back again. So that is how it works less and is going to be applying two photos at the same time can also open that. But we're going to do is going to be going off to layer one and I'm is going to be taking this rectangle into layer one. Here we go, two of them will be together. Okay? Now, first thing about this, I'm going to show to you how this works. I'm going to just double click on this background. There we go. Just click on, I'm going to select this rectangle. I'm going to delete it. Okay, there we go. Now you can see that could not complete your request because the content layer is not directly editable. Some press uncontrolled or control D to deselect it, we go mad is deleted directly from over here or tingle one has been permitted. Now go off to layer one. And I'm going to do is make sure to apply a box or a shape over here on the same layer. And you can see that this does not appear in the same there. But what happens is that when you're using different color spaces, sometimes it, you can face a couple of hassle. But you don't have to worry because you'll be able to select them whenever you want. And if you're using icons and import them altogether, all will be on the same panel, all on the same layer. So make sure you use it and use the ones which you want. From here. I'm going to use press on control A, and you can see all of them has been selected all at once. So I'm going to go off over here on this panel again, or select this tool first, which is the move tool. Let's go up to the next tool over here. Now we'll see and select on the specific panel over here. I'm going to use press on control D so that I can be selected. I'm going to press control A. Now as that has been selected, I'm going to press on control again. I'm going to select this part or this rectangle, double click on it. We go, I'm going to press on control to select the outline. And then I'm going to do is going to be reverted or inversed so that it can select the other ones. Go off to select, you can have this inverse option, but we don't have any elemented side of it. I'm going to do is going to be making another box over here. There we go. We have rectangle two over here. What I'm going to do is going to be selecting both of them and trying to turn it into a shape or into a layer. Now you can see that I have this photo. Now I'm going to do is make sure to put two. Let's say I'm going to put on two more shapes. Go off over here. Just make two shapes, small two shapes. And then I'm going to do is going to be linking both of them. Click on both of them from the layer. And then what you're going to do is going to be click on this link option so that both of them are now linked. Then you can also unlink it later on. You can also rasterize the layer. Okay, so you can also group these layers too. And you can also make duplicates. We have merged shapes. There we go. Two of them have been selected together. Press on this. I can see both of them has been turned into a shape. Can select both of them up together. So another thing what you're going to do is unlock the background so that it turns into a layer. Okay, is going to be selecting this layer. Or I'm going to press on control T, we have selected that. You can also resize it if I want to, and you can also inverse it directly from over here. Me is going to be selecting this part. You select this one over here, son control, and then you get to go. You can also cancel it if you want to. Now we know about this inverse option. The next one is all layers. If you want to select all of the layers in your word space or the layers panel, you can select on all layers and all of them will be selected. The short key for all layer selection is Alt Control and A, you can also click on over here, click on All Control and A, All of them will be selected. Another method is going to be holding on the shift and select the ones which you want. But anything about shift is that you can skip and also select the ones which is in between. But if you want to select specific layers, click on Control. Select the ones which you want, and only the specific ones will be selected. You have to use your mouse and your keyboard at the same time. Let's go to Select again, and then we have de select layers. If you want to select the specific layers which you selected, just click on Deselect and they will be selected. Okay, so that is how it works. Let's go to the next one. We have fine layers. If you want to find any specific layer, what I'm going to do is find in layer one, layer one, there we go. We have layer one and you'll be able to find them directly on this layer panel. Let's go to the next one, which we have is isolated layer. You can even isolate a specific layer so that you don't have to put any edits or you will not even be able to edit it. Just click on this, select the layer first. Let's just isolate this layer so that I don't have to edit anything. I'm going to click on this. And you can see that this layer has been isolated. And you can see this is how it works. And there we go, we have the background at the bottom. And this has been isolated, but you won't be able to customize anything on this one. Okay, press on controls. I'm going to keep it not isolated. I'm going to press on controls again. There we go. Okay, so we have this layer and we also have these shapes. I'm going to remove these shapes as I'm not going to be needing that anymore. Let's go off the leaves over here. Just take it or keep it over here. Okay? I'm going to just right click on it. And then you can also use whichever, you know, formatting you want to. So first thing I'm going to do is go off to select again and then we have this color range. Now this is one thing about the color space of how you want to use the color range, what range of color it's being used. If you have RGB, it's going to form up with red, green, and blue. And if you want to use and Y, K a different one. If you want to use lab color space, it's going to be different color spaces every time go off the color range. And then you can see that this type of panel opens up from here. You can fix in whatever type of range and fuzziness you want to customize it. Let's select the image so you can see the image right now. Use localized color thrusters, or clusters. From here you'll be able to fix out the fuzziness. And you can see the preview too. I'm going to fix in the range. There we go. The range has been applied and this is the preview. You can also invert it if you want to and press on. Okay. After you're done and everything will be selected. Now you can see that there is no pick cells. First thing I'm going to do is going to be turning this into a photo again, or I'm going to open this layer or open this document and file again. I'm going to press on. No, I'm not going to be saving it. I'm going to go off open, I'm going to open up the leaves. Press on Open. There we go. And I'm going to do is going to be click on Select and go up the color range. And then I'm going to do is going to be fixing the fuzziness. Click on Image A fuzziness range. You can also click on different type colors that want a bit of yellow person. Okay? And there we go. If there is nothing selected, it won't work. So make sure that like keep the generate fill or make sure they generated with AI, you can agree on this. This is another feature you can see. Type your prompt and you'll be able to put in whatever you want and it will generate the photo for you. So let's go off to the next one over here on select. The next is focus area. On this focus area, you'll be able to focus on any specific parts. Let's say you're going to do is click on this focus area option over here and you can see that this is being processed. Sue Fix in the in focused range. Lemon. Keep it on Somewhere around 5.50 You can also open the advanced option of image noise level. You can select the view leminue on black, I'm going to keep it on black. You go fix in the image Noise The output to which layer you want, I'm going to put a layer mask. And you can also soften the edges if you want to and press on. Okay, And that effect will be applied directly. You can see we have a layer mask applied directly. Okay, that is how it works. Let's got the select again. And then we have a subject object from your specific chino file or photo, which you have. You can also select certain subject. You can see now only this part has been selected. I can remove this part to and customize it the way I want to. So I'm going to press on the select the government press and control Z. And there we go, we are back to how it was. The next to over here is called the Sky. I'm going to do go file open and then I'm going to do is make sure to open up the Sky option. Press on open. Okay. And then if I want to select only the sky of a specific photo, then I'm going to go off to select off the sky. Wait for a bit until it processes it up. We'll see that only the sky of any certain image will be selected, keeping the rest of it out of the photo. Now you'll be able to remove the sky and customize it just the way you want to. This is basically how it works. I'm to do press on this, I'm going to do to remove this part because I'm not going to be needing that. The next tool which you'll find over here is select and Mask. If you want to select any certain object in your photo, unless I'm going to do is going to be selecting this part. You can see I want this part to be selected. I want to fix in the transparency. You'll be able to do that. Sema is going to be clicking on the selections, and also you'll be able to invert it up if you want to. First thing you're going to do is going to be you have to wait up for a while so that it processes the photo and analyzes it. Which part it has to select after it has been analyzed. What you can do is make sure you put in layer mask. We'll be able to fix in the transparency, the presets. We'll be able to refine it. You can see the transparency to reduce it stuff, selected parts which you want to use. You can also clear the selection when you have selected any certain part. Now you'll have also a couple of tools to select from over here. You can see over here we have a couple of selection tools then you're going to do is going to be if there is no object then make sure not to use this show edges and high quality preview. From here you can fix in the smoothness the feather, the contrast, the shift edge, and you can also clear the selection if you want to. Okay, that is basically how it works. First thing I'm going to do is going to be pressing on cancel. Just convert it into a normal layer first. There we go, convert it into a normal layer and then I'm going to do is going to be right. 10. Filter option part 1: Welcome to another lesson of Adobe Photoshop Essential. In this lesson, we're going to learn all about the filter ribbon and every tool there is, and how it actually looks like. Without any further ado, let's just hop onto the lesson by opening up Adobe Photoshop on our device. From my screen, you can see that I have opened up Adobe Photoshop. Now the first thing I'm going to do is click on New file, just the ones I use most of the time. And I'm going to hit on Create. Because most of the things which you've seen are most of the edits which you need to do on your panel. I've shown that in my previous lessons. Now the first thing I'm going to do is going to be applying a photo. Now in my resource file, I have applied or attached in a resource photo, which I will be using in this lesson. If you want to use that, you'll find it in our resource file. Now, the first thing I'm going to do is going to be clicking on Filter. Now you can see that there are a lot of filters and converters, okay? So the first thing I'm going to do is going to be clicking on File. And I'm going to click on Open. And I'm going to do is make sure to use this photo which is called Tree. I'm going to do is click on open and that photo has opened up. Now I'm going to apply all of the edits or all of the filters on the specific photo and show you how it works. But before that I'm going to do make another layer so that I can apply all of the edits on this exact layer. I'm going to do go off the filters and then we have is convert for smart filter. You can convert it into a normal layer or a re, editable layer so that you can also apply all of the edits or all of the filters on the specific layer. Now I'm going to do is going to be clicking on filter. And then we have is this option called neutral filters or neural filters. When you click on this, you can see that it could not be complete because the selected area is empty. So you have to apply it on the background click on filter, neural filter, and you'll see that this is how it works. Make sure that you're connected to the Internet, so that you will be able to use all of the filters there are by Adobe Photoshop. Now you can see this is how it works. One thing is that you can also enable a couple of filter. You can download it, add to your Adobe Photoshop, and also work with it according to your need. Now you can see that most of them are not downloaded, so you have to download it up and this is how it will look. You can get a preview of how it looks like. You can see it just turns out to be a lot smoother Harmonization. Then we have this color transfer. You can apply whichever one you want and you just have to see our weight. You can see how it's changing. Let's see a couple of it. And you can see this is how it looks like. And then we have the last one which is a bit of gray scaled. Now another feature is that when you select on the ones that are already downloaded, you can customize it according to your need. Now fix out whichever color space you're using. As I'm using RGB, I'm going to click on RGB. Then fix out the hue. Fix out the brightness. I'm going to just keep it somewhere around over here. There we go. And then you can fix in the brightness. You can fix in the saturation. It's all up to you. And that is how it will look like after you're done editing with it. And after you're done, just press on. Okay, and then you're good to go. You can see that all of them has this option. The ones that has this option, those are active. You can apply those and you can see this is how it will look like. I'm going to wait for a bit. This is processing on the device. It will take a bit of a time. And after it processes up the whole photo, what it will do is apply the whole effect and it will change the way it looks like there. Obviously, there are other the effects which you can see over here. And you can also customize it just the way you want. You can increase or decrease the amount of strength, the amount of opacity, the amount of details, the background blur, the brightness, the saturation, the preserve color and all of it. You can see it over here. Then it can reduce the brightness. Background blur a lot more fix in it. And there we go, we have it Now you can see that we applied one of the filters and that is how it looks like. Now we're going to do is change the way it looks like and let's see how it will look. Now another thing is that you can also add or remove whichever part you want. Let's say you apply the photo or you apply the effect on a specific image. Now from certain part you don't want the effect to be applied, you have this minus option subtract from selection and it will turn or remove that specific edit from that specific part of the photo. I'm going to do is going to be control Z. There we go, Control Z. This is how it will look like. We are almost done with all of the neural filters. You can use it whenever you want. And then you also have this wave list where you can just generate portrait water long exposure. Then we have a shadow regenerator and we also have noise reduction from a specific photo. Use whichever one you want, just click on, I'm interested. And you have to click Submit and then you'll be able to use it. Okay, I'm going to do press on Cancel because I'm all done with neural filters right now. Now let's go off to the newer, or let's go off to the next filters which we're going to apply. Next we have is the filter gallery. Well, this is one of the most basic gallery, or one of the most basic filters which you will find in most Adobe softwares. So what are these, basically? So you can see that there are a couple of groups of these filters, Artistic brushstroke, distort, stretch, stylize, and texture. Okay. From there, most of the time I use this texture because there is grain inside of it and I try using it. I'm going to press on Cancil first, and I'm going to click on Filter. I'm going to go off to filter gallery again, and then I'm going to see how it looks like. The first thing I'm going to do is going to be clicking on Reset. So it just looks a lot more better. This is how it looks like. I'm going to do is take this, apply it, you can see. Then we have this cross hatch. Then we have is dark strokes, ink outlines like spader sprayed strokes, SumiE and other other formats of effects. You can see this one looks quite good. You can see cut out looks quite good, right? Then we have is dry brush. This is palette knife. You can apply whichever effect you want and see how it looks like. It will obviously give you a preview right over here. Now let's see the other ones. Let's say we have this diffuse glow glass and then we Ocean ripple and on Sketch we have these black edited ones. You can use them whenever you want to. Then on the stylize we have glowing edges and on texture we have this grain, mosaic, patchwork, stained glass and texturizer. Okay. Now another thing is that it works kind of like the same way. You can fix in or, you know, adjust the amount of quantity you're using on scaling, on relief. It's all up to you most of the time. I try keeping it somewhere around eight or five or five to eight. So it just looks a lot more better. But something above this looks a bit too, you know, just too much like canvas typed. Okay. So you can fix out where the light you want it from. You want the light from the bottom, You want the light from the bottom left. You want the light from the top bottom. It's all up to you. You can see now that for the texture, it looks like it's being like drawn on a canvas or something. You can see the texture. Okay? Then you can fix out whatever you want. You can also invert it up if you want to, after you're done, If you want that specific type of filter press on. Okay. And it will be applied directly on your photo. And if you don't want it, don't worry, just press on control Z and your edit is gone. Then the next filters which we're going to see is going to be adaptive wild angle. Now if you want to apply adaptive wild angle or wide angle, you can see this is how it looks like. Nelsmind is going to be selecting this to this, you can see this is how it looks like. Now I'm going to press on control Z. Do is going to be pressing on this over here. This is how it should look like is control Z. You can see this is how it basically looks like. You can fix out and make sure to apply whatever you want. Now I want something like this over here and you can see this is how it will look like. You can also use the other tool which we have is the move tool. You can move it up if you want to. You can see this is how it will look like after you're done. You can also apply perspective. You can also apply auto, press on, okay? And the other one which we have is full spherical. Now I'm going to press on control Z so that I can undo the process control Z. Again, I'm going to do is try to apply the other ones. And you can also fix at the scale, the focal length, the crop factor. It's all up to you. After you're done, just make sure to press on. Okay. And the photo will be edited just the way you've seen it. But I'm going to do is obviously press on control Z so that I can remove all the filters and obviously apply a newer filters each and every time after I'm done with the tool. Then the next one we have over here is called the Camera Raw Filter. Now what the Camera Raw Filter does is that it gives you the exact type of photography type of photos. Now I'm going to click on Get Started. Now the photo will appear right over here. It will take a bit of time, and if it doesn't appear up, make sure to cut it off and then get back again until it appears up on your screen. I'm going to press on Ensil. Anima Do is going to be clicking on Background, and then I'm going to do is go off to Filter and click on Camera Raw Filter. Now you can see the photo has been over here. Now just like AW Lightroom, it will give me all of the tools which I want to use. You can see most of these features are available on a lightroom. There is basically these light factors which you can use. You can see the greens, the reds, the blues being used in these photos. Now if you want to fix at the shadow, first off, you have to click on somewhere over here. And you have to fix it, just like this. And you can fix in the highlights and also the ranges of lights being used in the specific photo. Now you can also see this over here, highlights, okay, the red ones. Then we have the blue ones, okay? Now you can see the blue ones are not that visible. But when you click on this red ones, you can see the red ones being used perfectly on each and every side. Now if you want to customize it to obviously just click on this. And if you want to select this, you can see the green parts are now increasing. Now you can also fix it up just like this. You can see this is how it works. Then you can also fix up whichever color you want. You can also apply in monochrome. Then we have is BN, W and also auto. Now the light part is one of the most important features when you are editing a photo. Now if the lights are not good, it will not look good. So there we have is these sliders which are also available in Adobe Lightroom. Now you can fix up the exposure. You can see now how it looks. You can fix up the contrast. Use these sliders to customize it. I'm going to fix out the highlights. I'm going to do apply a bit of shadow, a bit of whites apply on it. And I'm going to do reduce a bit of black parts on it. And then we have is this color where we can also fix out temperature, tint, vibrance and saturation. If you want more color increase the saturation, increase the vibrance. You don't need to do tint that much, but you know, it will obviously put on a bit of effect. But most of the time I try to keep it less so that even though the photo is vibrant and saturated, it doesn't get that much dark. Now, if you want the photo to be warmer or cooler, you can use it. Make sure to drag it to the left side if you want it to look cooler. And if you want it to be warmer, just drag it more to the right side. But I don't like using it that much because it just makes this imbalance in this photo to look kind of too warm or too cool. The next ones where we have is this effect. In this effect, we have other sliders which we can use. Now from the sliders, you can fix out the texture. If you can reduce the texture, you can also increase it. But for here, I'm going to be reducing it a bit so that it just looks a bit smoother. Now if you want to fix in the clarity, it also works with the texture. Well, basically it's like making it a bit more vibrant. Having the borders more vivid, I'm going to do is increase this clarity a bit so that it just looks a lot more vibrant. Then we have a haze. You can also make the color to be smoothened out. It looks like it has been rubbed on, so that the color gets, it just gets brighter but smoother at the same time. Then we obviously have vignette which you can also apply to make the corner darker or wider. Then we have Is grains. If you want to apply grain to your photo, obviously you have it over here. Then we have the curve you can apply or changes to apply these changes to these curves. If you want to fix in the lighting of the specific photo, there's basically midtone shadow and also highlights. You can fix them up however you want. You can fix it up just like this. We do take it over here. The go looking quite good. You can fix in the highlights. You can fix in the lights, fix in the darks. And then we have the shadows looking a lot more better. Then the next one we have is color mixes. This is basically called HSL. Okay? And then we also have color. You can use whichever one you want. When you're using HSL, which is highlight shadow and luminosity, you can apply or make changes on those. Specifically, you have to work with colors. It's also going to detect the specific colors. Now here we have reds. Now if you want the reds to increase or decrease, you can fix it up from over here. You can also change the oranges in it. Okay. You can see how it looks like. Then we also have the yellows. And I'm going to use to keep the yellow to be less. Okay, because I don't want that much yellow. Then we have is greens. I'm going to increase it a bit on the equus, I'm going to make it a bit more bluer. On the blues, I'm going to take it to the right side. Purples to the left, magenta to the right, or maybe a bit to the left. Okay, so this is how it works. You can see saturation, luminosity, and all at once, you can fix out however you want and make sure that you have your perfect result. Even though I just just showed you how it works. The next one we have is color grading. It also works like the same way HSL, but this works with midtones shadows and also highlights. If you want to fix out your midtones, you can see it over here. But you can also fix out one by one if you want to. Now I'm going to do take this over to this side or maybe over here. I'm going to just take it somewhere around over here and I'm going to just take it somewhere over here. There we go. This is how it looks like. After you've done, you can blending. I'm going to do is make sure to fix in the blending a bit more. And you can balance it up with a zero or maybe a bit of minus. You can blend it up however you want. If you don't want any blending, just make sure to fix it up to the left side. You can also however you want the lighting to look okay, it's basically up to you. Another thing is that when you're done with it, you can also see the codes which are being used for the one for and also the one for L, which is highlights. Now this is midtones and you can see shadows. Then we have is midtones, highlights. And then the last which we have global, which helps you to customize it all at once. But I don't like using it because obviously you're going to get a different type of result when you are using or customizing each and every details, then doing it all at once. Then you can also fix in the Luminans if you want to. You can see it is changing. And if you increase it, obviously it will turn a lot brighter. Then we have is details. If you want to fix in the details of your specific photo, you can go through these options. Here we have sharpening noise reduction and color noise reduction. You will basically see the noise reduction will be applied and this is how it looks like. The next one we have is optics. If you want to fix in your optics of how it looks like, then you can fix it up just like this. Use the distortion to fix in the distortion of any of your photo, you can see how it looks like. Keep it zero and can also fix in a bit of vignette if you want to. Then we also have differinge. You'll be able to apply the amount of color being used. The purple amount is over here. The purple hue is over here. Let's say the green amount should be somewhere over here. And the green hue should have a lot of colors. But if you don't want that, just make sure like you remove all of these, take it over here. And zero. There we go, we have it okay as we're done with us this optics. And the next one we have is lens blur. If you want to apply in a bit of lens blur on it, just make sure to press on right now. And I'm going to do is going to be fixing on Apply. And you'll be able to apply in the lens blur according to your need. Okay, So you can see, you can zoom in and I'll just like this, hold on with your left mouse key and zoom left and right. Or drag your mouse left and right to navigate through it. Okay. We're also done with lens blur. The next one we have is geometry. If you want to apply a bit of geometry on it, you want to see the graph or you want to see the lines and fix it up with the help of grids or guides. Then you can or click on Geometry and use those tools to make your photo look a lot more better. Now, the last one which you have is calibration. Now the color calibration is a whole different thing. Now, you applied everything on your photo, but you did not calibrate the photo to be optimized or make it in such a way so that when you print up the datas are the photo is not going to be the same. If you calibrate your photo, the photo is going to be a lot more better looking and we'll have a better resolution. Now from here you can fix in the hue, you can fix in the saturation. Then we have a hue for green and also the blue primary. Fix out these colors. And after you're done, just make sure to click on Okay. And then you get to go. Now there are also a couple of other tools which we have over here. We're going to finish all of them at once. Now, here we have is this healing tool, okay? Now, if you want to heal out a certain part, let's say mad this, you can see this over here. I'm going to just click on this part and you will basically see that part is now being healed. Okay. So this is how this healing tool works. And they also have this other healing tool which is also quite effective. You can see now this is being healed now, if I don't want this part I'm going to do just drag it over it and you can see this part has been healed. I'm going to press on control Z so that I can remove these and make sure to make it look however it was on the first one. Okay? Or let's say on default. Well, it's not going to be totally on default because obviously I applied in a lot of effects or a lot of filters on it and made a lot of changes. Now the next one is called the clone. Now if you want to apply in a bit of clone app or let's say this whole thing will be cloned up in a certained way. You can use this option. I'm going to press on control Z so that I can remove that part. Now you can also fix out the size, the feather, the opacity, it's all up to you. Then we also have show overlay and also visualize the spots which you need to fix. Okay, so the next tool which we have over here is called the important masking tool. Now I'm going to do is going to be try on my own. Now, how do you do that now if you have any specific object or any specific, you know. Layer or anything would you want to select? Let's say here I don't have any subject, but let's try it out. I'm going to click Subject for me. Okay, so you take that element out for later purpose. You can see when I click on Subject, this whole tree will selected. And you can create a mask out of it in such a way so that we can take that element out and edit it in such a way so the background will not be edited. Okay, we're going to click on Substract. As I'm not going to be needing that, I'm going to create a new mask. Now I want to select the sky. Now you can see only the sky has been selected. And I can drag out the specific part of this and apply in a different image so that it looks like the background has been removed or in a way so that it looks like there is a different type of background on it. So it's all up to you. Now, the next tool which we have over here is called the red eye fixation tool. If you've seen like a couple of photos or obviously you've seen photos, right? And when the lens or when there is a flash on the photo, in a couple of photos, the eyes look red. Now if you want to fix that up, you can use this option called red eye fixation. Okay? You can fix in the pupil size, fix it up just like this. Then you're going to do is fix out a certain part. Hold onto this, or make sure it's selected just like this. And that part will be selected and fixed at the same time as we don't have any of those photos right now, so we cannot use it. The next tool which we have over here is called the presets. Now these are basically all filters which you'll be able to apply now. There are a vast amount of filters you can see. And these photos or these images or these filters will be applied directly on your photo and you will obviously get a preview too. At the same time, there is quite a lot of category of filters which you'll be able to use after you're done with applying any one of them or if you like any one of them, just apply them directly and press on. Okay. And then you're good to go as we're done with most of these filters over here. And you can also fix in the quantity of that intensity of that filter being, let's say being applied on it, and the amount of intensity on it. You can fix that up too and adjust the quantity. Then we have this more image tool. You can see Reset to open, reset to default, and all of those. You can fiddle through each and every one of these tools however you want. And obviously we have the hand tool over here too. And then we also have the zoom. Then we have is toggle sampler overlay. And then we have is toggle grid. Okay, so hope you understood everything about this tool and how it is very helpful. After we're done, just press on. Okay, and then you're good to go. You will basically see all of the effects will be applied on that specific image. Now let's go off over here. As we're done with camera raw filter, let's go off the lens correction. Now in lens correction, this is how it looks like. Now you can fix in how the lens looks like or how it took the photo. Now, as I did not use any camera or specific camera and I downloaded it, it's not showing me any details. Let's give this part and it just basically gives you a lot of info about the camera, the lens being used, and also fix out the lens. And if there is any glare, you can also fix it right from over here. So I'm going to press on Cancel, as I'm not going to be needing that. Now, the next one which you have is called Liquefy. Now, how does this Liquefy work? Now, let me just show it to you. You can see this is how it works, okay? You can extend out certain parts. You can mix out certain parts. This is how it will look like, okay? So this is liquefy and it can fix the size, the pressure, the density, the rate. You can also fix in the rates a bit more less. Mtu is going to be clicking on brush option and then we have is Face Aware Liquefy. Then we also have a couple more of these eyes then you can fix out whichever part you want to liquefy. If you want to liquefy the nose of a specific image, you can also do that also a mouth and then a face. Then we have this load mesh option. You can load mesh, you can load last mesh or save up the mesh if you want to. Then we have this mask option. Well, these are basically selections. You can subtract or insert whichever part you want and show it up according to your need. And then the next one which we have is view option. You can show up guides if you want to show up image show mesh, it's all up to you. And then we also have show backup. You can see backup. This is how it looks like. But that's what I don't want a back up. I'm going to press on. Okay, and then we're good to go. In this lesson, I'm going to make it two parts because we have a lot more to cover up. The next tool, which we're going to start off with, this vanishing point. I'm going to show it to you in the next part or the second part of this video. I hope to see you in my next part of this video and hope you learned everything about this lesson. And if you didn't understand a part or have any confusion or any question, feel free to ask me and I will guide you through the whole process. So let's move on to our next part of this lesson. 11. Filter option part 2: Welcome to our part to Filter Ribbon lesson. Now, without any further ado, let's open up from where we left in our previous part. Now you can see that I have opened up Adobe Photoshop. Now in our previous lesson, we were obviously working with our filters. We finished up to Liquefy. Now the next one which we're going to learn about is going to start off from a vanishing point. Now I'm going to click on vanishing points. Now what are these vanishing points? The parts that the lights do not get up. Okay, I'm going to do is going to be clicking on this part. There we go. Now I want this to be the vanishing point. Okay. Now you can fix in our, make changes of this. You can see how it works. Can change it up just like this. Can customize this too. Then I'm going to do the same thing. You can create up the mesh and you can use this marked tool to. That's also up to you. I can also make changes over here and I can also put up masks over on this panel. Okay. You can also make changes over here by fixing out parts. And you can also use the hand tool so that you can move up wherever you want. If you want to apply any of these treat effects, treat grids or guides, just make sure to use this vanishing point. And you'll be able to use these tools and also make up your vanishing point according to your need. After you're done, just press on. Okay. And that effect will be applied directly over here. Now let's go off to the next filters. Let's start off with the threat filter. Now first thing we have generate bump height map. Let's just press on this and we're going to do is wait until it turns up into that and it's going to generate all of the effects. Now you can see that the photo will now change a lot. Now you can see this is the effect of that specific sphere. This is the Ok effect. Now'm press on. Okay, you can see this is the treat effect that has been applied. This also has turned into a treat object. Press on control Z. Let's go off to the next one. I'm going to just press on this, click on the background, click on Filter. The next one we have is Generate normal map. If you want to apply a normal map and also apply the same three D effects on it, you can see this is how it will look like. You can fix in the lower parts, you can fix in the higher parts. It's all up to you. I'm going to just keep it somewhere around over here. There we go. Do just try rotating it and see how it looks like. You can see this is how this sure should look like. And you can fix in like what type of lighting preset you want. You can apply blue lights if you want to and you will basically see a bit of difference. You can apply in cold. You can Marty Grass, then we have this purple phase and also white lights. Now fix up whatever you want and press on. Okay, And then you're good to go. You can also apply threat extrusion. You can apply mesh from preset, whichever let's say mesh you want, doughnut or maybe hat pyramid, it's all up to you. And then we have mesh from depth map. You can fix up wherever you want. Two sided plane or solid extrusion or two sided solid extrusion. Then we have a cylinder, and then we also have sphere. And the last one we have three D volume. And this is how it will look like after you're done. Just make sure to hit on, okay. And then you're good to go. If you don't want it, just press on Control and Z and it will revert back to however it was. Now the next one which we're going to work with is going to be a bit different, so to click on filter. Next one is Blur. Now there are a lot of type of blurs which you will be able to use from over here. First one is going to be the average if you want to apply in this average type of blur. This is how it looks like. You can see all of it has been covered up. But if you want a bit of different type of blur, just go off to blur. Click on blur, And then what you're going to do is wait until a while until the panel appears up. When it appears up, you will basically see a bit of blur being applied to the specific photo. Now I'm going to click on Filter again, click on Blur. I'm going to click on Blur again, and you'll basically see the blur has already been applied. Now if you want something like this much blur, you can keep it this way or you can press on control Z, it looks however it was on default. The next one we have is blur more. You can apply in more blur if you want to. It will obviously get a bit more blurred up. Okay, the next one which we have is going to be box blur. If you want to apply in this box blur, let's go to do is fix it up and you can fix in the radius. And you can also customize it according to your need. And after you've done, just press on. Okay. And you will basically see the blur effect being applied. You can press on control Z so that you can undo the process. Now let's go off to the next one on Blur. Then we have is Gagen blur. You can apply in a bit of gag and blur if you want to. You can see this is how we look like, basically quite the same, but obviously all of them are a bit different from each and every one. Press on cancel. Then the next one which you're going to see is going to be our lens blur. If you want a bit of lens blur on it, how it looks natural, how it moves like when you click a shot. And when the lens moves, there's this natural looking lens blur. And that is how it looks like. After you're done, you can customize it. You can customize the blur focal lens. Then we also have this iris, which you will be able to fix out the radius. Then you can fix out the blade curvature, the rotation, the brightness, the threshold, the noise, the amount of noise being used. And then we also have what type of blur you want. Is it uniform or is it gauging? Okay. Just check whichever feels right for you. And after you've done, just press on. Okay. Or you can also cancel it up if you want to. Now let's go up to blur again, and then we have this motion blur. If you want a bit of motion blur so that it just looks a bit of shaky, you can use it. It looks good on a lot of photos. Okay, here we have it. I'm going to do press on cancel because I don't need it right now. Now let's move on to our next one. I'm going to click on Filter. And then we have radial blur. From radial blur, you'll be able to like fix out whatever type of blur you want. Is it spin? Is it zoom? Is a draft good or best? Well, that is the quality. Now, first off, you have to fix out the blur method. Now, obviously, just like it said, it is radial blur. Now, what type of blur do you want? If do you want Spindler or do you want Zooml? You can select that and fix the amount you can see, this is how it will look like. And fix in the quality. Let's say I want the best quality. I'm going to press on. Okay? And you'll basically see that it will be applied over here. Okay? You can fiddle through it however you want and check it out however you like it. Now let's go off to the next one, which we have is this shape blur. You can also apply in a bit of shape blur if you want to. You can see it just like this and you will basically see a lot of shapes. Okay? That is how it will basically look like. I'm going to do is take it over here, even though if you have it over here and press on, okay? And you can see that basically you can see a shape. Okay? So I'm going to press on control Z, and I'm going to keep it just the way it is. I'm going to click on this background again, go off the filters, go off to blur. Then we have is smart blur. Well, this basically works automatically. You can fix out the radius, you can fix out the threshold if you want to, and you can make the quality high, low, or medium. And you can also fix out the modes if you want to, and overlay the edges if you want to. If you want to apply the effect this press on. Okay, Wait for a while until it processes up the photo on your PC and then you're good to go. So this is how it looks like on smart blur. The next one which we're going to show you is the last blur option, which is called the surface blur. You can fix out the surface blur of however you want. Basically, it looks like a lot smoothed out and you can also fix out the threshold if you want to, but I'm just going to keep it this or press on cancel because I don't want it to look like that. We're going to go off with our next filter, which we have over here called the Blur Gallery. Now the next one, which you're going to see is going to be a bit different because there we have is the blur gallery. Now from here we have field blur. We can apply the field blur whenever we want. And you can see this is how it looks like. You can rotate it, customize it. And this will basically work as an anchor. And you can see you'll be able to fix the intensity however you want. Now from here, what we have over here is this iris blur. You can fix out the iris blur if you want to. There we have is also tilt shift. You'll be able to apply it from over here to you can rotate it where you want it to be. You can increase the size and customize it according to your need. Now you can see this is how it will look like. Then you'll be able to apply and blur distortion and also symmetric distortion according to your need. The next one which we have is called the path blur. Now you can fix in the speed the taper, the centered blur. It's something like the object is moving and that is the blur that is the cause of the blur. Okay. This is basically the path blur. The last one which you have is called the spin blur because it looks like it's spin up or warped up. And you can fix out the bok color and also fix the lighting or the light range of it. After you're done, just press on okay or cancel and then you're good to go. You'll be able to apply all of the features or all of the filters over there. Now the next one which you have is all of the, most of them are done. Then we have is distort. If you want to displace them, if you want to, let's them to press on. Okay. And basically those elements will be displaced with a specific type of photo. Then the next filter which you're going to apply is going to be a bit different, which we have is pinch. Now you can apply in a bit of pinch, something like this and press on. Okay? And you can see the pinch has been applied and it looks a lot more wide. Now the next one which we're going to see is going to be, let's say polar coordinates. You can fix this like this and press on, okay? And you will basically see this is how it will look like. The next filter which we're going to apply is going to be ripple. If you want to apply in the ripple effect, you can fix on the amount, This is how it works. Then press on. Okay. And the ripple effect will take place. The next effect which we're going to apply is going to be shear. You'll also be able to apply in shear effect. And you can see the shear effect will take place in just a moment. Or you can press on control Z and go off the filter again. I'm going to do this place on shear. You can see this is the line which I want, I wanted something like this. Press on. Okay. And this is how it looks like. Okay. So as we're done with this part and then we have is size. You can just fuize any object and make it look like it's a sphere. Okay. The next filter which we're going to apply is going to be the twirl. If you want to apply a bit of twirl, you can see how it looks like. I'm going to do is first off zoom out 12. This is how it will look like when you fix it up. This is how it will look, okay? The next filter which we're going to be using is going to be wave, and the last one is going to be zigzag. I'm going to do is select this number of generators, fix in the wavelength. You can see how it looks like, this is how it will look like this amplitude. And also you can fix it up from over here. And you can also fix up the scale if you want to. You can also fix on randomize and also warp around if you want to. You can fix in the type if you want triangle or square type of changes, you can see the amplitude from over here. It's square, this is square, and his triangle and then this is sine. Okay? If you want any one of those, just press on. Okay. After applying each of these features and it will be edited or applied in your photo. So we are also done with this distort. The next one which we have is noise. You can add noise if you want to see how it looks like. I'm going to do zoom out. This app will look like, you can also apply in a bit of gaugan and this is how it will look like. But I'm going to press on cancel because I do not need it. Then we have is speckle. You can also apply a bit of different type of noise on your photo, but it will look very smooth just like how it is. Okay. Then the next filter which we're going to apply is going to be dust and scratches. It looks very smooth, but very small particles will appear up. You can apply threshold over here too. So it's up to you and you can fix in the radius. You can see this is how it looks like, even though this is not being applied on the whole thing because this is something like dust and scratches. Okay. This is how it will look. I'm going to go off the filters again. Then we have median. You'll be able to apply in median two, you can fix out the radius, this is how it will look. It's basically like a blur filter which is being applied. The next one which we have is called reduced noise. If you have any noise on your photo or grainy type of feature, you can remove it if you want to. Just make sure to use these tools. You can click on Advanced. And you can also fix out per channel now reduce color, noise, sharpen the details, and press on. Okay. And you'll see that it will look a lot more smoother and a lot vivid. You can see it obviously turned a lot more smoother. I'm going to press on control Z. You can see this is how it looks like control shift and Z and a lot more smoother. I'm going to click on filter again. And then we have is this pixel. If you want to pixelate your photo and make it look like obviously like pixel, then you can use this filter. Then we have this color half tone you'll be able to fix in the radius and whichever one you want just press on. Okay? And it will be applied something like this. Okay? The next one which you have is called crystallize. You'll be able to crystallize it just like this. I'm going to use Fix in the cell size two and press on. Okay. It will basically look like Mosaic right now, even though it doesn't look that bad. You'll be able to make a couple of good designs out of it when you are using this pixelation option. So the next filter which we're going to apply is going to be facet and fragment. So let's see how the facet works and how you'll be able to customize it if it doesn't appear up or if it doesn't apply it up. Let's move on to the next one. Now I'm going to just click on Facet again. Okay, let's move on to the next one, which we're going to find out over here, which is going to be fragment. You can see fragment looks like this. The next one, which we have over here is called Mezzotint. You will be able to apply just like this and this is going to be how the preview is. Okay, So we're not going to be applying that because it doesn't look that good. The next one which we have over here is called Mosaic. And point, all this basically makes it into a Mosaic. You can see how it looks like, just pixelation. And the last one which you're going to see is going to be Pondozkay. You can see the points over here and you can apply it and also fix the sale size whenever you want and this is how it will look like. Okay. So hope you understood everything about the pixelation or the pixel filters. Then we have is render. Okay. First we have is flame. You can see how the flame works. Now first off, you have to select a path. As we do not have a path, it will not work. I'm going to do is go off to the next one. Let's go off over here. Then we have this picture frame. If you want to apply in a picture frame, you can also apply it. And you can just fiddle through these tools whenever you want to and check how it works. The next one which you see over here is called the tree. You can see this is the tree basically that we have is clouds, different clouds, fibers, lens splitter. Now when I click on Tree over here, you will basically see the same photo which we have over here or something like this will appear up then you'll be able to fix the lighting. And after you've done, just press on. Okay. And that photo will be, or that element will be added on the specific, you know, photo. The next one which we have over here is called let's say clouds. If you want clouds, you can apply the clouds if you want to. And then we also have different type of clouds if you want to, you can fiddle through these render tools. The next tool which we're going to see is going to be sharpen. It's basically used to sharpen up your photo however you want. Now when I click on Sharpen, it will sharpen up the photo and make it a bit more sharp so that we can see the details on the next one, which we see over here on sharpen is called the sharpen edges. If we have any edges of the elements on the details you can see. Now these are quite a lot more vivid and it looks a lot more cleaner and sharper. The clarity has increased, but now you can see it doesn't look that sharp. When you press on control shift and Z, you'll basically see that this is a lot more sharp. Now when you zoom in, you will basically be able to see more differences, Okay, So I'm going to press on control shift and Z so that we can redo the process. And this is how it looks like. You will be able to liquefy it too, if you want to, while keeping it sharpened. Now let's move onto our filter again and go off to sharpen. And then we have a sharpen more. If you want it more sharpened, just click on more and you will basically see a lot of pixels because there's a lot of noise in the photo. The next one which we have is called the Smart Sharpen. It's going to adjust it up with the photo and apply it, but if you don't want to just press on Kensil, you can obviously fix the amount of whatever type of details there is by using the sliders. The next tool which you're going to see is going to be sharp. Okay? You'll be able to unsharp it up by clicking on these. You can fix up the amount, you can fix out the radius, you can fix out the threshold, and just press on. Okay. And then you're good to go. The photo is a lot sharper and a lot smoother than how it was. Now let's move on to the next one, which we have is called the Stylize. Then we have a couple of these options. Now from here, let's see how this Diffuse works. This is how the Diffuse will work and you'll be able to toggle through each and every one of them. Then we have this Emboss, you can see Emboss, how it works. You can also fix out the angle, Fix out the height, fix out the amount. It's all up to you. Now, the next one, which we see over here is called the extrude, and this is how it will look like when you apply in a bit of extrude. You can see these boxes are being applied. Now the next one we're going to apply in called defined edges. This is how the fine edges work. If you want to apply them, obviously you can use it. That we have is oil painting. You can see how it looks like and this is how it will look like. Just press on, okay. And the effect will be applied directly on this image. Okay. This is how it will look like, but we don't want that. So I'm going to do is just press on Control and Z so that I can undo the process. Then we have is solarized. You can solarize the photo however you want and also fix in the amounts whenever you want. Then we have is tiles. Fix out the tiles just the way you want to then press on. Okay, And you can see the tiles has been created on your specific photo. Then we have the trace contour. Now if you have any contour applied on an image, this is how it will look like. And you can apply it and also change the way it looks like. The last one is called wind. Well, it just basically gives you off this windy type of effect. You can fix out the blast. Then we have a stagger wind. Then from the left or from the right, you will be able to apply it and make sure it looks like this. Okay, so now we're off to kind of like the last one which we have is video, as we're not using video, so you will be able to use Interlace or NTSC color. And on others we have custom high pass HSB, HSL, Maximum Minimum Offset. Let's click on Custom, and you'll be able to apply in whatever effect you want as a number. And those effects will be applied directly over here. Now let's go off to the next one. Now the next one which we have is called the high pass. You can see this is how it looks like we already applied in a filter or something like this previously, so we're going to skip that part. And then we have is HSB which is obviously highlights. And then we have shadow, and then we have the blue parts or the black parts, and on HSL we have Is highlights. Then we have shadows. And then luminosity. Fix out whichever color profile you want. On input and in row odor. Fix out whatever type of row you want and apply it so that the color will change. See this is how it will look like. As I don't want that, I'm going to press on controls. Just how I did that. And then we have is maximum and minimum. You can see when I put in maximum, this is how it looks like. When I put in minimum, it will look a lot more different. You can see it is now going retro. Okay. The last feature, or the last filter we're going to apply is called the offset. Now you can fix in whichever offset you want on the left or the right. You can fix out the vertical mode to, you can set it to background or repeat edge pixel or wrap around select whichever one you want you can get a preview to. If you want it, just press on. Okay. Or if you don't want to just press on cancel. So hope you learned everything we have on this filter ribbon and all the tools, and all of the filters and how those function in Adobe Photoshop. If you have any question about any of these parts, make sure to ask me a question and feel free to do it, because I'm the one here to help you out. So let's move on to our next lesson where we're going to learn all about the Treaty ribbon in Adobe Photoshop and how these tools work. 12. 3D functions: Welcome to our new lesson of Adobe Photoshop, Essential. In this lesson, we're going to learn all about the tools and how those tools function in the three D ribbon of Adobe Photoshop. If you want to learn them without any further ado, let's just hop onto the lesson by opening up Adobe Photoshop on our device. As you can see that I have opened up Adobe Photoshop, and right from this opening panel, you can see our three D ribbon. Let's open up a new file, just like I do most of the times. And there we go. We have our panel. When we press on cancel, I'm not going to convert it into a normal layer. Now the first thing we have in our tre D verbon is called the treat rib like layer from file. Now if you have any three D file, our tread layer which you have already in your file, you can open it up directly. So I'm going to go off to downloads and I already have a couple of these I'm going to do is apply these directly on my resource file so that you can use it. So if you have any of them saved, you can open up directly as a photo on Adobe Photoshop and work with the Tre D graphics or whatever you want to do now. The next one which we have is called the merge three D layers. If you have three D layers already on your layers of Adobe Photoshop, if you want to merge them altogether, like grouping them up, you can merge it by click on this and those will be merged. Now there's also this option called export three D layer. Now first off, let's just click on this Rectangle tool. Then I'm going to do is going to be clicking on Select or click on three D, and then I can also turn it into a three object. Now there are a couple of ways of how I can do that, or how I'll be able to turn it into a three D object. Now I'm going to write, click on it, convert to a smart object. Now as this has turned into a smart object, I can also turn it into three D by clicking on one of these tools over here. If you want to convert it into three D, the first thing you're going to do is click on this layer and right click on it. First off, just like I said, convert it into a smart object. The next step is going to be rasterizing the layer so that it has all of the details. Even if you scale it up. The next thing what you're going to do is going to be clicking on Three D. And then you're going to have this option called New Three D Extrusion from selected layer. First off, select whichever layer you have the element on. I have this element on Rectangle one which is a new layer that I'm going to do is click on three D. And I'm going to do is click on this new treaty extrusion from selected layer. When I click on it, it will show me this type of this pop up. And then you're going to do is just click on Yes from here. And there you go. You have your treaty element right over here on your screen. And you can customize it however you want. Now, as we already have our treaty elements, I'm going to go off the treaty. And you can see that there are a lot of these tools which have turned black. Instead of being grayed out. Now you can export that treaty material by clicking on any one of these. Now you can name it up or fix the file format. We have Google Art, Opengl, STL, and Wavefront. Well, if you are new to this now, I would suggest you to use this. Opengl. It works a lot more better with the CPU which you're using if you have OpenGL running more optimized on your device. Now there is a method of seeing what it is. Okay, which one is more better on your device? There's also another one called Vulcan. But I'm going to suggest you to use this open GL if you're new to it. And you can also keep a default which is Lead if you want a bit less, less graphic one. You can also use Google Art. It also just gives you a decent amount or decent quality of that three D image or tre D material. Now you can fix your dimensions by fixing on this x and y axis and also the Z axis, which you'll be able to fix. And then fix out the format of size if you want it to be inches, centimeters, millimeters, or pick cells. Now fix out if you want scenes, you want texture, or maybe ground plane or maybe invisible meshes. You can also apply that after you're done, just fix in the texture format. Now what type of format you want. You can also save it as a photo format like JPEG, PNG, and there are also other type of formats which you'll be able to save it as. After you're done, just press on okay. And the file which you have will be saved directly on your device. Now the next one which you can learn about is called a spherical panorama. You can also import a panorama, or you can also make a new layer of panorama from your selected layer. Now I'm going to click on New Panorama Effect. So it's going to give me something like this. Now you can see that I don't have anything, but when I go off over here, it has given me this panorama effect. But this is basically something like a 360 view of this whole thing, which I have activated on my panel over here. And this is basically the rectangle, but in this panorama effect, this is looking something like an arc. Okay? When to press on control Z and keep it however it was when you press on control Z. Again, there we go. We have our treaty material available on our screen. Now you can customize it just the way you want it and also apply what you want to apply on it. Now I'm going to go off the treaty again. As we're done with spherical panorama, you can also import and export those files or import those views if you want to. Now the next one which you have is called to get more content. If you want to get more treat content from Adobe.com or their own webpage, you can just click on it. Wait for a bit, make sure that you're connected to Internet and you will basically have this over here. Now one thing is that you have to buy this, you know, Adobe substance treed so that you can get all of the features about, you know, the tread materials which you have. So I have only, you know, the subscription which I have over here on Adobe is just for the photo editing. So you have to get this, you know, extra so that you can work on with, you know, the elements, the resources and everything. And you don't have to worry about any of the features. Okay? Because you will get all the features and all of the help and resources directly from that, you know, website. Now the next tool which we have is called the new mesh for layer. So this has basically helped you to make a new mesh layer on your working panel which you are already working on. Now there are different types of mesh layers which you will be able to apply. Now the first one which you see is called the Postcard. Now when you click on this postcard option, you can see that there is this material which has been applied. And this basically looks like a postcard which is very thin. So this has been applied or this postcard effect has been applied on our treaty material. And that is the mesh layer. So I'm going to use press on control Z. And there we go, we have it. I'm going to press on control Z for a couple of times. And there you go, we have this effect back again. This is from the top view. And there we go, we have it. Okay, so this is how we'll look like. We also have a bit of this shadow and this is also the scene. Well, I will also show it to you later on after we're done with this panel. Now the next one which we have is called a mesh preset. Now what type of preset you want? You want cone be rap cube, cylinder, doughnut hat, pyramid, ring, soda sphere, one bottle. Let me just show you a couple of them and let's see how it works. I'm going to press on cube, and you will basically see the cube effect will appear over here. And we also have our effect on this whole thing over here. I'm going to press on control Z again. Let's just show to you how it works. I'm going to press on control Z. Then on the next one which we have is what's I'm going to do is click on Pyramid. And the pyramid effect will be applied over here so that we can customize it, control Z. And I'm going to go off the treaty again. And the next one which we're going to use is going to be, let's say I want a doughnut and then I also want a wine bottle. You can see this is how the doughnut will look like. This is obviously the treaty material or how the treaty object looks like. I'm going to press on control Z until it turns back into the square on the next one, which we have is going to be our wine bottle. When I click on it, you will basically see this turns into a wine bottle. And we also have our shape over here, even though we have a treaty material applied over here. So I'm going to press on control Z and I'm going to get it back to the shape, however it was. We are basically done with this mesh preset which you applied. Now you can also apply different effects. Let's say what I'm going to do is apply one of these effects. Now I have this postcard effect, but I want more of these features. I want a depth. So I'm going to do first up, I'm going to press on control Z. I'm going to turn it into this shape again. And then I'm going to go off the tre D. Let's turn this into maybe a cube or maybe a cylinder. Now as I already have a cylinder, I'm going to go off the tread again and then you'll be able to, let's make sure it looks like a cube. After I put in the cube inside of it or outside of it, I'm going to do is go off over here. Now, even if it is grayed out, then that it means that you have to get, you know, the subscription so that you can get access to all of it. Okay, So I'm going to do is going to be skipping this part out, and let's move on to our next tool, which we have over here. Now, if you have multiple treaty objects on your screen, on your working panel, or let's say on your artboard, Now you want to, let's say, make you know. Use of it or you want to group them up altogether, select those objects. First off, click on this move select on this element control, convert control. And you can see this is how it will look like. But one thing is that you will not be able to use it anymore or you rotate it the way you want it, or how we did it when it was just a three D layer, which we are using. I'm going to press on control Z, I'm going to press on cancel. And there we go, we have it back on three D when you press on cancel. So we're going to go off to the three D Ubon again. And then the next tool which we have is called group all objects in scene. Now if you want to group all the objects in scene, which is even photos or even different shapes, you can also group them up altogether by using this tool. Now if you have three D elements, when you already have a shaped panel, or let's say a shape or a photo directly applied on a specific panel altogether. When you want to group it up altogether, it will not be grouped up because there is a three D element inside of it. For that reason you will go off the tread and you group all of the objects in scene together. Then we have is this move object to ground plane. And you can see that it feels like it is now hovering. Now, if you want to apply this effect, obviously just go after tread and click on move object to ground plane. And you will basically feel like it's hovering over the ground. Okay, So this is how it looks like when you want to apply this type of effect. Now the next one which we have is called the new tiled painting. From there, click on this and it will open up this type of interface. And you can see this is how it will look like. This is basically tiled up altogether. If you want this effect, just like I showed you, just click on this. Now there is the next one which is called Generate VS. Okay. Now you can also apply it. Let's click on three D, click on Generate, UVs, Click on Yes, click on or customize it however you want. You can fix up the unwrapping option, low distortion or fewer seams. I keep a low distortion most of the time. And I'm going to press on, okay, and you'll basically see it will be applied directly over here. And you can see it has generated the UVs. Okay? So there is this UV effect. You can see now it looks a lot more smoother than how it was previously. You can see the color, so this is basically the UV ray effect on it. Okay? So if you want to apply this effect on this specific treat element, which you already have, then you will be able to apply it directly on any element. I'm going to go off to treat again. And then we have is paint falloffs. Now you can fix out the part of minimum angle and maximum angle and you can make it fall off. I'm going to use price on, okay. And there is 1990, okay? You can see that there is no difference. But when you keep it up, just like this, you can see at a certain part, okay? So you will be able to customize it however you want. You can see how it looks like, you can see the shine, a bit of shine. You can see there's a bit of shine on this part. There's also a bit of shine. Okay, then I'm going to go off to treg again. And then we have a paint system you want. Texture, you can apply it. You can see the texture. Just a bit of it. When you go in or zoom in a bit more, zoom in and you can see a bit of texture on each and every part of it. Now I'm going to do is going to be used. The next one which we have is called projection. Now if you want projection, you can also apply it. You will basically see the textures, but it is now on a different format. Now I'm going to go off to tre D again, and then we have a paint on target texture. Now where do you want it now? As I have base color which is applied over here, it can also apply height. Now there's also height color, you can see now this is always on corners. Okay. So now it is not moving, but I'm just rotating it in such a way it feels like it's moving. But you can see now this is kept in a corner. Okay? It's just kept in a corner. And it is standing on one corner of this cube. Now I'm going to go off the three D again. And then we have is the next one, which we call it the opacity. Now if you want to fix in the opacity and you want to fix it up just the way it is, then you can click on this Opacity option. And where you want the paint target texture to be on now you can also apply it on the roughness. It's all up to you. Then the next one which we have is going to be our metallic, so you can apply and a bit of metallic effect on your three D elements and also translucent. And the last one is called depth. Okay. Now there are also a couple of things which are grade out because you cannot apply it on all of three D elements which you already have turned on over here. The next one which we're going to show you is going to be unified. Seen for three D pin printing, it can unify all of them together or all of the layers of three D elements which you have on your Adobe Photoshop running already. And you can unify them together. So that you can give them a print off altogether. Okay? So make sure to keep in mind that you can unify scenes. Now if you want to customize a bit of the mesh or simplify the mesh, you can apply it. You can see this is how it will look like and this is the parts or the borders. You can simplify it however you want. And you can see I reduced it. And you can see it has been simplified and the lines are now reducing. So I'm going to make sure to keep it just the way over here. And let's say I'm going to keep it 72 at the maximum or keep it 22, it's all up to you. What I'm going to be doing is going to be customizing the way it looks like. It's also going to give me like the preview. And you can also fix in the resolution. The resolution is now two K graphics. You can also reduce it or increase it just the way you want. The better you want, you have to increase it up up till use it or, you know, just get a result out of let's say four K at the highest. Or you can also keep it eight K if you want to, but I would suggest you to use ten ADP max or let's say 2080. Okay. It's all up to you, but you can see how it works on your device. And after you've done it's press on. Okay. And it will be simplified or the mesh will be simplified directly on your three D model but you will basically not see it. But when you apply in colors or affect it or, you know change it, customize it however you want, then you will be able to see those effects directly on the mesh or these lines which we used right now. Okay, so the next one which you have is called make work path from three layer. Now you can see this is the work path, so this is the part where we can customize it or you can also have it, you know, different however you want. So this is the, you know, working path. You can make an outline and also take out elements or put elements in that specific box if you want to. Okay. As I'm not going to be needing that. And that is also going to be very complex. I'm going to keep it just the way it was. Okay, so the next one is called Rendered Layer. There is also a short cut keyword which is all shift control and R when you click on Render, that layer in front of me into three, then you will basically type type of even object which you are going to apply. All of it is going to depend on how it works on your device. Also how it will look like with the element side of it. Well, that it's going to be like totally greedy. Make sure to wait for a while until it props up the whole thing on your device and then it will give you an outcome. It takes a lot of space for a while and stay connected to the Internet and gives to the out very. You can see how it looks like on my screen of a new type of Ato. Just totally different. So you can just rotate it and see all the nature and you can see this lighting effect too, when you render it up. Okay, so the next tool which we have over here is called the Render Document to file. Now if you want to render the document directly to file or from the file to over on Photoshop, just click on this option and then it will be directed directly over there. It's obviously going to take a lot of time and you can see the initializing video export. And after the whole thing is done, you'll be able to save it and also save it up like this. But make sure before this rendering, make sure to render that layer first. And then you'll be able to do this. Select the folder, then select this. If you want to make a subfolder, fix out what type of sequence you want. Adobe Media Encorter or Photoshop image sequence. Fix out the formats. You can also go off the settings. You can fix out the starting, the digits, the file, then the size, the frame rates. And after you're done, just make sure to press on Render. And then you're good to go. You'll also be able to fix out what type of quality you want. Just like I said, try using the Default or Open GL because it is depending on what type of device you're using. After you're done, just click on Render and then you're good to go. The next one, which we're going to see is going to be Sketch with current Brush. Click on this and you'll be able to sketch with your current brush tool, which you have over on Adobe Photoshop. Now I'm going to do is going to be zooming out. And there we go, it is how we look like, But the thing is that we already have one element inside of it, so it's not going to be or making much difference on it. But here we see there's already one file over here which is going to be our element. But as we are using white, I'm going to press on control Z And keep it just the way it is I'm going to do is press on control Z. And there we go. But for now, when I used my brush, you can see this is white because it has rendered the layer. I'm going to press on Control Shift and C so that I can undo the whole process. Now the last or the next ones which we have is called this three D print setting. Now if you want to print up any of the three D elements on your screen are the ones which you worked on. Then you can go off to the settings however you want, and you can click on this three D print settings. And it will open up on your screen and you'll be able to customize it just the way you want to. Now, it has already opened over here, you can see it from over here. And you can see print two, then fix the printer. Fix the printer units. The details fixing the x and y axis and also the Z axis. And after you're done, just make sure to save it up and then print it down. The last one is called the tre D print. It will generate all of it and process the whole thing, the whole data. And after you're done, you'll basically be able to print it however you want. And you can see also a preview over here. But as I did not select it, just make sure to export it up first. And then you'll be able to save it up just the way you want to. Now, one thing about these treaty tools is that it also gives you access to multiple types of tools. Okay? Also your tool panel changes and a lot of things. Okay? So from here what we have over here is called the history you can see. And then we also have properties. Now the first one which we use most of the time is called the environment, then the coordinates, and then we go environment again. You can see this is basically quite the same, but this is a bit different, So you can also fiddle through it and see how it works. Now the only thing that added up over here is also render over here. We'll fix up the whole data, the from here. Okay. And it will turn out to be a lot more different. You can see it has rendered up just a bit, so it's not that totally clear yet. Now let's go off the three D option and there we also have a couple of things now. There is called filter by hole scene, the meshes and then we have is called the materials. And the last one which we call is the lights. Second, customize. Customize it however you want. Now on the first one we have environment scene view and then what element you're using. So you'll be able to apply just the way you customize your layers In normal layer options from over here, you can see it over here. And if you want to see it more extended, what is happening on the scene? What is happening on the view? What is happening to the element? What is happening to the material? And all of them are right over here and there. We also have our default camera, how it looks like on the view. Okay, so I'm going to press on control Z and also keep up the detail however it is first off, on our environment. You can see over here, this is what opens up. There is this option called IBL. When you select it, it will give you all the details there is, which is called image based lights. You'll be able to fix the lights for the scene. You can fix out the color, the intensity. You will be able to also fix in the color what type of color you want, or let's say what type of light you want. And you will be also able to fix in the shadows. And you'll be able to fix in brown plane color reflection and also reflection and also the roughness and also a just the obesity. This is what this option is about. Next we have is the coordinates. Now if you want to fix in the angles of the xy x, z axis, it's all up to you. And you can also fix in the units of what type of size you want, inches, centimeters, millimeters or pixels. And you're good to go, so this is how it works. And the next one which you have is called this one, which is going to be the elements. Okay? And the last one which you have is this material. Well, this material option is the whole different thing. So here you'll be able to change the color. So first off, let's press on control Z and have the elements over here. There we go. And then you'll be able to fix the base color. Let's say I want a bit of red press on. Okay, and this is now red in color, but it is not appearing up. Then we have is the interior color which is going to be inside. Then you'll be able to fix in the glow fix in the metallic fix, in the roughness fix, in the de, opacity refraction, then the density and all of those. After you're done, you can fix in the translucence. After you're done, just make sure to press on. Okay. And all of it will be applied directly on the elements which you have opened on your panel or your words based. So hope you understood everything about this lesson, of this treaty ribbon, and also what tools it has to offer and how those actually work in Adobe Photoshop. So I hope you understood everything. And even though if you have any question or even if you have any confusion about anything or any tool, then feel free to ask me and I will help you through the whole process. In our next lesson, we're going to learn about this V ribbon and also we're going to add up this plug ins ribbon and show you how all of these tools work and how it works in Adobe Photoshop. So without any further ado, let's hop on to our next lesson of Adobe Photoshop. 13. View functions: Welcome to our last lesson of Adobe Photoshop Essential. In this lesson, we're going to learn all about the view ribbon. Without any further ado, let's just hop onto Adobe Photoshop by opening it up on our device. You can see that I have opened up Adobe Photoshop. Now I'm going to do is going to be opening up a new file. Now after I have opened up a new file, I'm going to go off to this view ribbon. Now the first tool which this view ribbon offers is called the proof set up. Now what is this proof set up? Well, most of the color profiles are going to be over here. Whichever color profile you want to work on, you can select it for this actual artboard, which I'm using right now. This is using CMYK color, but I can transform it into RGB. First off, let's change the workspace essential. I'm going to go off to View again, and there we still have CMYK. Now you can also change it to white plate, magenta plate, or maybe black plate if you want to. But if you want to change to RGB, select on this monitor, RGB legacy or Internet standard, which I most of the time use or suggest is going to be SRGB because it has a vast amount of color profiles which you can select from and also use. Well, there's approximately 16,000 colors which you'll be able to use when you use SRGB. And the colors will be a lot vibrant than using RGB, which is mainly composed of red, green, and blue. So the next one, which we're going to see over here are these ones called color blindness. Now if any one of you have color blindness problems, well obviously Adobe Photoshop has that, you know, facility which it can provide. So it will also be available or it will also be usable and convenient for those who have these color blindness. Now, the next one which we have is called the proof colors. Well, when you click on this proof color option, you will basically be able to select the specific color. And it will also give you what color it has been using. And you can see on this panel, which is RGB eight Windows. When I click on this and click on this, you can see that I cannot see what colors are being used. Window colors are full scale colors, so it's going to be up to you whichever one you want to use. Most of the time I try using it so we can also keep it open and obviously it doesn't take much of your CPU space or even process. Now the next one which we have is called the pixel aspect ratio. Now most of the time when I'm using Adobe Photoshop, I try to keep a default which ends up on square, but there are a vast amount of pixel aspect ratio which you can select from now on my device, which I'm using right now, which is basically which my monitor is 16 69. Now for 16 69, it depends on the print quality or what type of print you want. If you want a full page, make sure to select in between, let's say 16 69 or which is over here on 0.91 And if you have a wide screen, then I would suggest you to use 1.21 These are basically apertures so you can fix them up according to your need and also your print and your monitor. Okay. And you can also customize your pixel aspect ratio if you want to. After you're done, just select on any one of those and you can delete it and also reset of the pixel aspect ratio if you want to. Now you can see that for this one I'm using 16 bit and also eight bit. Most of the time I do not use 32 bit because it takes up a lot of CPU usage and it sometimes stutters up on my device. So if you have a medium end device or a low end device, it's totally fine you can work on with eight bit. And it will run out smooth and also give you a very good result. Now the next one, which we see over here, is called the zoom in. The next one which we have is called the zoom in. So you can zoom in and zoom out just the way you want so that you can navigate through the art board. Now another method of doing it is going to be holding onto Alt and then using your scroll key on your mouse. Now if you hold onto control and use your scroll key, you can see it goes left and right. Now if you want to just zoom in without the scroll key, without the mouse. So first thing, hold onto control and hold on the plus on your keyboard, and minus to zoom out. So this is basically how it works when you want to navigate and zoom in and out on your artboard. Now the next one, which we see over here, is called Fit to Screen. When you press on control or press on this, it will fit up to your screen or you can also use it. Let me just zoom out and I'm going to do is just press on control and, and you can see this is now fit to screen, so you can see all of what is basically happening on this artboard and also your working panel. Now the next tool which we're going to find out is going to be the fifth layers on screen. Now there are a couple of layers which you'll be applying. Now if you have like multiple layers over and over again and you want all the layers to be visible at the same time, just click on that and all the layers will be visible at the same time. Let me just show to you all of its. I'm going to click on Few. Pit layers on screen. And all of the layers which you will be able to see on your screen will be available till all of them. Okay, so you will be able to see all the elements on the artboard, but not over here. So make sure to keep that in mind and work with it. Now I'm going to do is going to be pressing on control Z so that I can undo all of these layers as I'm not going to be needing any one of those. The next one, which we have over here, is also like the zoom range. Now this is 100% there, we have also 200% and you can also customize or fiddle with it however you want. You can zoom in and out and you will be able to see this. And you can see this is 100. When you click on this, it will be 200. But I'm going to do is keep it on fit to screen. Which is control and or less control and zero. Now the next one which you see over here is called the print size. Now if you want to see any Artboards print size, you can just click on this print size. And then you are good to go because this will give you or allow you to see what is going to be the print size of that specific artboard and how you can work up with it. Okay? Now the next one is called the actual size. Now the actual size is going to depend on what type of width and height you are going to be using on a specific artboard. Now you can see that I'm using my default, so it's going to be totally different. But the print size is going to be different because it depends on the page or what type of print size you want to apply it on or which type of background you want, Okay, Now the next one is called the flip horizontal. If you want to flip horizontally, just click on it and all the elements inside of it will be flipped horizontally, okay? But you have to keep one thing in mind that you have fit to screen opened up, so it might not make that much difference. Okay. But if you have any of the elements, Lesa is going to be clicking on this shape. Now I'm going to just click on View. I'm going to use, I'm going to press on Ncol. I'm going to press on okay, Control Z. I'm going to do, just click on View, Flip Horizontal. You can see this is how it looks like because now it has been flipped, okay. From this to this, okay. So is going to be clicking on View. The next one is called the Pattern preview. If you want a pattern preview, you can see it works best with smart objects. Transforming pixel layers may show unexpected results. So if you do not have an element to be smart art object, okay, which is not a smart art object or you did not rasterize the effect, then the resolution might break down just a bit but not too much. But if you're using 32 bit, you will basically find out and you know, really good result even when you don't have a smart art object inside of it. I'm going to press on, okay, and this is the pattern preview. You can see that there are a lot of these because this has basically turned into a pattern. And there are multiple of these boxes which you can see from over here up till the whole page. So I'm going to do is going to be zooming. And I'm going to press on control Z. I'm going to do take it control shift and Z. Do zoom in. And there we go, we have our shape right over here. So I'm going to press on View again. And then we have is called the screen modes. Well, we've been already through these tools which are over here. It allows you to toggle through each one of these preview modes. Just press on Escape and then you will basically find out that you are back on your page or your working space. So I hope you understood up till now. Now, the next tools which we have over here is called extras. Now the extras basically allows you to help to find out different type of panels on different type of work spaces. Now you can see when I click on this, I'm going to press on this rectangle. Press on control C Control. You can see this is how it appears up. Well, when you click on View again and then click on Extras, you will basically find out that there will be extra tools on your workspace, but it doesn't appear up until you are using a three D work space or a three D essential. So make sure to keep that in mind when you want to use extras. It will not show you tras until you applied, but one thing will change is that you can see it over here. You can click on View, click on Extras, and you'll basically see that there is a different type of preview on it. Okay, so make sure to keep it on or keep it off, It's all up to you. You can see the extras over here, and also the file or the elements has been selected directly. Now, the next tool which we have over here is called the show. Now, what type of preview do you want? Now from here, you can select layer edges. You can fix out grids. You can fix out canvas guides. The smart guides slices pixel grids, UV overlay all of them. Well, most of them are totally grayed out because I'm not using a three D element. So if you want to apply any one of these, first thing is that if you want layer edges, just click on it and you already have the layer edges. These are the layer edges because only on this layer, I'm only using this shape over here. When I click on this and click on View, and I'm going to go off the show and click on Layer Edges. You can see it will be the whole thing because I do not have any elements inside of this background layer. So I'm going to go off to a Rectangle. One click on this, click on Show Layer Edges, and you can see this is the edge of this layer. Okay, so now I hope you understood about this layer edges. Now I'm going to click on View again. And then let's go off the show, and let's show you a couple of that. Now if you want grid so that you can align any of your elements perfectly, just click on Grid. And you will be able to open up the grid just the way you want it. And you can customize it up if you want to. Now, the next tool which we have over here is called the smart guides. You can keep it on or keep it off, it's all up to you. Now, you can fiddle through each and every one of these. Now we also have slices, then we also have ruler and all of them. Okay, so we're going to skip this show. Now, you can just like just fiddle through each and every one of these options or tools which you have over here. And you will get the few to be a bit different on your workspace. And the next one is called the Ruler. If you want help of Ruler on your workspace or Adobe Photo job, just click on Rulers and you will have rulers on the left side and also on the top of your workspace. I'm going to press on control so that I can fit my whole thing in one page. And it's also showing the slices. I'm going to remove each and every one of them by going off to show. I'm going to remove the grid, I'm going to go off to view again. I'm going to go off to show and I'm going to do is remove the slices by keeping on guides. Only that I'm going to do is going to be clicking on view again. I'm going to go off the show. And as I don't want any of these slices, what I'm going to do is just remove it. So I hope have only one element over here. I'm going to go off the view again. And the next one is called the snap. If you want to snap any one of these elements into two parts or three parts, it's all up to you. You can customize your elements and also snap up that angle if you want to. You can also anchor up that data so that you can get a view from different camera angle. Well, it mostly works on three D effects or thread elements, so I'm going to do is skip this part out. Now the next one which we have is called the snap two. Now where do you want it to snap two? Now, this snap also works in a different way. Now if you have your element to be non aligned to any of these lines of the grid, now you can align it directly by clicking on snap two. Now if you want to snap it directly to guides directly to grid directly to layers or even document bounds, you can direct it or place it in that format, so it's going to be up to you. Make sure to fiddle through it two and see how it works. The next one is called this guides option and the guides tool. Now, you can also lock up the guides if you want to. Okay. Sometimes when you're using the element to align up the object, in some cases you can see the guides are disappearing. Now, if you lock up the guides, it will not disappear and also appear in all of the time. Now the next one is called the lock slices. Now, as I do not have slices and even if I apply slices, we only have one element inside of it. So it's going to show us one slice at a time. Let me just show it to you. I'm going to go off to extras, click on slices, and you can see one element or one photo of per slice. Now if I want to lock in this slice, I'm going to go off to view click on Lock slices and we go. Here we go, We have our slice applied directly on our elements. Now if you want to clear the slices, you can also apply that. It's totally up to you. So I hope you understood everything about this lesson, but I'm going to do is put up an addition on this lesson and show you how the plug ins work in Adobe Photoshop. Now, the plug ins are basically extensions of Adobe Photoshop, which helps you to increase the facility, increase the functionality of Adobe Photoshop, let's say when you're using Microsoft Powerpoint. And then you want to apply extensions or links. Well, those are type of extensions which you'll be able to use Adobe Photoshop called Plug ins. Now you can go off to Plug Ins panel and you'll basically see that there are no plug ins. But when you click on Discover Plug Ins, you will be directed to Creative Cloud or over to any of the websites which you have on your PC and then it will work in that specific way. Now you can click off on Plugins and click on Managed Plugins. And then you'll be able to apply whichever plug in you want and search it up just the way you want to. Now, it doesn't have only plug ins for Adobe Photoshop or Adobe Illustrator. It has basically plug ins for each and every of the software. Adobe has select any of the ones which you want and you can also select whichever apps of plugins you want. You can also have free and the paid ones, it's all up to you and you can fiddle through it and go through it, browse it up, find the ones you want and then you are good to go. So there is also we have this managed plug ins. If you want to manage any one of these plug ins, it's also up to you. So hope you understood everything about this lesson on how you'll be able to use this View ribbon and also this plug ins ribbon in Adobe Photoshop. Hope you learn everything about this course from the beginning to the end. And if you have any questions then feel free to ask me. And I will guide you and help you through the whole process to hope to see you in my next class project of Adobe Photoshop. Essential. 14. Class Project 1 - How to remove background from any image: Class project one. The name of class project is how to remove background from any image. Now we have a pot in a description and also an outcome. Now what we're going to do is just follow up the steps so that we can get our outcome. In step one we're going to do is open up the image called flowers from the resource file in Photoshop. We're going to convert the image into a normal layer. Now we're going to use either remove background selection brush or blending tool so that we can remove the background. Now after like removing the background, convert it into a smart object, copy and paste the duplicate of the subject in another file. In step six, you're going to do is going to be taking a screenshot of that clear file with the removed background and upload it on our project panel. By doing this or by learning it how to remove background, you can use any elements in any image and use it for various purposes without any further ado. Let's open up Adobe Photoshop and follow up the step. As you can see that I have opened up Adobe Photoshop, I'm going to click on Open and then I'm going to do, is going to be clicking on Flower. I'm going to click on Open again and it will open up on my screen. Now just by the steps I'm going to do is convert it into a normal layer first. Now as I have turned it into a normal layer, first thing I'm going to do is going to be removing its background. I'm going to show you multiple ways. Now when you are using this Adobe Photoshop 2024, it has this new tool which is called the remove background. So you can click Select and remove everything outside of it. Now I'm going to use press on control Z. The next method is going to be going off the select. After going off the select click you click on it will also do the same thing. The first thing it's going to do is going to keep only this element. You can take it out directly like this and take out the background, or remove the background if you want to. So it's also up to you how you can work with it. We're going to press on control Z. And the next one which we have is called the brush selection tool. Now first thing first, what you're going to do is going to be going off on selection to or this history brush tool which is also over here. But if it doesn't appear up, make click on Quick Select, to click on Plus, and then select up the subject. And you can see that the subject has been selected, just like this. There we go. You can see all the part has been selected. And you can take this part out directly to a blank page. I'm going to do is click on File, click on New, open it up. And I'm going to do is going to be clicking on Move Tool and take it directly over here. And use it for various purposes. Now you can also use my previous methods just by clicking on Remove the Background. We'll see that it will work but a bit more better. Okay, there's both auto and manual modes of doing or removing the background. Hope you understood everything about this. Now the next thing what you're going to do is going to be taking a screenshot out of this and also uploading on our project panel so that we can see the progress of work you are working on. Let's move on to our class project two of Adobe Photoshop, Essential. 15. Class Project 2 - How to make a photo merge into a shape: Welcome to Class Project. To the name of the class project is how to make a photo merge into a shape. Now I have attached in a description and also an outcome, but before that, let's see what the steps are and what do we have to do to get our exact outcome. The first thing we're going to do is going to be opening up Adobe Photoshop and make an artboard of your desired size. Now make a shape on the artboard by using the shape tools. It could be either an ellipse, it could be either a rectangle, or maybe even a triangle or different custom shapes. In step three we're going to do is going to be opening up the photo called flower from the resource file which we used in our first class project. The next one we're going to do is convert the image into a normal layer and convert it into a smart object. In step five, we're going to drag the image into the layer where the shape is. In step six, we're going to adjust the image and click on Clipping Mask. By learning how to mask objects, help you to use or edit a certain part of an image or extract any object from an image. So the first thing I'm going to do is going to be opening up Adobe Photoshop. As I've opened up Adobe Photoshop, I'm going to do is going to be making the one I desire. Now you can see that I have my artboard. Or the next step, which I'm going to do is going to be making in the shape. So I'm going to use this rectangle shape and then I'm going to do is put our merged, the photo on the shape. I'm going to click on File, click on Open, and I'm going to do open up the flower. Now I'm going to do is convert it into a normal layer. I'm going to do take it directly over here. There we go. I'm going to adjust the photo. Now control T, I'm going to do is make sure to size it up in such a way so that it looks good on our specific shape. And then we're going to use right click on it. I'm going to use Convert to smart objects. And then I'm going to create the clipping mask. And you can see that our shape, our photo, has merged into a shape. And I'm going to click on both of them. This is just an addition so that I can use both of them together. I'm going to click on them again. I'm going to do direct it over here. There we go. Or we can convert it into a smart object two, so that we can use it wherever we want. This has turned into a shape. Hope you understood everything about this and make sure that you take a screenshot or maybe let's say just upload it on our project panel so that we can see how you're progressing with work. Thank you for watching these videos up till the end and hope to see you in my next course. 16. Introduction and interface of Adobe Illustrator: Welcome to our course of Adobe Illustrator Essential. Well, this is going to be our introduction, and also we're going to learn about the interface of Adobe Illustrator. Before getting into our first lesson, let's learn what Adobe Illustrator is. What is Adobe Illustrator? Adobe Illustrator is a vector based graphic design software developed by Adobe. In it's a powerful tool used by designers, artists, illustrators, and professionals in various industries to create and manipulate scalable vector graphics. So what is the overview of this course? Throughout this course, you will embark on journey to master the essential skills needed to harness the full potential of Adobe Illustrator. Whether you're a complete beginner or looking to refine your existing skill, this course will provide you with a solid foundation to navigate the software confidently and efficiently. By the end of this course, you will have gained a solid understanding of Adobe Illustrator score functionalities and be equipped with the skills to create professional grade vector graphics illustrations, logos and more. Get ready to unleash your creativity and explore the limitless possibilities of Adobe Illustrator. As we embark on this exciting journey together, let's hop on into Adobe Illustrator and learn about the basic interface of it. On my screen, you can see that I have opened up Adobe Illustrator. And this is the home screen, or the home panel of Adobe Illustrator. Now you can see that there are a couple of things on the top left. You can see on this corner, we have a couple of these tabs, which I'm also going to be cover one by one in each lesson. And also there are a couple of tools and also commands which you will see in those specific tabs. So first off, we're going to end up, or let's say we're going to show you a couple of things which you see on this panel. Okay, because we're going to go through our ribbons later on. First off, we have our home. Now you can see this is how the home panel looks like. From here, you can open up in browser, You're going to get started with Illustrator. It offers you a couple of series or introduction tutorial on how you'll be able to automate Adobe Illustrator. Now you can see you will be able to find and more, you can learn more about Adobe Illustrator from this interface. Now on the bottom, we have our files, or what is the size or what is the resolution of the file you want to start off with. They are known as presets or whatever there is. They are also termed to be canvas. Okay, now you can see that there are a couple of them over here, but there are also more. When you click on more presets, you'll basically find out that there are saved Reset mobile. Then we have Web, then there is Print. Then there's Film and Video Arts and Illustration. And all of them, you can select whichever preset you want according to your desire and also according to the canvas you want so that you can work on it. Just like I said, they are also canvases. Okay? They are like pages where you can work on or put your design on. Okay? And when you select any of the preset, let's say I want to work on a mobile preset. Okay? I want it to be perfect or visible, or presented on a mobile, so you can select any of the mobile ones if you want to select Web Select on Web. And you will basically find out the web layouts or, you know, let's say the presets according to your need. And also there is another advantage of this Adobe Illustrator. Well, if you are using the newest version of Adobe Illustrator, if you're connected to the Internet and also connected to Adobe account, you'll basically find out there are a couple of templates which you can also work on. Well, I will show it to you in a bit. Okay, so when you select any of the preset, now you see on the right side there is also a panel of properties. Well, these properties are very similar to the preset which you are going to use. Now you can select which width you want, which height you want, and what type of, let's say format you want. If you want it in points, if you want it in selves, inches feeds so that you can fix up your within height, you can do that. You can also fix up millimeters, centimeters, meter feet. But I most of the time prefer using pick selves because it helps me to find out my exact, let's say, preset. I also sometimes use inches, but it's going to be up to you whichever format you want. You can also change the name of the preset. Let's say I want it to be interface, okay, I'm going to keep it interface. And you can see this is going to be the name of my preset. Now you can fix up the bleed, you can fix up the top bleed, bottom bleed left and also right. And you can also conjoin them and also keep them different on each side if you want to. So this is going to be up to you. If they're conjoined, you'll basically find out that it's going to work same on each and every one, but if you click on this option again or tool, you'll basically find out that only the top, whichever one you select that is going to change, okay? So now you know how it works. Now there are also a couple of advanced option over here you can select from over here. You can also minimize it if you want to. Now when you select on Advanced option, you will be able to select color mode, raster effect, and also preview mode. Now when you click on color mode, you will basically find out CMYK color and also RGB color. Well, I prefer keeping it RGB because it helps me find out the specific color. Then we have this raster effect. Well, this is also rasterizing effect. Now, how much PPID you want? Well, when I'm working on it, I most of the time prefer to keep it on medium. Not too high, not too low. So it's just gives you the exact result or, you know, a very professional type of look, but it doesn't take much space. Now in the preview mode, you will be able to select if you want pixel or overprint. Well, I prefer keeping it on default because it helps me get out or present any format or anything, whichever one I want. Now you have more settings over here. When you click on more settings, you will find out more settings about this preset. You'll be able to select, you know, size with number of artboards. You'll be able to do that. Our artboards are also turned as pages or canvas, just like I said. So you'll be able to fix them, fix the template, fix the orientation, and all of them according to my need or to your need. Now, you can select this, you know, orientation from over here too. If you want a portrait, our landscape, it's going to be up to you. I'm going to keep a portrait right now. Now, as we are done with this preset option, now let's go down over here. You can see a couple of presets or a couple of templates are over here. Well, these are pre built templates, so those are basically edited, so you just have to put in your own data and then you're good to go. Well, these work the same way on each and every category. You will basically find out different templates for different presets, such as different one for mobile, different one for web, different one for print, different one for film and video. Now you can select them. Now you have to stay connected to the Internet. Now if you want to use any one of them, just click on any of the preset. When you click on any of the preset, you'll have to download that. You can also see the preview if you want to. When you click on download, it will be downloaded on your PC and then you'll be able to work on it whenever you want. Now it will take a bit of a time to download because it will download it and then apply directly on your screen or your workspace. And then you'll be able to work with it. If you don't want to work on it. Just make sure to use any blank preset you want to use so that you can start from scratch. Well, for this force I'm going to suggest you not to use any template or any preset. Okay, So that it just helps you to find out or let's say, you know, increase your, you know, capability or increase your skills in Adobe Illustrator. So when it is downloaded, you can just press on open and then you'll be good to go. You can see your current setting, discard CMYK profile linked content, but profile was set to be on or when the document proceeded, just press on, continue, because it needs to be in CMYK, not RGB. So if you select RGB, just like I said from, you know, let's say the property of the specific preset. If you selected CMYK sometimes and you want to open up RGB, it might not work or it will just give you that pop up notification so that you just have to continue and select and then you'll be good to go. So this is how the preset is or this is how the template is. I'm not going to be using it, so just cut this off and then you're good to go. Now it will take me back directly again to home and you'll see this is how it works. Now we know about home, so this is the learn. And in learn, you'll basically find out what you want to learn about. Adobe Illustrator also allows you or offers this functionality. Now in Cloud Documents, you'll be able to save all of your documents in Clouds. This is basically like a cloud drive where you'll be able to save your work or maybe applaud your work and also share them whenever you want. Even if a person shares those files with you, it will appear on shared with you section of Adobe Illustrator. Now what you can also do is go off to delete. Well, Adobe Illustrator also offers you a reticle bin so that if you delete any, you know, let's say project or any work from your workspace, it will appear up un deleted and then you'll be able to restore it. From this point as I don't have anything in my deleted and as this is a new account, I basically don't have anything on Cloud documents shared with you or deleted, so it's basically kind of blank or still loaded. Now you can also create any new preset or start working on him from clicking on Create New. When you press on Create New, you'll basically see the same type of interface when you click on more presets appears over here. You'll be able to select any of the presets and then press on Create. And then you'll be good to go. I'll come back to you in a bit. And when you want to open up any project or any file that you worked on previously, and you just click on Open and it will open up this interface for you. From here you'll be able to select any drive or any file you want to use, and then you just select that AI file, and then you'll be able to open it up whenever you want. So this is basically about the interface of Adobe Illustrator on the home. Now I'm going to do is open this section up or open a preset and then show you the interface of the workspace. Press on Create New. I'm going to do is click on, let's say Print, and I'm going to find out four. You can see a four over here. I'm going to press on Create. It will take a bit of a time to load it up. On my screen, you can see that this is how it will work. Okay, now this is the interface of Adobe Illustrator or the Workspace. Now you can see that there are a couple of tools which you will find out over here. Now the first thing I'm going to be suggesting you is first up what you're going to do is go off the windows, find out workspace, and then find out Essential Classic. Okay, make sure the select on Essential Classic because it allows you to see all of the tools in Adobe Illustrator, or you can also find them from the right side of the panel. Now let's go through a couple of things, or how the section works or how the workspace works in adobilustraighter. Now you can see just like I said on the beginning, the top part are the ribbons, which contains most of the commands, or most of the basic commands, and all the tools which you will basically find out in Azobiltrator. We're going to go through them later on one by one. Now if you want the basic tools of adobilustrator, most of them are on the left side of your workspace. Now you can see that there are a couple of things on these tools, but these are not just it. You can see that there is this corner section you marked like this over here. Well, this means when you write, click on those tools, you basically find out more tools. So this icon, basically, whichever tool has them has a couple of tools just like this one. If I right click on it, there are two tools, If I write click on this one, there are a couple of tools, but as this one does not have any of this icon on this corner, if I click on it, it will not show me or extend up the work space of tools. So select whichever one you want. Now you can see that this option is called the color palette. Now there are three of these options. This is no fill, this is gradients, and this is going to be our solid color. Now you can also swap colors by pressing on X if you want to, you can see X. Now if I pers on X, it will turn out black. If I press on X again, it will turn out to be white again. So you'll be able to switch through colors by selecting on these. You can also select them and also swap them if you want to. Okay. It's going to be up to you. You can also use a different color palette if you want to. So this is the essential tools of a dobillustrator. Now on the top part, it's going to be, let's say, one of our properties. Now you can select what type of tools, or let's say if you select a tool now how we're going to customize it. So this part is also very important. You can see that you can select color, you can select the stroke, you can select the size, you can select the width, you can fix the definition, opacity style document set up and also preferences and also similar objects and all of them. Okay, well, it's going to depend on what type of object or what type of tool you're working with, and they're going to change by time. Now, on the right side we have properties and libraries and a couple of tools. Well, you basically will be able to pop in any of these tools over here on the section, okay, like this. And you can see that all the tools are over here. And you can see on the properties, we have all the properties about a specific object or a specific panel, or let's say a worksheet, not even a worksheet. This is basically called an artboard or a canvas. So all of the properties will be available over here. You'll be able to customize it and also fix it up according to your need. And we also have our libraries. Okay. Make sure to stay connected to the Internet. And as I don't have anything in my library because this is a new account, so it is basically empty now, you can go through a couple of these tools whenever you want, okay, So this is basically how this interface works, or this is how the workspace works. And you can see this is how you'll be able to arrange documents. You can see it however you want to, but I'm going to just prefer to keep it like this. Or you can select it however you want. Now, you can also switch the workspace if you want to, right from over here. Instead of going to Windows and fixing up your workspace. So basically you'll find it over here. Okay, Then you'll be able to go through a couple of these options over here too. You can see Align Art to Pixel Grid. You will be able to do that and you can also find this option over here. Just click on it and you will basically find out alignment option and also a couple of tools. Okay, so this is basically how you want your workspace to look like. You can see if you wanted line, if you want anchor points, if you want artboards, if you want brush character clipping, mask and all of those. Okay, so hope you learned about every interface of this lesson. And this is basically very simple and also very basic. So I'm going to suggest you to just fiddle through it. Okay? Because if you fiddle through it, you'll basically learn about most of the things are where these tools are. Even though I'm going to be giving you, you know, let's say a complete course or complete lesson on where you're going to find those tools. Because in the next lesson, we're going to go through each and every one of these, you know, ribbons and also how those commandment works an Adobe Illustrator. So hope you understood everything in this lesson. And if you have any question you can ask me. And feel free to ask me because we will guide you through the whole process. So in our next lesson, we're going to learn about the file ribbon and also five basic tools of Adobe Illustrator. Now when I say five basic tools, we're going to go through five on step by step. So this is going to be the five ones or the first 512345 and in the next lesson, 12345. Okay, so let's hop onto our next lesson of Adobe Illustrator. 17. File ribbon with 5 basic tools: File ribbon and five basic tools of Adobe Illustrator. Welcome back to our lesson file tab, or let's say file ribbon and also five basic tools of Adobe Illustrator. Now we're going to do is open up a preset, which I did from the previous lessons. Sm is going to select any one of them. If you want to, I'm select on Letter. When I click on it, it will open up a workspace for me where I can work on. Now I'm going to be showing you all the commands or all the tools which I have in File Ribbon. Let's click on File. And then the first thing we have is new. If you want to open up a new workspace, press on New, and it will open up a new workspace for me by opening up this interface right now. And then you can select any of the preset you want, and then you can open up another workspace. Another advantage of using this is that it opens up a new tab. Let's say I'm going to use press on Create, I want a four. I'm going to press on Create. And we'll make it right beside our first one, which is letter. So you can see this is a four and this is letter. So you can use whichever one you want. I'm going to cut one of these off so I can work on a single one. Now I'm going to press on file again. And then we have is new from template. Now if you don't want to work on a blank worksheet or let's say on a blank artboard, then you can press on new from template. It will open up the template interface so that you can select any of the template you want, or even if you have any downloaded template, you can select that and open it up directly from your PC. Well, you can go off to Adobe Stock.com or let's say Adobe Dot, so that you can use whichever template you want to use. Or there are also a couple of websites on the net, so you can search them, download it, and also open it up on Adobe Illustrator so you can start working on it now. Press on file again, and then we have is open. And as you can see that there are also a couple of shortcuts assigned to specific keys or specific commands. Let's say control n for new shift control, for template open is control and all of them. Okay? You're going to go through them one by one. Well, what happens is that when you use a shortcut key, or let's say your keyboard shortcuts, It just helps you get more efficient with it and also work more smoothly and save a lot more time. Now, if you want to open up any project from your file or let's say previous, just press on open. It will open up the same interface so you can select on it and start working on it. After you select any of the file or any of this folder where you have your file and then press on open, It will open up that specific work or specific project for you so that you can start working on it just where you left it. Then we have is open recent files. So any recent file which you've worked on recently, you'll be able to find it over here and you can use it whenever you want. And then we also have browsing Bridge. As I don't have any bridge. Well, I'm going to be skipping this, but you can also browse in your Bridge, which is also a kind of a server. Or will it say a site where you can browse and you can use whichever one you want. Then we have is Close. If you want to close any tab or any open workspace, you can click on Close or press on Control and W at the same time. You can also close all the tabs at once by pressing on close all, or pressing on Alt control and all at the same time. Now saving is a very important thing in Adobe Illustrator because obviously you don't want to lose any of the progress which you worked on or your hard work. So you have this option of save and Save As. If you want to change the format, click on Save As, and you will basically find out an interface like this. And then you'll also be able to choose whichever file you want to start working on or whichever format you want to save it as. Select the folder, select where you want to save it, and press on. Okay. And then it will be safe. So we're done with saves. You can also save it as a copy. Let's say you saved something, okay, you did something, and just 2 seconds later you change it back again. Or, you know, customize it a bit more. But you don't want to save it as a file or let's say save it. Okay, so you can save it as a copy. So same thing but two variants. It's kind of like that. Then you can also save selected slices. Now when you make slices, I'm going to be showing it to you a bit later. Okay? So you can also make slices in your artboard and also select the specific slices from your artboard and then save it up. Okay? It helps you to, you know, sometimes track where your data is or track where your design is because you are going to put that specific, you know, design in a specific slide sometimes. Okay? So I'm going to be like showing it to you later on too. And if you want the version history, whichever version you're using, then you can select on version history and it will give you all the history of it. Okay. Now one thing I'm going to suggest to you is that first off, whenever you're using Adobe Illustrator, stay connected to the Internet, stay connected to your Adobe account, and also make sure that you are using a genuine version. Because it will allow you to use all the functionality Adobe Illustrator has to offer from the newest tools to the oldest tools. And also a lot of Buck Fix, which is going to make your work, or let's say your work here in Adobe Illustrator to be a lot smoother than the ones which you use in the old versions. Now a newer version of this Adobo Illustrator has this option of save as template. Now if you make a template of your own, let's say even for your mobile, even for your web, even for your print. Now you want to publish it. Now, how do you do that? You can save your work as a template so that you can publish it. You can send it to people so that people can work on it. And also it saves up a lot of time because you are getting more published and established by, you know, publishing your own templates. So you can save it as a template to, when you click on Save as Template, it will show you that this is going to be it. Select the folder where you want and then click on Save. And then it will be saved directly as a template, but not as an AI file. But when you save it, okay, it will be saved as an AI file, but not as a template. But obviously, you can also use the AI file as a template. But what happens is that a person can also customize it. But when you are saving it as a template, they will be able to customize it, but you are going to have the trademark or you are obviously, you know, obviously when a person, you know, let's say publish it, a template, you use it. But obviously that person is promoted, or let's say that person is getting established more, you are getting to know that person or that company. So basically you can save it as a template and also publish your work by saving it as a template. And then publishing it on sites, even on Adobe stocks. Now then as after saving it as a template, we have is this revert option. Now what is revert? Revert is also a bit like undo, you do something and you want to revert it back, or undo it back. So press on revert and it will revert back to how it was. Then we also have searched Adobe stock. Well, just like I said, Adobe has its own sites where they publish their, you know, resources. So what I'm going to do is just press on search Adobe stock. It's going to take me to this let's say side which I have over here. And in the side you will be able to basically find out whatever you want. Not only just for AI, you can also use Treed. You can use plug ins, audios, videos, vectors, photos, and also even generate AI images. Okay? Make sure you're connected to your Internet and also you are connected to Adobe Okay. Account. Now I'm going to do is go off to Adobe Illustrator again, and there you have it. Okay? You can browse that if you want any resources. But one thing is that not all of the things are free in Adobe stock. So sometimes you have to buy the resources too. So make sure to use whichever one you want. But one thing I can like ensure is that they have, you know, let's say professional quality resources. You can use them whenever you want. Just go through them or go through Adobe stocks and then find out the one, whichever one you want. And then we have is this place. Well, you can place specific object place when you click on place. Now you want wherever you want, you know your object to place or whichever file you want to place it on, Adobe Illustrator. Okay. So in the next one we have is export. Exporting your work is a very important thing. Okay? Or a very important command, or a very important process. Now you can export for screens, export as are also safe for web as a legacy. Now you can export for screens, just click on Export for Screens, and then you can export it as screens. You can also change formats or click on formats. And then you'll be able to create subfolders by formats. You can like fix the full document or fix whichever artboard you want to export. It's going to be up to you and you can also fix the range and also, you know, change the format whenever you want. It's it for IOS, Android, it's going to be up to you. You can export it later on. And then you can work on various, let's say devices or whichever one you save it at. Then you can also export as this interface will open up and then you can save, you know, let's say whatever type of format you want to save it as. It also allows you to make, let's say, you know, a photo type of format. So they can work on it or maybe even just show it as a presentation or maybe just as a photo. So this is basically how it works. Then you can also select the export, okay? Or let's say export the selected ones. If you have a couple of art boards, select the number of artboards and then you can select the export selection. But one thing is that when you go off the export and then click on Export for screens, you'll be able to do the same thing. You can select whichever artboard you want to export it to. So it basically does the same thing, just like I said on export selection. Okay. So use whichever one you want. It's going to give you a vast amount of advantages and also a couple of things which you will need later on, and there are a couple of packages, you can use it later on. Then we have a script. If you want to apply scripts such as docs or images, or other scripts from your PC, you can click on them and apply whichever script you want on Adobe Illustrator while you're working on it. Okay, then we have this document set up. If you want to fix up your document or, you know, change the properties of your document a bit, you know, you can see it over here. It's quite the same as, you know, working on it before or maybe like, let's say, fixing what type of artwork you want. It's kind of like that, but there is a bit of difference is that you can fix up the grids, you can fix up the grid color. You can fix up bleeds. Well bleeds, you can fix it on from the beginning, but there's like show images and outline highlight substitute. Then there is also this type option and here you'll be able to fix the language codes. Superscript, subscript, small caps, export all of them, okay? So if you want to go through them, you can do it. You can even change the color of the background if you want to. You can see it over here. You can fix the grid size. Let's say I want it large. You can see now this is large, but I don't want it. I'm going to just keep it medium because that just allows me to, you know, obviously work on it more fluently and also work on it very smoothly. So you can use them if you want to. And you can also see discard white overprint in output. You can also select that it just discards the white overprint when you want to output anything. So you can use it whenever you want and you can go through them and you can also edit your art boards. Through these options, you can see you'll be able to crop it. You can see it over here. It will be like this. But if you want to increase the size and there we go, we have it. Okay. So use whichever one you want or any one you desire or anything, let's say. Okay. Then in the next one we have is Document Color Mode. You'll be able to select whichever color mode you want to work on. Now one thing is that if you have any template, it's going to depend on which color mode it is. Let's say you selected CMYK, but the template you are using is RGB. Now you might think that what if there is a problem, it will not have any problems. Just one thing it will happen is that it will give you a short notice. Is that it is in CMYK. Do you want to revert it or do you want to change it to RGB if you're working or if you have RGB on default, then it will just tell you just press on continue and then you'll be good to go so you don't have to worry about anything. Then you also have file information. If you want to check any information about the document which you're working on, you can see it over here. You can also customize it. Let's say, starting for basic camera data origin, IPTC, IPTC, let's say extension, GPS, Photoshop, video data, AM properties, raw data and all of that. You can customize it if you want to. You can put in your own data so that you can find it later on. Or let's say it just helps you to find out that data or organize it according to your need. And after you've done, just press on. Okay. And then you also have this option where you want to save it too and then you will basically find it. Okay, So you just have to fiddle through a couple of these options over here. And then we have is this print option. When you press on print, the print interface will open up where you'll be able to print out your artboard, how you worked on it, and you can select whatever you want. You can fix out whatever type of, you know, preset you want. Or maybe even a couple of things which you have over here, orientation options and then general and also have print preset all of them and fix your printer. And you can also set up your printer from over here. You can press on Continue. And after you're done you just select on them and select whichever printer you want. And then you are good to go when you just press on done and print. Okay, so in the last one we have obviously exit. It will just help you to exit out of Adobe Illustrator. Now as we are done with this file ribbon of ours in Adobe Illustrator, let's go through a couple of tools which are going to be the five tools of Adobe Illustrator. Or the five basic tools, or the five first basic tools of Adobe Illustrator. Now you can see that I have a couple of tools over here. We're going to start off with the first five. Now the first tool which Adobe Illustrator has to offer is called the selection tool. You can select whichever object you want. You can make margins, You can select it whatever you want, even if you want to change it, or even if you want to, let's say just select any object. It will just help you through the selection to make sure to select it. You also have the shortcut key which is going to help you if you are selected on tool, just press on V and then you will basically see your selection tool has been selected. Then the next one we have is Direct selection tool. Now you can select any object. Okay, let me just make an object over here. Okay, as we have it, I'm going to select this tool and you'll be able to drag it wherever you want, but when you select on this, you'll basically be able to change if you have a couple of objects, even if they are grouped up, you'll be able to select any specific object which you have, an Adobe Illustrator. Okay? And then you'll be able to customize it or do whatever you want. When you write, click on it, you'll basically see Group Selection tool. It allows you to select multiple objects in your specific workspace. What I'm going to do is put in two. Now I'm going to do is first of multiple selection tool. You can see over here you'll be able to select it altogether, but when I use single selection to direct selection two, I'll be able to select this and change or customize it only one at a time. But if you use the group selection tool, it will work on at the same time. Let's select on all of them, I'm going to do change them. And you can see this is how it will work. You can also select the anchor. You can change it whenever you want. And you can see this is how it works. Okay, So that's going to be up to you how you're going to work with it. The next one we have is called the magic wand to it just allows you to customize it or you know, let's say you can select on this and you can see all of them has been selected at the same time. You can see how it works. Now when you go through that, you will basically see that magic 12 is y and it helps you to customize it however you want. Okay, well, the main function of using this magic 12 is that it helps a user easily select areas of an image with just one click. You just simply select this magic 12 on the toolbar and choose which part of the image needs to be selected and your work is done. Well, I'm going to be showing it to you later on when we are going to be working on images. So next two we have is the last of two. Now you can select specific object like this, and you can see that the specific object has been selected. Now I only want this part to be selected. I'm going to select on this part and the whole thing will be selected. But just this one, when you press on V and you can see this part has been selected and you can drag it out. So this is basically how this lasso tool works in Adobe Illustrator. And the last one we have is the pencil. It just helps you do, you know, draw a line. Customize it according to your need. And when you keep it up over here, make sure to use it. And there we go. And you also have this handle which you can use to customize it according to your need. Okay, then the last too which we have are right click on it. And then we have is the add anchor point. Now you can apply your anchor point right over here. You have to select a segment of the path. See that you select this segment first and I'm going to put the anchor over here. Select this anchor, I'm don't show again. Segment control. And put in your segment or put in your anchor however you want, okay? You can see it over here like this. This is the anchor and you can see it over here that this is the anchor or the center over here. Okay? So you'll be able to apply in your anchor whenever you want. Then you can also have this delete anchor. First I'm going to do is right click on it. I'm going to do pencil anchor, I'm going to do right click on its add. The anchor can see over here you can change it whenever you want. It's going to be up to you how you're going to work with this anchor. Now we have this anchor 0.2 It will just help you find out the anchor of that specific object. Let's go to just press on and it will just help you intersect or find out the Intersect whenever you want. Let's say I'm going to find out the Intersect. You can see it over here. This is the center. And when I go up over here, this is the center. If I go over here and I will find out basically the center of that specific object. Okay, this is basically how you'll be able to find out anchors with this tool and Adobe Illustrator. Hope you learned everything about this lesson on knowing about the file ribbon and also the first five basic tools of Adobe Illustrator and what functionality it has to offer. Thank you for watching this video til the end. Now in our next lesson, we're going to learn about the Edit ribbon and also the next five tools which are this Pen tool or let's say Curvature tool, text type. Then we have line segments and we have a rectangle tool and also our Paint Bush tool. Let's move on to our next lesson. 18. Edit ribbon with 5 basic tools: Edit Ribbon and five Basic Tools. Hello, we are back with another lesson about Edit Ribbon and also five Basic tools. Now let's start off with our Edit Ribbon and what functionality it has to offer. Go off to your left top corner and you will find out Edit. Now you can see that there are a couple of these options more than file, right? But most of them are about edits and customizations. So the first thing, what the edit ribbon has to offer is undue. Okay, what the undue does is redoes the process. Let's say I'm going to do edit one of these, I'm going to take it, change it like this. If I go off to edit and press on Undo, it also shows us what action you've done and you can undo the process. It also has a shortcut key or a shortcut function on your keyboard, which is control plus Z. Well, this is a very common shortcut function which works on almost all the softwa. If you have anything to undo, press on control Z to undo the process, Whatever you did so that you can revert the process, press on undo anchor. You can see this is how it will look like, Okay, then go off to edit again, and then you have Redo, which is shift control and Z. Well, most of the other softwares have Control and Y, and a couple of software basically Control and Y. But as Control and Y is already assigned to something, you have to press on Control, Shift and Z or shift control. And so that you can redo the process. If I press on redo, you'll basically see the process which I did recently has been redone. This is basically how you'll be able to undo and redo the process of what you did in Adobe Illustrator Press on edit again. And then we have cut, copy, and paste. Well this is a very, you know, let's say common function in all softwaes which is cut, copy, and paste. It just helps you to save a lot of time. If you want to copy anything, let's just click on this selection tool. Press on control C, or you can press on Edit and go off to Copy, which is also the same command. And if you want to paste it, you can press on Paste from over here or can press on control V. Okay, so this is basically how it works. You can see now there are two of them right now. If I select on any one of them and move it, you can see that there are three, because I also pressed on control and V after I click on past. Now if you want to cut three of these objects, just select three of them at the same time. And I'm going to do is press on Control and X, or can also go off to Edit and click on Cut from over here. The shortcut key is Control and X, press on control X, and you'll basically see that it will be cut. Okay, I'm going to select on them again, control X. And you can see that has been cut, but it is now on your clipboard. If you want to paste it, just press on control V again, and you'll basically see that it will reappear again. One thing about cut is that it cuts up the whole thing. And even if you want to paste it on another Rd board, let me show it to you. Press on File, click on New. I'm going to open up another one. I'm going to press on Create. As it opens up, press on Control and V and the whole thing will be pasted over here instead of that Rd board which we are using. Okay, so this is basically how the cut, copy paste works in adobillustrator. Obviously this is very basic. Okay, so these are a couple of things which you can already do even if you don't know or how adobllustrator functions. Now go off to edit again. And then we have Paste in front, pacing back, paste in place, or paced on all Artbooks. Well, if you've already worked on some, let's say Powerpoint or maybe Light Room or maybe Photoshop. Well, you might have some basic ideas about layers right now. Even if you don't, it's not a problem because we're going to guide you through the whole process, okay? Now what happens is that you want to pace in front, pacing back now, how does it work? Now I'm going to do, first off, click on any of these objects. And you can see that this is overlaying one of this. I'm going to do, remove one of them, Delete, and you can see that this is overlaying this one or overlaying this one. But what if I want this layer to be underneath this box? What you're going to do is click on Edit and click on Paste. In back, you can see Pasting back has worked. I'm going to click on this, press on Deletes. I'm going to click on this 12 and press on Deletes. Press on this, press on Deletes, take both of them. And you can see this is still now working this way. Now what you can do is click on this one. Control X and click on Edit. Paste in Back. Now this time it is underneath the box. You can do the same thing over here. Now if you want to take it front, you want this one to be at the front, not under there. You can press on control X, so they can cut it. Press on Edit again, and you want to paste it in front. And you can see that the one which was behind is overlaying the one which was overlaying this one previously. Okay, now you know how this works. Now click on Edit again, and then we have Paste in place. Now you can select a designated place. I'm going to press on control X. Now I'm going to do is click on this over here. Now I want it to paste in the same place. Now I'm going to press on Edit, Paste in place. And you'll basically find out that it will appear on the same place as it was on the selected panel or the selected Rd board. This is basically how it works. Now if you want the specific one to appear in the specific object over in this Rd board. Now I'm going to select on this, I'm going to press on control X or even control, let's say control C. I'm going to do is go over to this panel. I'm going to do is click on Edit and Paste in Place. It will appear in the exact position it was over previously. Okay, so now you know how this paste in place works. Well, it might look a bit different because I'm using two types of artboard. One is legal and one is a four. Okay, now I'm going to do is go off to edit again. And then we have is pace on all artboards. Now I'm going to do is going to click on this object over here. First I'm going to do is make another artboard, press on New. I'm going to do is press on Create. I'm going to do is make another one. Now what I'm going to be doing is clicking on the first one. Then I'm going to do is click on this specific object, which I have control C. I'm going to do is click on Edit. If you want to make it appear on all of them, pasted on all artboards. Now you will basically see that the same thing will be applied on each and every one, okay? Even if it doesn't appear over here, I'm going to just click on Edit again and press on Paste on all Artboards, you can see it over here. And even if you go over to the second one, I'm going to just click on Edit and you can paste on all artboards at the same time. Now, why did I have to make or paste it on all of them? It basically is because I have three different templates, okay? Or three different presets. But if I make the preset or template over here, it will appear over here. Okay, let me just show it to you. I'm going to do is make another artboard. You have this option over here. Artboard tool, I'm going to make it over here. And make one over here. Make another one over here. Now what I'm going to be doing is clicking on the selected object I'm going to do is click on Edits and Paste on all Artboards. And you'll basically find out that it will appear on each and every one of these artboards. You can see it over here, 12k, and another one is going to be over here. This is very simple. All you can also do is select them, make them all the same size, and then you can paste it wherever you want. Now you know how this works, and Adobe Illustrator I'm going to do is remove it Control Z so that I can remove the artboards, which I don't need. Now as we are done with place in all art boards, I'm going to click on Edit again. And then we have Paste without Formatting. Well, Paste without formatting is a bit different. I'm going to press on control C, I'm going to do take it over here. I'm going to take it over on this panel basically. And I don't want any format on that. I'm going to click on Edit, and you have this Paste without formatting. Well, this most of the time works on text, so let me just show it to you. I'm going to click on this text option, Make a text, I'm going to do, change this phone something different I'm going to do is change it to, let's say, a different format. You can see it over here. Person control C, I'm going to just take it over here. Title six, click on edits and you will basically have this paste without formatting even if you past it. Person control Z, I'm going to take it over here, control C. You're going to do is paste it for soft control V, and I'm going to just click on Edits. You can basically find out all control and V when I press on it, it will change it. You can see that this has changed, okay? This is basically how it works. An Adobe Illustrator, sometimes it might show its grade out, but if you use the shortcut key, it might work. I'm going to press on Edit again and then we have is clear. If you want to clear the formatting, you can just press on clear and the formatting will be reverted back to its default self. Now you have this find and replace option if you've used Microsoft Word or Microsoft Document, which is the same if you use that and if you want to find out any object. It also is on a lot of software because obviously you want to find something and replace it. Click on Find and you'll be able to find anything you want. You can see match case, whole word. Well, this mainly works on word cases or alphabetic cases or even numeral. Find out the one. And you can also replace the one, whichever one you want. And after you're done, just press on Okay, and then you're good to go. There are also a couple of criteria which you can select from over there. If you want to see those, you can press on Edit again and you can also press on control F. So that you can use this fine and replace option. You have this match case fine, whole words searching backwards, check hidden layers or check locked layers even if you want to. And then you can find it, replace it, and replace all at once. At the same time, fix up your criteria, what type of search and replace you want to use. Then after you're done, you can also click on Find Next. Okay, If you're selecting one or if you're trying to find one object at a time, then you can basically find out that this option will not be grayed out. You'll be able to use it whenever you want and you'll be able to find the next one whenever you want. And then we have a spell correction. It also is available on Adobe Illustrator. You can auto spell check and also you have this check spelling option over here which is assigned to control and I and it will find out if you have any spelling problems or if you know have any mistakes in it, then we have this edit custom dictionary. You can also apply words in the dictionary of Adobe Illustrator. Because obviously if you put anything or if you put any mistakes and if Adobe Illustrator does not know that, then it will show you a red line obviously. But if you want to apply it on your dictionary, you can entry your data over here and press on Done. And then you're good to go. Okay. Nadu is going to be clicking on Edit again and then you have is Edit Colors. You can apply or reapply your color whenever you want. You have all of these options over here. But first off, you have to change something. What am going to do is click on this option and change it to a different color. You have this color over here. Now if you go off to Edit and go off to Edit colors, and you'll be able to recolor your artwork. When you press on recolor, you'll be able to change it, change it through this panel. You can also apply prominent color. You can fix out whichever color you want, what type of color you want, and you can also show saturations according to your need. You can also fix out the color library, whichever one you are using. You can see art history celebration. Let's say I want a bit of metal. You can fix up metal colors from over here. You have to select them and you'll basically find out whichever metal color you want to use. You also have a lot of these categories which you want to use them. Just go through or fiddle through them whenever you want. And you also have this option of color theme picker. And you also have this color set like option, which you can find it from over here, 23, whichever color, let's say I want two colors at the same time, then you can see two colors will be applied. You can use the colors over here. And you can also use, let's say, something from over here to here. And you can see the prominent colors and the dominant colors at the same time which are being applied. If you want more colors, just increase it or take it to the right side and you will basically see more vivid colors will reappear, okay? And you can fix out what type of colors you want. You can fix out the dark, like darken it up. You can do that. Now if you're done. After you're done, you can just press on this back option, which you have over here. And then you will be good to go. Now the next one which we're going to work on is obviously if you've recolored it, just click on this option again and change the color like however you want, and then go off to Edit again. Click on Edits, you'll find out Edit Colors. You'll be able to work with presets if you want to. I've already shown you about how the RGBC and Y K and other colors work. You can work with two colors, three color, and also color harmony. If you want to just press on whichever library you want, let's click on this H process. Press on, Okay. And that will be applied, and you'll be able to apply whichever color you want. Okay. Press on Okay, and then you are good to go. Okay. You can see two of the colors at the same time. And it has been also applied to the panel, or the solid color panel over here on the left side. Now you can go through a lot of these color option. You can also invert color convert to CMYK and also convert to RGB if you want to. That's going to be totally up to you. You can also blend vertically. We need three pads for it. You have to make it three path. Make sure to click on Edit, Find out color. Then you have recolor with preset three color way and you have to make it three color select whichever library you want Tm to use NPA press on. Okay. After it has been applied and after that has been applied, there we go, we have it. I'm going to do, instead of two, I'm going to put in three if you want to or press on all press on. Okay. And then you will be basically be good to go. Okay. So this is basically how the recolor option works or color option works. You can also edit the original if you want to. Then we have a Transparency Flattener preset. If you want to apply in Transparency flattener, you will be able to do that. You can see the presets over here. Select whichever one you want and press on, okay. And you will basically see that all of the properties are over here. Press on, okay. And you will basically see the transparency will be applied on the specific object which you have selected on. And after you're done with that, let's go to the next one. We have print preset. Now, it's also the same process of how the print option works. You'll be able to select whichever print preset and you'll be able to apply or make your own print preset if you want to. So it's going to be up to you whichever one you're going to use before printing it. Now, after you're done, now go to the next one, which is Adobe PDF preset. Now you can click on it. It will take you to the site, or maybe sometimes open up this interface where you'll be able to select whichever PDF preset you want to use. Select the one you want to use, and press on, okay. And then it will be safe so you don't have to worry about anything. Okay, now click on Edit again, and then let's go off to Perspective Grid precept. Now if you want to apply in your grid as a perspective, let's have a click on this and press on, okay. And you'll basically find out the grids will be applied on your panel. Sometimes it is visible or sometimes it is not, But it is basically working underneath your panel, so make sure to use whichever one you want. And also you will see that it will be aligned to a specific grid line when you hold on a shift. And you can see this is how it will work, okay? You can see how it works, This is how it will work. I'm going to press on Edit again. And then let's go off to Color Settings. If you want to fix up your color settings, just click on this option. Then fix out whichever settings you want. You can also load up, you can fix out whichever color option you want. Let's say Photop Pro. Photo image P three, Apple RGB, SRGB monitor RGB is going to be up to you whichever color you want to use. And also you have C whichever CMYK color you want to use. And also we have this RGB over here which color management policies you want to use. Let's say preserve embedded profile or convert the working space. It's going to be up to you. I'm going to suggest you to keep all of these on default because you don't want to go through each and every one of them because sometimes it, you know, jumbles up the color options and features. So try keeping it on default because obviously in Also Default you'll be able to get all of the features Adobe Illustrator has to offer. Now when you're done with it, you have this assign profile. You can also apply in profile if you want to, don't color manage this document or working CMYK. Or you can also apply in specific profiles if you want to. It's going to be up to you. So it's going to be up to you whichever one you want to use. And if you don't want anything, you don't want any changes, just press on cancel and you basically find yourself back to your workspace. Then we have is the keyboard shortcuts. This is a very advantageous, or a very, let's say, easy way of seeing which keyboard shortcuts is assigned, to which command. You basically find out all the keyboard shortcuts there are in Adobe Illustrator, you can see that set defaults, you can also customize it. You have these many commands or even two commands. And if you have this file option, it will also show it to you in ribbons. And you can see what commands are there in file, what commands are there in edit, what commands are there in type, and also other tools. So this is basically how it works. You can see them. And obviously, if you want to make your work a lot more smoother or faster, obviously I'm going to suggest you to work with or let's say practice a bit more. Obviously, if you start or keep on working on a Dob Illustrator, you will get to know which shortcut is for which command. Okay, then you also have the My settings. You will be able to go through export and import settings. Well, you can go through them and fiddle with them if you want to. You can see Apply the settings. The illustrator will restart it. Person, okay? And it will restart it. You can see it over here. And you'll be able to apply in whichever settings you want to apply. And then we have, the last one is preferences. Whatever preferences you want, let's say you want general preferences, selection type, unique grid guide, smart guides, slices like hyphenation, plug ins, user interface performance, All of these preferences are over here. Let's say you want something like user interface preferences. Just click on it. It will show you what type of preference you want to use or go through the customizations. You can see the UI scale, You can increase the size if you want, slcmaus increase the size, want to press on large. And you can see they are going to be large. And if you want to apply, just press on. Okay. And one thing is that you have to restart it if you want any changes. But if you don't want it, just press on Cancel and then you're going to go. Okay, so now you know all of the commands and how this edit ribbon works in Adoblustrator. Now as we're done with the ribbon, let's go to the next five tools of Adobe Illustrator. So we've ended it on Pen Tool, Artist tool over here. Now we're going to learn about the Curvature Tool. Now the Curvature Tool creates an edit, curved and straight lines easily. So I'm going to click on this, I'm going to just take another line. You can see over here, you'll be able to drag it if you want to. You'll be able to make circles. You'll be able to make lines. It's going to be up to you. It's like different from the pencil, because in pencil it's not always just the way you want it. Make sure to use it if you want more flexible. If you want, if you want better lines and curve them up, you should use the brush to, or let's say the curves, or to. Now, the next to we have is the type tool. If you want to customize or apply in text, just click on text. Click on any of the area of your artboard and your text will be applied. Now you can also right click on this text option. And there are a couple of these tools which you will find now. First off, we have is the area type tool. Click on any of these areas over here. And obviously this is a non compound. You must click on a non compound, non masking pad to create text inside a path. Either you need a shape feminine use, click on its ellipse tool. I'm going to make a circle. You can see it over here. Click on its type tool area, select on this, and you can see it has been applied inside the text. This is basically how the area tool works. Area type tool. Then we have this type on path tool. You have to select on this path, you can see the path over here. Click on it, and this is the path the text is going to take place. Okay? You can do it on almost all shapes. Then we have this vertical type tool. It is going to be vertical like this. And the next one is going to be vertical area type tool. You can do the same thing over here, Select the path, and then you're good to go. And it will be vertical. Okay? Even though as I already have a text, it's not appearing. So I'm going to do is to make sure to use another shape. I'm going to just press it over here. Click on this and select the path. Or select the anchor. You can see this is how it will work. Okay, then the next one is going to be a bit different, which is have vertical type tool which is going to be the same. But obviously this one, I'm going to just take this. And there we go, you have to make another object over here. Just take it over here. Click on this text option tool and select the path. And there we go, which is going to be vertical, okay? And then the last one is going to be touch type two. You'll be able to click on a character to select, then you have to select any of the character lema, just click on Path and it will be applied. Or maybe lemma, just click on it and then you'll be able to apply in the text. It's going to be totally up to you how you're going to work with it. I'm going to just click on this and make your own text or make your own path according to your need. And as we're done with this text tool, next we have the line segment tool. You'll be able to apply in lines according to your need. So you can see it over here. Change it if you want to. Now, the next one is going to be the Arc tool. You want to make an arc, just click on this option. What I'm going to do is make an arc like this. You can see how it works. You can see it over here. I'm going to select on this again, ma, do make another arc over here like this. Okay? One thing is that it's not going to stay there, but it will just show you our guide you, it's something like that. If you want to make a spiral, make sure to use a spiral over here. And you'll basically make a spiral text or spiral path. Now if you want to click on this area, click on the path, and you'll basically see that it is now on spiral. Okay, So now you know how these options work or these tools work. Next one is going to be the rectangular grid tool. You'll be able to make a grid of your own whenever you want. Obviously, it's going to contain a path because you can see all of the path over here and also there are intersections and also there are a couple of anchors inside of the grid. Then we have is the polar grid tool. If you want a polar grid select on this and you'll be able to make a polar grid, it's going to be up to you how you're going to work with it. So make sure to customize it according to your desire. Now, as we're done with this part, let's go off to the shape tool. Well, I've already shown you a couple of these shapes. There's rectangular shape, you can see it over here. Then I'm going to do is make another shape, the round rectangle. And make it over here. And I'm going to tip. I'm going to suggest you is that when you're making a shape, if you hold on a shift and make a shape, it will make you a perfect size shape. But if you like, change that over here like this and hold on a shift and then do it. It will still contain the shape, how it was, but keep it to be very perfect. Then we have the Lop tool so that you can make a perfect circle. You can see it. If you hold on a shift, it will work like this. But if you let go of shift, it will work like this. You can make an ovo, you can make something like this. Or if you hold on a shift, it will turn directly into the circle, See. As I have it, I'm going to press on control Z. I'm going to do is make on a hold on a shift and make a perfect circle. Next one I'm going to be doing is going to be a polygon tool in do make a polygon tool like this. And there we go we have our polygon in. The next tool we have is the Star tool which is over here. You can make a star just like this. In the next one is our flare tool. If you want to apply in flare, just make your flare over here and you'll basically find out the flare has been applied on that specific object C. You can take it over here, and this is how it will work. Now if you want to change these objects, let's, I'm going to click on this option and you will basically find out paths, anchors, and also a couple of things. Let's say if I select on this, you'll be able to change its size. Hold on a shift, there we go. We have it over here, Take it over here, this is how it will look like. Okay, Then we have this circle tool. You'll basically find out over here as an arc option, you can make an arc just like this if you hold onto it. Then on the same you can make out rounded corners. Select on this and you'll basically find out this option over here and you can make it round it. You're going to do the same thing over here. You can either make it round or you can either make it pointy, it's up to you. Then over here you can make it round, or you can make more corners. It's up to you. Okay. So this is basically how these shape tools work. And you can obviously make custom shapes, but these are the ones. And when you press on this option, you will basically find out this will be over here and you can keep it wherever you want. I'm going to just press on this and I'm going to keep it right over where it is. Now, the last tool which we have is the paintbrush tool. Now, when you want to use your paint brush, just click on it, select the color you want to use. Let's, I'm going to use this red. You will be able to apply the color, if you want this orange color, select on it. And then you'll be good to go. If you want to apply ingredients, you can see the gradient has been applied. If you want no fill or none, you can select on it and it will be applied again. Okay. You can also like fix out whichever strokes you want. You can fix out whichever brush type, whatever size you want to use. It's going to be up to you now. The next one which you have is the Blob brush tool. Well, the Blob brush tool is basically a bit different, but it will just give you a better looking outcome. You can see that it is now turning If I do this, obviously you can see the couple of, let's say like this. You know, over here there are a couple of zigzags. But if I let go, it will be a lot more smoother. You can see it over here like this, it got smoother. But the difference is that when you use the paintbrush tool, it's not going to be smooth. If you do it like this, it will be just like that. Okay, You can use blob brush or you can use whichever pain brush if you want to use it. Hope you understood everything about this lesson on the basic five tools and also about the Edit ribbon, which Adobe Illustrator has to offer, or the functionality it has to offer. In our next lesson, we're going to learn about the Object Ribbon and the next five tools Adobe Illustrator has to offer. Let's move on to that lesson. 19. Object ribbon with related tools: Object Ribbon and five Basic Tools. Welcome back to another lesson of Adobe Illustrator. Essential. In this lesson, we are going to be learning about the Object ribbon and also the five next tools are the five basic next tools of Adobe Illustrator. Let's open up this preset or anyone you want, it's going to be up to you. I'm going to click on this one. And there we go as it has opened up. Now the five tools are going to be from over here. This one shape or tool. Then our eraser tool, then we have is our rotation tool. Then we have is the scale tool, and then we have our width tool. Okay, let's start off with our object ribbon. Now in our object ribbon, first off, you're going to need an object to open up all the features or all the tools or commands about this object. Now I'm going to do, make sure to, let's say I'm going to do, click on it. I'm going to make this shape over here. And now we have our object. I'm going to select on it, There we go, and click on Object. Now first off, we're going to find out transform. And it can transform again. You can see it over here. It has transformed over here. But we don't want that. I want it over here in the middle. And I'm going to go off object and then you'll be able to move, rotate, reflect, scale shear, or transform each according to your need. Let's say you also have a couple of these shortcut keys. Let's, I'm going to move it, You can move over here and you will basically find out this over here. Press on, okay, and you can see how it works. Okay, so you can go through them and fiddle with these transform tools. You can rotate it if you want to. Let's say you want to rotate it, find it like this. Press on, you will get a preview. You can make it under copy to, let's say I want to copy. And you can see this is how it will work. I'm going to press on control Z so that I can undo the process. Then we have is arranged. This is the same one as copying or pasting it to back or front. But instead you can bring it to front or back at the same time without copy. Now I'm going to press on, first I'm going to press on control C, Control V, you can see it over here. I'm going to press on Control C and Control V, I'm going to press on Control V again. Now we have 23 of these boxes. Now I'm going to do change the color of this, Let's click on this option. Instead, I'm going to make it black, or let's change it to this color. I'm going to select on this path, going to change that color to, there we go. The last one I'm going to be doing is changing it to maybe this one. Okay, there we go. But now I want the pink one to be at the bottom. What you're going to do is click on object, click on arrange, and send back. Okay, Send to back or backward. You can see backward. When you take it over here, you'll basically see that it is now overlaying this one. The difference of sending it to backward or sending it to back has a difference, okay? If you send it to or backward, it will take it back one layer. But if you send it all the way back, you will basically find out it will go all the way back, not even on any of these layers. Now I'm going to do the same thing over here. I'm going to do is take it over here. You can see how it works. Now if I want to send it all the way backward, okay? Now I'm going to select on this. Okay, Let me just show to you I'm going to send it back, or send it front once, and then send it all the way front at the same time. Bring forward. And you can see I'm going to click on object again. Click on Arrange, bring forward. You can see now it is back. Came forward, one step. I'm going to press on control Z. Control Z again. But if I select on object and click on bring front, it will come back at the front overlaying both of these objects. Okay, so now you know how this works. Now I'm going to do the same thing. Click on Object, arrange, bring to front. Okay. They also have these short cut keys. You can use them whenever you want. Now the next option which we have over here in object ribbon is going to be Align. Now if you want to align your object lessen due a horizontal align left. You can do the same thing on all of them. Click on Object, I'm going to click on Aldus Align left. If you want it, Align Center, you can also do that center line. You can also go off Object, go off a line and vertical align top. You can see all of them are now underneath it. Now I'm going to click on Object, I'm going to do find out on a line, you can also vertical align bottom. Now you'll basically find out to be something like this, but only one of them is selected. So this is how it will look like. Press on control Z for a couple of times so that you can get the result of how it was. Now you can take them to be at the center, and there we go, we have it. Okay. So we are done with this Align option. Now go off the object again, and then we have this group if you want to group all of them up. First off, select all of the subject or object which you want to group up. And it can press on Control or it can go off the object and then group all of them up. Now if you just take one of them, it will be selected altogether and you'll basically find it out that all of them are now grouped. Okay, so now you know how this function works or how this command works and Adobe Illustrator select on the object again. Now one thing is that even if you grouped it up, if you double click on a specific object, you'll find out the specific object over here. But still, if you get out of these, I'm going to go over here now, You'll basically find out that this is how it works. I'm going to go back again. And now you have to use all of them back again until you ungroup them. Now if you press uncontrol again, it will be ungrouped, so you don't have to worry about it. First off, you have to select on it, go off the object, and you'll also find out this ungroup which is shift control on. You can press on it and it will be ungrouped on how it was ks, how it works. Then go off object again and then we have a lock if you want to lock the selection or all the art works. You can also do that when you lock up any object or all the artwork or other layers, you won't be able to work on those. Make sure to lock it up, or let's say if you don't want to work on it or if you don't want any customizations on it. First off, make sure to lock it up and make another layer. And then you will basically be able to work with it without any changes or without losing any progress or doing any mistakes on that specific layer. Then we have is this unlocked option. If you lock anything or if you lock any object or layer, you can unlock it by clicking on Unlock All on Alt Control. And two then we have is hide. You can hide out specific selection or artworks, or above or even layers if you want to. And I can also show all the layers. If you have hidden any object from your workspace, then we have is Expand. When you click on Expand, it will show you an expand option over here what type of fill you want. If you want any fill, you can also deselect it. You can also deselect this stroke. You want only the object, press on, okay? And you will basically find out no fill, no object, no outline, okay? So this is going to be up to you how you're going to work with it, but make sure when you are using this object ribbon, make sure to select any object before. Now you have this rasterized option. What the rasterize option is, or let's say why the rasterize option is used is because you are going to rasterize the effect for later purpose. And what are the advantages of using a rasterized image or maybe a rasterized object? So basically, the rasterize is necessary when you want to display or print a vector based image on a device or medium that only supports raster graphics. This conversion ensures that the image appears correctly with all its details and effect and doesn't lose any resolution. Okay, So you can rasterize it if you want to. So basically in computer graphics, rasterization, or you know, is the task of taking an image described in a vector graphic format, shapes, and converting it into a raster image. A series of pixels, dots, lines, which when displayed together, creates the image which was represented via your screen or via any of the software. So you can use it if you don't want to lose any effect. Let's say you are working on Adobe Illustrator 2023 right now, but you want to take all the color features and all the effects directly into a really old version of Adobe Illustrator. Obviously, it's not going to work, but if you rasterize it and turn it into an image format or a shape format, it will support there and you can represent it on an older version. Two, you can rasterize it whenever you want. Okay, so make sure you rasterize it according to your need. Now we have this option over here. You can also fix the text if you want to. You can see it over here. Double click to convert to area text. We have this text over here, but I'm not going to be using it. I'm going to delete it. I'm going to press on control Z. And there we go. Now the first thing I'm going to be doing is press on Object select on the object. First click on objects and then we have is create radiant mesh. You can also create your gradient mesh if you want to. You can see it over here. Now press on. Okay. And then you'll be able to fix out the gradients according to your mesh. Obviously, you'll be able to change it wherever you want and also paste it wherever you want. You find the edge of each and every one of them and you'll be able to apply in the gradient according to your need. So now you know how you'll be able to apply in a gradient mesh. Now the next thing we're going to do is going to be flatten the transparency. You can do that. You can also flatten the transparency if you want to. What I'm going to do is keep it over here. You can go through these options and fiddle with them so that you can see how it works, how it functions, and what are the differences. You can see that there are a couple of criterias and a couple of check boxes. You can see convert all text to outlines. You can do that. You can convert all strokes to outlines. Clip complex regions and also antillzed rasters. And after you're done, just press on. Okay, and then you're good to go see how it works. Press on this over here, I'm going to press on Object. And then you'll be able to create Object Mosaic if you want to. But obviously I'm going to skip it, because this is not going to work on over here. But yet you can see when I apply those effects, this has turned into something totally different. And I've storized the effects of it, and this looks very smooth, okay, without any outline. So I'm going to go off the object again. I'm going to select on this object, click on Object, and then you can make pixel perfect. You can make your pixel perfect by clicking on that option. And Adobe Illustrator will scan that specific object and make your object look a lot more better because it's going to fix out all the pixels now go off the object again and then you can go off the slice, just like I like said, You can make slices. You can make it over here, you can release it. You can create from selection two or clip to artboard Mona. Just make the slices. And you can see you can apply, or this is one slice, this is one slice, this is one slice, this is one slice, and this is also one slice. Eight images, eight images, three images, eight images, and also eight images, four of them. So you can select the slices and also print them if you want to, but as I don't use slices most of the time. Well, the advantages of using slices is that it gives you a direction or a guide that what you can put inside of that. And also keep a specific section for each and every element or object which you are trying to put in a specific slice. Okay, Click on Object again, and then you can go off to create trim marks. You can trim your marks if you want to. You can see it like this. You can trim the marks. And you can also see how it works. Now you can see, you will be able to see it. You can trim it from over here. And this is the anchor, and this is the path of each and every one of them. Okay? It's going to be up to you, but if you don't want to use it, you don't have to. But it just helps you sometimes to guide it up. And even if you have, let's say like a totally perfect circle or maybe a rectangle, now you want the outer grid where you want to put another circle so that you can see the grid and also make it perfect. Well, that option is used now. I'm going to go off the object again. Then we have is packed. Now you can fix a path you can join, you can average outline, stroke, offset path, reverse the path direction. Simplify at anchor points, remove the anchor points, divide the object below and split into grid. Let me just show you a couple of them. And after I show you a couple of them, you will basically know how it works. Now if you want to join any path, you'll basically find out over here, Press On, Okay. And as this is not an open path, this is an open path. You'll be able to fix out the path and join the path if you want to. You can see it over here, the edge. And this is the path over here at the edges and the paths. Okay, now you can select on this and this is the path. You can join them up if you want to with another object. Now there are a couple of other things too. You can average path if you want vertical or horizontal. Well, let only use the vertical. Now you can see the path is only vertical. But if you use horizontal, it's only going to be horizontal and make a path for you, but not any shape. I'm going to press on object again. And the last one which I'm going to use is Outline the Stroke. Now you can see the stroke outline has turned into a path which is totally not the shape you can select on this, basically. Now it is a shape, but you can only see, let's say the outline over here. If you want to increase the size, if you want, you can do that, but I'm going to do is keep it just the way it is. Okay? So now you basically know how you'll be able to use or use the section of path option. Now if you want to convert or let's say customize your shapes, we have this shape option. You can convert the shape or expand the shape. Now one thing is that, why is it there of converting into shape when I'm using a shape? Well, this works most of the time when you are using a photo and you want to turn it into a shape. Now whats' going to do is turn all of these together into a shape. I'm going to click on Object, click on Shape, I'm to convert to a Shape. 69 are not into a shape. I'm going to click on this option, you can see it over here. But if I have only the shapes, you'll basically find out that it will turn or it has already turned into a shape. Okay, then you will not be able to select them individually because it has turned into one shape at a time. Okay, I'm going to just click on this object over here. Click on Object, and you have this Shape option. And you can also expand the shape if you want to click on Expand. And another pop up will appear up. You'll be able to expand it whenever you want and then make it however you want. And according to your desire, then you can make patterns. You can tile the edge color too. If you want to make a pattern, click on it and press on. Okay. And then you will basically find out this is how it will look like and the pattern is basically the one that you have selected and that is going to be the same one which is going to continue up. It's most of the time used when you are making a pattern on your background or maybe filling up a specific object or a specific section. And sometimes it does kind of look good. You can put in a couple of logo icon and use the same thing as a pattern. It helps you to make a pattern according to your need. Okay, then we're going to go off the object again. Then we have is repeat. Now if you want to repeat the same thing as radio grid and mirror, all of them, you can go through this repeat. Now if you want a radio repeat, you can click on it and you can see that it has turned into something like this. It also allows you to make you know, very good looking shapes whenever you want. And if you don't want it, person control z and then we're good to go. Now if you want, obviously if you want to repeat it, like let's say I'm going to go off to repeat and you want grid and it will be into grid, okay, So it's going to be up to you. Make sure to use whichever one you want, control shift and Z, so that you can undo the process. I'm going to go off to edit. I'm going to do undo cut. There we go, We have it, okay. Then I'm going to go off the object again after selecting a specific object. Now there is also when you click on Object, the next option we're going to learn about is going to be our blend. You can make the blend if you want to. You can also have this blend option, which you will find out. You can make blend by clicking on this option. And you will be able to blend the color according to your need. But I'm going to do is click on Object again and go to the next one. Then you have this envelope distort. I'm not giving you like a full on review or a full on, let's say how this works. Because later on, after we're done with the ribbons, I'm going to be showing you a couple more things about how you'll be able to customize your objects and also make a professional, you know, let's say start off making designs and all of those. So the next one we have is going to be our envelope distort. You can make warp if you want to. You can see how this works. You can change it from over here instead of going through the other tools. Now if you want Arc, select on arc. If you want lower arc, you can also see that there are upper arc. Then there we have is arch, then we have is bulge and all of them. You can also see fish eye. It's going to be up to you how you're going to work with it. We have also shell lower and a couple of them now you can fix out how you want the horizontal, how you want the vertical. It's going to be up to you how you're going to work with it. Okay? After you're done, just press on. Okay? And you can also fix the bend of how you want the bend to be. And then just press on. Okay? And basically you will also see the path on how it is working. And if you don't want any of those, just make sure to keep it over here. Make sure to keep it on zero and there we go, rehab it. And I'm going to do is just keep it the bend or maybe something around over here. And you can also fix out if you want vertical or horizontal. And you can use whichever one you want. So I'm going to here, I'm going to do is use the arch lower. I'm going to press on. Okay. You'll be able to make customizations on this one too. You can go off the object again and then we have is perspective envelope this store. You can also reset with mesh if you want to press on. Okay, and then you're good to go. You can reset it if you want to. Well, you can see that I don't have much of them, so it's basically the same. But if you're using a lot more, you'll basically find out that it will turn back to how it was. Now we have perspective. Well, this most of the time works. When you are working with a photo, it's okay. So you can fix the perspective. If you change the perspective, and then if you want to revert it back or maybe change it, you can use this perspective option. And then it will revert back or change the perspective of how it looks like. Then we have this live paint You can gap option. You can make it if you want to. You have this expand. I'm going to select on the next object. Click on Object this time, and I'm going to do is go off to Live paint and you can make them. You can see how it works. You can see this over here, edges. And you'll be able to change the color according to your need and also apply them how you want them to look like. Okay, so it's going to be up to you how you're going to work with it. So I'm going to leave it up to you. You can fiddle with it. Okay, so you can see how it works. The next option which we have over here is going to be the image trace. Well, the image trace basically works, you know, sometimes on clips or photos. How it's moving a specific, let's say, a trait which you want to trace. Well, if you've used or ever used let's say Premier Pro, so you'll basically see how the image tracing works. Well, it just basically finds out a specific, let's say trait or specific, you know, of your photo. And then applies it or whatever customization you want to do with it. So I'm going to go off the object again as we don't have images or as we're not going to make image trace right now, I'm going to keep it. Then we have this text wrap, okay? If you want to wrap up any text, you can make it like this. And you can see that outside of this outline, we have this small stroke where we can apply our text. And those texts will be applied over there instead of the path. Okay, so this is basically how it works. Then we have is clipping mask. Well, I'm going to be showing you how you can make a clipping mask on Adobe Illustrate or later on you can make it like this and you can mock up specific object on specific objects. Okay, I'm going to go off to objects again. I'm going to do is find out compound path. I'm going to do is press on and you can make out compound Oka'mnaus, make another shape over here I'm going to do, go off to object, and when you go off the compound path, you can make compound path however you want. Okay, let's make a compound path over here. This is going to be my compound path. Okay, I'm going to select on this, click on Object. I'm going to Make on compound make. And there we go. It has been already made. Then I'm going to go off the object again. And in our object, the next one which we have is artboard. You can convert an object into a artboard. You can see now this one that are not clipping mask to create artboard, select non rotated rectangle. So first off if you have to select something and then rasterize it effect and then it will turn into an artboard. So to do is click on Object, then you can rasterize it. Press on Rasterize. It will take a bit of time to rasterize that effect. And after that has been rasterized, what you can do is turn it into an artboard. Click on object, then you can do is go off the artboard and convert them into an artboard if it is not rotatable, but if it is rotatable it will not work. You can see that this specific object has turned into an image. When you double click on it, you can see this is now turned as an image, okay? So that you can apply it wherever you want, even though you can see how it is an image. Because you can see the outlines. There is this shape over here which is white. But as we don't want white, but we cannot do anything because this has turned into a shape, or let's say an image, not a shape. Okay, This is basically how it works. Now you can go off the object again, and the last one we have is graph. You can apply whichever type of graph or chart according to your need. Now you can click on type and you'll be able to put in your data and it will make your chart or the graph type you want, okay? Now if you want, let's say graph option like this or maybe stack columns, bars, stacked bars, lines, areas, maybe pi or even scatter or even radar. It's going to be up to you, put in your own data and then you'll basically find out your chart or graph which you want to apply will appear on your screen, on your workspace. So this is basically how we're going to remove all of them. Reduce, press on Delete. And you can see this is now totally clean. Now you can see collect for export. You can collect specific objects for export too. So you can select them and then collect them for export for later purpose. Or you can do it whenever you want. We're done with this Object Ribbon and Adobe Illustrator. Now the things what you're going to learn about is going to be five tools. Now as we were done with this Blobbers tool, the next five is going to be the shaper tool, eraser tool, rotation tool. Then we have a scale tool and also about width tool. Now let's start off with our shape or tool. Now if you want to shape any object, you can do that You can see. Now even though I put it like this, I'm going to do is take it like this. This has turned out to be like this. You can see now circle. Now, if I keep it like this, it will turn into a circle. Now, if I take it like this, you can see how it works. It just has to, I'm going to make sure to try a triangle. You can see how triangle has been made. If I try making a rectangle, it will make up a rectangle. See, this is how it works. If I try to make a star, it will turn it into a star. Let me just show it to you. Okay? I'm going to take it over here, because sometimes it doesn't show up. So you can just make another like whichever shape you want and it will appear just the way it is. You can see it like this. See how it works. Basically, this helps you a lot of time because you can have some fun too. Then we have is our pencil tool, you'll be able to make a pencil line. One thing about this pencil line is that you have these anchor points. You can change it whenever you want. Okay? Then we have a smooth tool. You can smoothen up any object. You can smoothen up how it works. You can see how it works. You can see now it is a lot smoother. Now, if I do the same thing over here, nothing will change because it is now like this. Okay? Now, seven to just click on this tool, pencil tool, again to keep it like this. Now if I use the smooth tool, if I click on these objects over here, you basically find out it will be a lot more smoother. Okay, then the next one which we have is the eraser tool. You can remove paths like this. You can see the path is removed. Remove this one can see path removed, removed, there we go, Select on any of the path, there we go. This is how it works. The next one is joint tool, you can join up specific pencil lines if you want to. What I'm going to do is go over here. Pencil tool, there we go, I'm going to do is remove a couple of them. S. Can see then if I use this joint so I'll be able to join them up. Okay. First, Sun Control Z to join them up. It has been joined. Okay. Then we have a couple of also other options over here. You can take it outside if you want to, but I'm going to keep it just the way it is, wherever it is. Then we have a eraser tool, you'll be able to erase any object like this. And you can see the segments of each and every one and how the stroke is working. Why is it working? Because now it's not basically an actual shape. I'm basically using an actual, let's say I made this as with the pen. So this is how it works and it is also showing me the outlines. But if you are basically using a shape, it will not work. The whole shape will be removed at the same time. Now as we have, so we also have a scissor tool, we'll be able to put an Intersect on a specific object. You can see it over here. And you can find out a specific anchor point. Even though these are not shapes, let me just try making a shape. And then I'm going to just click on the Scissor tool and you can cut out specific object you can see. Please see the Scissor tool on a segment or an anchor point, but not on an end point. You can find out the anchor point. Now you have to find out anchor, find out the segment in between them, and then you have to cut it out. Then we have this knife tool, you can also cut out specific parts like this. You can see I've put in a couple of segments in the middle. And this is how basically it will work. You can see I will be able to make more cuts on it and this is basically how it will work. Okay? Then we have our rotation. If you want to rotate any object to select on the object. And then you'll be able to rotate control and you will be able to select on that object, and then you are going to rotate it however you want. Okay, Now let's say I'm going to do is make a shape first. After I select on the Shape and click on Rotate tool, select on this inside, and you'll be able to rotate it however you on, just by dragging your mouths. Then we have this reflect tool. You can also make it reflect. If there's another object lessened, make sure to click on, let's say, let's say Start tool. Just make this one over here, make it reflect. Click on this option over here, Reflect Tool, You can reflect it totally. Okay? It might seem like it is now rotating, but it actually is not. It's just totally rotating up. This is basically how this one works, okay? You'll be able to rotate it too if you want to see over here. Okay? Then we have is this extender tool or what this is called, you can extend a specific object. You can see it over here, which is the scale tool. You'll be able to scale up objects if you want to. Let's say select on this object over here, select on this, and you'll be able to increase the size according to your need. You can see the size of the star is increasing. Person control Z, I'm going to select on this path right now. This time I'm going to do increase the size. If you have a selected control T, I'm going to do make another shape. Click on this option over here M. Click on this Scale tool and you'll be able to resize it however you want just by clicking wherever you want to. Okay, this is how it works. You'll be able to make it small or big according to your need. Then we have a shear tool. You'll be able to share up objects like this, change the perspective of how it is, you can see the degrees. Okay? This is basically how it works then is this reshaped tool. You'll be able to reshape any object if you want to. What I'm going to do is change this into somewhere over here can change it according to your need. Okay, you'll be able to shape it up, change the position, and also make changes on how it actually looks like. Then the tool which we're going to use is going to be our width tool. If you want to fix the width, just click on this option. And then you have to fix in the width just like this. And there we go, we have it okay. You can fix the width. And the next one we're going to do is use the Warp tool. If you want to put up a Warp, you can use this, and you can see there is a warp. Then the couple of tools which are over here, right click on it. Then we can also twirl it up if you want to. You can see it is now twirling. We can also use it over here if those are shapes, basically. If it's not shapes, it's not going to work. I'm going to do is use the pucker tool. You can use it too if you want to. You can see I can pucker up specific object or specific parts. Then we're going to use this blow tool. You can also blow it up if you want to. You can see it is now bloated, totally bloated, actually. Then the next one which we have is going to be our scallop tool. Well, we'll be able to apply in scallops if you want to. Then the next one is crystallized. You can apply in crystallized effects like this. The last one we have is wrinkle tool. You can apply in a bit of wrinkle if you want to. This is basically all of the tools which you have to learn about are the five basic tools and also about our object ribbon. So in this lesson, if you didn't understand a part or if you have any question, feel free to ask me and I will guide you through the whole process. And I hope you understood everything from the beginning to the end. And I'm going to suggest you that you should not skip any part while you're watching these videos so that you don't miss out on anything which you have to learn. So let's move on to our next lesson where we're going to learn about the type ribbon and also our next five basic tools of a W illustrator which are going to be free transform tool. Then we have is our Shape builder tool. Then we have perspective grid tool. Then we have mesh tool and also our grading tool. So let's move on to that lesson. 20. Type ribbon with 5 basic tools: Hypurbon and five basic tools. Welcome back to our, another lesson of Adobe Illustrator essential. In this lesson we are going to be learning about the type ribbon and also the five basic tools. First thing I'm going to be doing is going to be opening up one of the preset. Well, most of the time I just use the letter because it's in the front. As I'm not showing you any exercises, I can just use any of the preset I want. But if you want any different preset, make sure to use whichever one you want. That I'm going to do is wait for a while until it appears up on my screen. I'm going to do is cut this off over here because I'm not going to be needing that right now. I'm going to do is take this gradient over here and keeping it wherever I want. Now as we are going to learn about the type ribon, I'm going to click on Type First. Now first thing which we get in type ribbon is going to be our fonts, our symbols, then our text. Most of them are about text and also about characters. First thing we get are about the fonts. You can see that over here we have our separate section of type. Here we have font, recent font size, and more from Adobe fonts. Okay? Use whichever one you want, according to your desire. Okay? Now from here, when you click on type, you'll basically find our fonts. I'm going to show off more fonts from Adobe fonts later on. Now if you want to choose any of the font you want, you can go through these options and use whichever one you want. And each of them also comes with different type of characters. Let's say a couple of them are regular bold, bold italic. Then there are also narrow, narrow, bold italic, narrow italic. You can see that there are a couple of them you can use whichever font you want. You can go down and also find the ones, whichever one you need. It's going to be up to you whichever one you're going to use. Then we have is our recent fonts. Now whichever font you worked on or which you used recently will appear over here on recent funds. So make sure to use this function and this is also an advantage. Let's say you use the font and then later on you opened up, you know, let's say preset or another file. And then you don't know which font you use or you forgot which font you used. So this recent funds basically helps you find the fund which you actually used and then applied directly. Okay, Then we have is the size. Now, whichever size you want to use or whichever size of character you want to use, you can select it from over here. Now as we know about these, let me just show it to you a bit. So I'm going to click on Text, or let's say the type tool which we have on Adobe Illustrator. When you click on it I'm going to do is type in my text. First I'm going to do is going to be, as you can see, it is still selected. I'm going to go off the type, I'm going to go off the size. And then I'm going to do change it to 72. You can see now it is larger, now you can also click on type. And you can change the font from over here. I'm going to use this. It has changed, right? But I want to use the recently used font which was a bit ago. Click on Type Recent fonts, Mariette, Pro or whatever it is. You can see now it has been applied. You can use these options. Now, another option is that you can go through these options from a different panel. You can go through these characters. It will provide you the same option, but also it looks a bit different because it is not the same as a ribbon. You can change the font style from over here, and you can change the font size from over here. It's going to be up to you later on. I'm going to be showing you about this panel too. Let's just finish off this lesson first. And then we're going to go through them later on step by step. Then you're going to click on Type again. And then we have is more from Adobe funds. Now one thing is that there are a vast amount of funds on Adobial Stator, but when it is on default, you might see that there are not like all of funds over there on Adobial Streeter. In default mode, okay? So a couple of funds that you have to download it or you have to know load it up on Adobo Streeter so that you can use it. And sometimes you download something or you use a template and that fund is not available on your Adobo stator version or not on your libraries. So what happens is that if you want that font, it's going to detect the fund for you. And if you want to download that fund, just click on more from Adobe funds. So basically when you click on more from Adobe funds, it will take you to their site where you will be able to download any of the fund you want to use in the services of Adobe Illustrator and use them for various purposes. You can see the website is basically Fonts.adobe.com And then from here you'll be able to preview or see whichever font you want to use. And also you can get a preview and then download it and directly applied Adobe Illustrator or load it up so that you can use it while working on Adobe Illustrator. And there are these vast amount of fonts, and there are also categories of what type of fonts you want. And obviously on each and every one of them there is a preview. You can see slab surface like this, crypt is like this surface like this, hands like this, and also Mono Sensorif and a lot of them. So now we know about the differences and now you know how you'll be able to get funds. So let's go off to Advil Streeter again and show to you how the other tools or other commands of the type ribbon has to offer. I'm going to click on Type. Now we have glyphs. Now what are glyphs? Well, glyphs are basically kind of like symbols or icons. Okay, so I'm going to click on glyphs. You'll basically see that it is, it is going to show me a glyph panel where I'll be able to select whichever glyph I want to use. You can see these aren't going to be entered as signs or symbols. Then you can use different type of symbols, two lining figures. Then you'll be able to select different type of categories. Subscript, superscript is going to be up to you. This is how the glyphs option or the glyph tool has to offer and how it functions. Now the next one is going to be type conversion. Now how to use the type conversion? I'm going to select this, click on Type, and I'm going to select on this text, click on Type. Again, what basically happens is that it's basically that it will turn a specific text into either a shape or rasterize it. Now first thing is that I'm going to do is select on it and you can see control when you select on it and you're going to go off the type and you can convert the type. Okay? Well, this is not working right now because we have to turn it into let's say a section or let's say we have to turn it into an outline. First you can select On Type, and then you can convert to Area type. You can click on it and you can see you'll be able to convert it however you want. And you can turn it into an outline too. Well, I will also show it to you later on. You can see you can convert the point type. You can also do that. You can see the, you can see almost all the paths of this specific text. Then you can also go off the type and convert area type back again. You can see the anchor over here and you can change how it looks like according to your need. And you can also change the anchor point. And also you can convert the point type if you want to. You can see it over here, double click on it. And then change it whenever you want. Now let's go off the type again. And then we have this type on path and threaded text. Well, these are basically the same options are the same tools as we see over here. Area type tools, then we have type on path tool, then we have type on path vertical. Well, this is how it works, okay? Basically you find a path and then you have to select on that specific shape or specific path you have. And then you can insert it directly into that shape or directly into that path. The difference is that when you are using the tools over here, you can apply directly, but when you are using these commands, you have to do it manually. Let's say you already have a shape, you already have a text, and then you're going to do is put in the text later on. That is how it works. Then we have fit to headline. So basically you can also fit a specific object or a specific, you know, whatever you have in your panel or your workspace, you can make it fit to your headline. Now you can select on this option over here, click on Type, and you can basically fit it to the headline. Okay, if you basically have it now, if you have it selected, you can see that you can fit it to headline. Click on it, and it has been fitted to the headline. Okay, so basically this is how it works. And it can also resolve missing fonts. Let's say, just like I said a while ago, that if you don't have the font, okay, you downloaded a template or you downloaded some other person's work. Or maybe that person used a font which you don't have on your PC or you don't have on Adobe Illustrator. So what happens is that when you click on resolve missing funds, it will tell you what fund is missing. And also it's going to suggest you to download that fund so that you can get or use that fund whenever you want or so that it supports it. Okay. Then we have a fine replace fund. Then I'm going to click on Type again. And then we have is fine and replace funds. Well, you can find out specific funds just like we do find and replace on specific characters or words, right? But sometimes when you want to find out specific funds, let's say I want papuus, okay? If I use Papurus on any part of my project or any part of my file, I want to search up for it. And I want to replace that fund with something else such as Myriad Pro. Okay? Then I can do that. Just click on this option over here. Then this option appears up. Now let's go to search for Myriad Pro over here. I'm going to find out that this is also activated. Recent finds over here. I'm going to find out, okay, Click on Find, and that has been found. Okay. Now you can see replace with recent. Instead of that, I'm going to reset system. Click on system. Let's do is maybe search up for something that looks a bit different. Now I want it to look something like this. Italic, century Gothic, italic. Now when you select on it, click on. I'm going to change all. Press on Done. And you can see that the font has been changed by using our font. And our font replace and find option. Now I'm going to do is click on type again and then you can also change the case. First off, you have to select the text first. Let's go to select on it. You can see it over here that I'm going to do is click on Type again. And you can change the case if you want upper case, lower case, title case, or sentence case. Now if I want upper case, I'm going to click on upper case over here. And now you can see all the alphabets inside the word is now upper case. But if I want lower case on each and every one I'm going to do is click on Change Type and click on lower case. And all of them will be lower case, all at the same time. I can do the same thing and change it to title case. And I can use the same thing on let's say sentence case. Okay? Well, basically title case and sentence case are basically quite the same. It just finds out the one which is like at the front to be capital. That's it. Then I'm going to do is click on Type again and then we have a smart punctuation. If there is any problem with punctuation or it can. I did not put any punctuation in my specific sentence or specific article which I wrote or whatever text I have inside my document. And it's going to do is find out the places where I did not put in. And then it's going to place it or replace the punctuation. Or maybe you put in the punctuation where or where it needs to be. Okay. You can see select the text only or the entire document is going to be up to you. So I'm going to press on cancel. I'm going to do keep it just the way it is because it's not going to make any difference because I don't have any specific text. Then we have is Create Outlines. Now you can do is select on the text over here, which is over here. Click on Type and then go off over here and create the outlines. Now this text is not basically a text anymore. It has turned into an outline. You see, it's basically like a shape, okay? It's basically like a shape right now. Okay, So now you know how this works and this is basically how it's going to work. Now click on type again, and then we have this optical margin alignment. I'm going to use press on control Z. I'm going to use press on control shift Z. Rpit doesn't work. I'm going to use undue scale. I'm going to use press on Edit again. I'm going to use Undue Create Outlines. And I'm going to keep it just the way it is. I'm going to click on Type again. And then I will find out optical margin alignments. You'll find out the optical margin alignments of each and every one. So make sure to use it whenever you want to. Then we have insert special characters if you want to apply symbols, hyphens, quotation, you can go through these options and apply them whenever you want, but for that reason you have to select on the text first. You can see over here, click on type, go off to insert special characters, and then apply it whenever you want. There's a couple of things, let me just show two on each and every one of them. Let's say copyright symbol. You can see how it works. I'm going to click on Type again. I'm going to click on Insert Special Characters. Now if I want something like ellipsis, you can see the ellipsis. Now I'm going to show you on a different one. Let's say I'm going to use hyphens and dashes, let's say EM, and you can use whichever one you want. I'm going to show you the last one, the quotation mark. Let's say single left quotation. Even though you can apply directly from your keyboard. But you know, the symbols look a bit different than, let's say, comparatively to the ones which you put on your keyboard. Okay, so this is basically how it works. Then we have this insert wide space characters. You can also do the same thing, let's say ten space. You can apply it if you want to, but if you don't, you can just keep it just the way it is, Okay? Then we have this Insert break characters. You can apply force break lines if you want to. And you can also apply and fill with placeholder text. You can also apply that whenever you want. I'm going to press on control of Z. See how it works. Then you can press on Edits. I'm going to do is press on undo, let's say undo typing control Z. I'm going to keep it just the way it is. Press control Z, and there we have our text. Then you can go off the type and then you can apply it whenever you want. Okay, Then I'm going to do is show the last one which is show hidden characters. If there are any hidden characters, you can see that there's a space over here. The space is basically look like this. That is how it will look like. Now you can go off over here, type orientation. You can also see the orientation is now horizontal and also vertical. Then we have is our legacy text. Basically, we don't have basically any legacy right now. If you do have any legacy text over here, you want it to appear to be on your workspace, then make sure to select on it and all the legacy texts will also appear up just like it is shown on over here, the hidden characters. Okay, now as we're done with this type ribbon, let's go off to the next five tools of Adobe Illustrator and what it has to offer. In our last tool, we used our width tool. Now in this lesson, we're going to start off from the free transform tool. Now when you click on this free transform tool, you'll be able to transform basically anything. You can see. How you'll be able to transform basically anything. This is basically how it works, literally change anything into whatever you want. You can right click on it. You have this puppet warp. So you can also warp it up by selecting on the anchor, you can see over here. And you can put warp it up. Okay, You can see you can take it wherever you want. I can also take this wherever I want and I also can take this wherever I want. See, this is basically how it works. When you select on it, it will still remain the text, but it will just be where you kept them to be. Well, this is very useful when you're trying to make a design or trying to work with your text. You can use this option or use this tool, it will help you a lot. Then we have this tool called our Shape builder tool. You can use shapes or select shapes from over here. Let me show it to you. Okay, I'm going to use, first off, make a couple of shapes. There we go. Now I'm going to do is click on these options and I'm going to make sure that they have no specific, you know, let's say color. I'm going to select on its. Make sure to select on none, but make sure to put on strokes or else it won't be visible. I'm going to click on Black. You can see it over here. To do the same thing over here, click on Black. And make sure that there is no stroke or no color in there. We go to None. Do the same thing over here. Click on Stroke, make sure to put it black. But on this color, I'm going to make sure to use nothing over here. Do the same thing over here. I'm going to do on strokes, I'm going to make it black on color. I'm going to do, make it to be none, okay? I'm going to use a specific part. I'm going to just click on this option over here. I'm going to select on the specific part, whichever one I want to use. First off, you have to select all of them. You can see now as you selected, I'm going to use this tool. I'm only use this part. You can see it is now building up in process. I can also use this part. Building Shapes. I'm going to delete our control Z now as that part has been selected, R press on Alt, that you can use this minus over here. Now you can see the shape has been built. Take this up, and you can see that this has turned into a shape. Okay. You can select on the path and keep them wherever you want as they have been conjoined. Now you can write, click on it and there's also a live paint bucket. You can also use the paint bucket to color it up. Now if let's say black, I'm going to change it into black. If you want to press on X, or let's select on any of the color, then I'm going to do as I've selected on the color. I'm going to select on this bucket tool now. I'll be able to color it up whenever I want, so it's going to be up to me how I choose the color. Okay, Now you can also use the live paint selection tool. You can also use this and also change it however you want. You can see there's no, let's say the color has been removed. The next tool which we have is perspective grid. Well, this is most of the time used in tre D mode. Well, if you're working with any tre D object. Well, I would suggest you to use this because it helps you to find out the grid lines and also give you the perfect perspective of how it should look like, also the shades, and how you should customize it in such a way so that it will look good. Okay, then the next one which we have is going to be click on It and Perspective Selection tool. And you can select on the perspective whichever one you want and then change the perspective of that specific object which you have. This is how it will work as I don't have any three D object in my my workspace, it will not work. Then we have is this mesh tool. If you want to apply in a mesh, you will be able to do that. First of all you have to do is select any object, let's say I have it. And then you'll be able to select on the mesh tool. And then you'll be able to put in the path if you want to or put in whichever mesh you want, then we have is our gradient. So if you want to apply any gradients on any surface or any object, just click on ingredients and apply the gradient however you want. Now first I'm going to remove this part as I don't need it right now. I'm going to just click on this as I don't need it. After I remove it, I'm going to start off by removing it. Or maybe I'm going to do is make sure to put another new file. I'm going to click on New. I'm going to do make up another panel where I can start working on it. Press on Create, and then I'll be good to go. You can see it over here. Now, just like I said, if you want to apply any gradient on any object, let me just show it to you. Let's have to click on this object and I'm going to do make a shape. Now after I'm making a shape, I'm going to do use this, I'm going to do select on this object over here. And you will be able to apply the gradient and also customize it according to your need. Okay, then the last tool which I'm going to show you is going to be this Eye Dropper tool. Well, the eye dropper tool is basically there to find out the color which you want to use. You can see it over here, you can see it over here, and also this one. Now if I use the measure tool, I'll be able to measure up specific object. Let's say I'll be able to draw a line. But that line is not going to be visible when I want the output, so it's not a problem. So make sure to use this tool if you want to. And you also have the navigator if you want, okay? And it will also show you the degrees, the x and y. X is the height and width two at the same time. So hope you learned everything in this lesson on the five basic tools and also about the type ribbon in Adobe Illustrator. And if you have any questions about this lesson. Okay, so feel free to ask me anything or feel free to ask me any question. And I will guide you through the whole process. So thank you for watching this video up til the end. Now in our next lesson, we are going to learn about the Select Ribbon and also the next five tools Adobe Illustrator has to offer. Thank you. 21. Select ribbon with 5 basic tools: Select Ribbon and five Basic tools of Adobe Illustrator. Welcome back to our Adolescent of Adobe Illustrator. Essential. Well, in this lesson, we are going to learn about the select ribbon. In our previous lesson, we learned about our type ribbon and also the five basic tools. In this lesson, we are going to start off with our Select Ribbon. Before getting into that lesson, let's just open up one of the preset, which I use most of the time. But obviously, you know, you can use whichever one you want after I've selected that. After I've selected my preset, it will take a bit of a time for it to load it up on my screen. And there we go. We have it. I'm going to do is cut this off and I'm going to do is keep it wherever I want it to be. Now what I'm going to be doing is obviously clicking on the Select Ribbon. Because this lesson is about the Select Ribbon. I'm going to click on Select. And there we have all about the selection option of objects or photos, or whatever element is in my artboard. Now you can see that most of them are grayed out. But before that, what I'm going to be doing is going to be applying a couple of shapes, a couple of text, or maybe even a photo. So that I can select all of them or do whatever I want with that specific element in my artboard I'm going to do is, first off, click on the shape option. I'm going to do is make a couple of shapes over here. There we go. We have our first shape, second shape, and then we have our third shape. I'm going to do is put on a couple of texts. Text over here I'm going to do is increase the size of this text. There we go. I'm going to put another text over here and another text over here. There we go. Now as we put in our text and also our shape, the last thing I'm going to be doing is going to be applying a photo. How do I do that? Click on File, and then what you're going to do is click on Open. Or you can also place embedded if you want to. What I'm going to do is click on Open. As this interface opens up, what you're going to do is collect the photo or use whichever one you want. Press on open, and that photo will appear up on your screen in a new work space. Now first thing I'm going to do is going to be zooming out so that I can crop up the photo and see it according to my need. Okay, now how do you do that? First off, hold on to Alt on your keyboard, and then you will basically see it like this. Hold on to Alt. Scroll out. Now select the photo, or select this over here. Hold on a shift, so that you get, let's say, a better size or the exact size. Hold on a shift, there we go. Then what I'm gonna do is drag it down right over on the panel, which we are using over here. There we go, We have it. I'm going to just hold on Alt. Let's see where it is. If it doesn't appear up, what you're going to do is do the same thing again. Go over here, I'm going to take it right over here on this untitled one blank space. Now if we have it over there, what you're going to do is click it over here. I'm going to take it around in this space. Now let's out and see if it is over here. If it is still not there, what you're going to do is do another thing is we're going to place the photo right over here. I'm going to take that control C, I'm going to paste it right around over here, control V. It will take a bit of a time and there we have it. I'm going to do is also zoom this out. I'm going to do is hold on a shift. There we go. We have the photo two. Now as we have all the elements we need, now I'm going to do is obviously use the selection ribbon. Okay. Now how do I use the selection ribbon? First off I'm going to do is click on Select and you have this all well control. And a is for Select All if you've used previous software such as Adobe Photoshop, Adobe Lightroom, Adobe Premier Pro, or even Microsoft Word, or maybe Microsoft, let's say Powerpoint or Excel, or even use your PC. You can see that when you press control A, it selects all of the elements, right? It works the same way in Adobe Illustrator. If I press on control A, all of the elements which I have in my artboard will be selected. And you can drag them all together at once when all of them are selected. But if you select on one of them, you will be able to move one of them at a time. And you can also select it like this. You can also select it like Control and A. And you can see this works. It works the same way. When I press on Select and press on, all you can see how this works. Now I'm going to do is going to be applying a couple of art boards. There we go. Now as I have a couple of art boards, you can see B1234. Okay, now I'm going to do is select the active art boards. I'm going to click on Select All on Active Art Boards. You can see all on active art boards, you can see none of them are selected, all on active art. I'm going to select this, click all on Active Artboard, and you can see that only this part has been selected, even if I have any other elements over here. Let's try this over here. I'm going to press on the Alt, drag it right over there. I'm going to do select on this element again, and click on Select. All on Art Board. Now you can see that this one is the active art board right now, because I'm working on this one, not on the other ones. If you select any specific elements on a specific art board which is active, you'll be able to select only on that artboard. Okay? All of the elements in that active art board will be selected all at the same time. It's going to be up to you how you're going to work with it. Now click on Select again, and then we have is de select. If you've selected all of them at once, let's say use press control A. And if you want to select them, you can see when I press control A, all of the elements in all artboard had been selected at the same time. So the text which is over here on this artboard has been selected at the same time. But we don't want that. Okay. Obviously when you want to use it on active ones, just press select On all active or let's say on active artboards. Okay. Then we have is de select. You can also deselect by pressing on shift control in a and that part will be deselected. Now sometimes what happens is that if you have a lot of elements and if you've selected something which you don't want to select, you can use this option or this command of select. Okay, so that it will be de selected. Now when you go off to the selection, now we have reselect. So if you select on this and press on Select, and you can reselect that specific object, some you select all of them. Click on Select and you can reselect it if you have already selected it previously. And you can also reselect it. Okay. It's a, it's, you know, it's similar to Select or D select or Re select. It's kind of like that. If you want to do it, you will just redo the process. That's the thing. Okay, now I'm going to do is go off to select and we have inverse. Now let's go to Do Select on this. But instead of that, I want this part to be selected. So I'm going to click on Select and inverse it. All the parts except for this one will be selected. But if I select, maybe, let's say two of these, but I don't want two of these to be selected. I want other parts except these two. I'm going to click on Select again and press on Inverse. You can see, except those two, all the elements that are in my artboard has been selected at the same time. You can also try using the shortcut key. Okay? But there is no shortcut key assigned to inverse, except for that all of them has shortcut assigned to each and every one. They can reselect it if you want to. You can see now how this Re Select option or the reselect tool, our command works in Adobe Illustrator. Now let's go off to select again. And then we have next object above. Now if you have any object above, or maybe the next one, you can see selected like this as this one has been selected. Now if I click on Select and press on next object below, you can see this has been selected. Now why is it below? This is not actually below, right? This is at the top. These two are at the bottom. But let me just show it to you. If I drag it over here, you can see this part is above this one and this part is below. If I click on this element and take it over there, this is the bottom one. First off, let me select the bottom one. And when I like select above, it will be selected, then this will be selected. Okay, let's just try it out. Click on Select Next object above. You can see this one has been selected. Now if I click it on again object above, you can see this one has been selected. It works the same way when I select on this next object below. Okay, what the shortcut key is. All control and second bracket open and close. Let's try it from our keyboard. Shift control and control like second bracket open and second bracket close. Let's try it. I'm going to select on its. You can also select it like this. You can just click on Select. And next object below, you can see this is the one F I click on it. Click select again. Next object below is this one. Click on select again. Next object below is going to be this one, okay? So now you know how this works, okay? Now what I'm going to learn is going to be a bit different. We have same. Now if you have any object which are kind of the same of the appearance or the blending mode, you can do that. Let's say what are the like selected ones which are going to be the same? And I'm going to do is click on all of them. Click on Select, and you're going to go off over here. Click on Appearance. And they are the same, right? So these are the ones that are same. So I'm going to select one of the objects. Click on Select, click on same. Appearance. You can see these are the ones that are the same. Now if I click on Text, I'm going to click on Select. Now let's se select the ones which are the same. Let Sem go off the same and click on the Appearance. So these are the ones that are the same. Not this object, but these ones are the same. Okay? If I click on this and if I search for the same, it will not show me any. But let's just try like making a copy of this over here. You can see that there are two of these. I'm going to select one over here, and click on Select. I'm going to go off the same. You can see these two are the same. Okay, Now you know how this Select option works. Now you can also find out ones with the same blending mode, appearance attributes. Maybe the fill and stroke. Fill color, opacity, stroke color, stroke weight, and then font family. It's going to be up to you now. Let's try something. I'm going to select on this, I'm going to change this font into maybe, let's say this one. I'm going to do the same thing over here. Click on this one. I'm going to change it to Band Script. Okay, I'm going to select on this element, I'm going to do. Go off to select, go off the same. And I want the same font family. You can see these two are the same font family. It just helps you to find out the ones which are the same. Now you can fill up the criteria by selecting on the one type of criteria you want to search for. Let's say you want to search for the same font family, you want to search for the same color. Now if I change the color on these ones and also change it, cholestament, change it to green. This one. Do the same thing over here. Green. This one. Now if I go to select, I'm going to go off the same and I want the same fill color. You can see these two are the same fill color. While we do the same thing over here, go off to select and go off the same. And I want the same fill color, These are the same. Now you know how this works. I click on Select again, click on Same, and go off to Stroke Color. You can see these are all the same because all of the strokes are the same, even though if the fonts are different. So now you know how the select option works, or the same option works in LGB Illustrator. So you can fiddle through it for a while and you see how all of them works. And also you can like check, okay, then we have is this object. Now all on the same layer, you can put all of the elements on the same layer. Now which elements are on the same layer? You can click on the same layer and you can see all of these are on the same layer. Well, layer basically works a bit different from, you know, how these objects are in a specific panel. So there is going to be a separate lesson where we're going to learn about layers. Because layer is one of the most important features and also a very important thing you have to do when you are designing anything or working on Adobe Illustrator. Okay, then I'm going to do is click on Select again. And then we're going to do is go off the object. Now you can see direction, handles. We can see there's bristle brush strokes, brush strokes, clipping masks, straight points, all text objects. It will just basically find out. It's like basically saying, you can see over here, the same features which you can find are the same elements in objects. It's going to find out the same objects on the same layer. Maybe direction handles brush strokes. Then we have brush strokes and clipping mask. Whichever elements there are on the same object. Which objects are the same is going to find out for you. Let's say all text objects. You can see these are all text objects which are the same. You know how this object or let's say this section works too. And you can also use Start Global Editing. It basically helps you work on it simultaneously, but we're going to skip this part. Then we have a safe selection. Now in safe selection, what happens is that you can save up any specific part of your elements or any part of your work. Let's say I want to save only these two parts of this project or this artboard, and I don't want anything to be saved rather than this. So what you're going to do is click on Select and then you have the Safe Selection option. Then these parts will be selected and press on Okay. And then you are good to go. Even if we cut this part out, let's press on Cross. I'm like click on No. And still this part will be saved. Let's go off the file. Click on Open Recent Files. Let's to do is select the file which I have. I'm going to go off the home first. Let's see how this works. And you can see that the selection part will be saved. Okay, You can see it over here. We have our photo. Now, if I go off, the shared documents are the part where I put in my element that is saved. I have to go off the recent and then I have to like open it up from over here and you can see that it is opening up. But this is giving me this one. So I'm going to do is use any of the saved ones if I go off on open Recent files. Now if I click on this or maybe this one, it will show me the one which I had before. You can see as soon as I opened it up, this part which was saved has been opened. This is basically how it works on Adobe Illustrator. Now as we are done with the saved selections, and you can also edit the selection, you have it over here. Now what we can do also is like customized edited or the selected or the saved ones. You can mask it up if you want to, but we're going to go through that later on. So we're basically done with the selection panel or the selection ribbon in Adobe Illustrator. Now we're going to go off to the next five tools, which we have an Adobe shredder. And as we are done with almost all of them, so we're going to go through the next five ones which we didn't cover up in our previous lesson. The tools which you're going to learn about is going to be our blend tool. Then we have is our symbol spare tool, column graph tool. Then we have a artboard tool, and then we're going to learn about the slice or two. Let's start off with our blender tool. Now, how do you blend? Specific object, I'm going to show it to you. Okay. Now instead of this, I'm going to remove these elements. You can see it over here. I'm going to do apply in different shapes. So make a square like this. I'm going to change it to yellow. I'm going to change it to another shape, Sea. Start off with an ellipse tool, Sm, make a circle over here. Now what if I say, I want to blend these two together? I'm going to click on this blending tool. I'm going to do take it right over here. You can see it over here. You can see how this works. This is how it will look like. Now if you're going to write, click on it and you'll be able to customize it according to your need. You can basically see that this is how it is looking like, but this is the path of this blend. But I'm going to just click on this over here. I'm going to take it over here and make another one. Now let's see how this basically looks like. Sometimes it crashes a bit, so you don't have to worry about it. So if it doesn't work, you can try off with other shapes as I'm going to do is make another shape over here. I'm going to do is make another shape over here. Okay? And then we're going to do is try blending these two at the same time. You can see it over here. Or maybe somewhere from over here to here. And you can see that there is this section where it is a bit blended, right? Even though you will not be able to select the part which is in the middle, all, both of them will be selected at the same time. Okay, this is basically how blending works in Adobe Illustrator. Well, you can do a lot more than these. Well, this is just the basic. So we're going to do is keep it till here. Now the next one we have is the spray, our symbol Sp two. Now if you want to use any symbol as a spray, you can put it up over here. Now you have to first off select a symbol panel. Okay, I'm going to first off select a symbol from over here. Or maybe I'm going to just right click on it. Then you have to select on the symbol, whichever symbol you want to use. Now I'm going to do is if you don't have your symbol panel over here, what you can do is you have to make sure that your symbol panel is on your workspace. I'm going to do, first off, remove this part because we're not going to be needing that right now. First thing you're going to do is go off the windows and you will find out symbols. Over here, you can see symbols. You can basically see that there are a couple of symbols that are selected. Now, you can use those specific symbols whenever you want. Now's you can see that these are the symbols which you can use as a spray. You can also use this if you want to. You can see a couple of them has appeared over there. If you keep it holding, you can see that it just multiplies. It will basically fill up the whole circle, but it will also go out the circle. If you hold it too long, you can see a couple of them has been sprayed over here. But as I don't want it, I'm going to remove them because I don't like it. It just looks very messy. This is basically how you use the spray symbol to then we have a shifter tool, you can also use the shifter. First off, you have to s you can see it over here. I'm first off, I'm going to do is use this symbol sprayer tool and select any element. And I'm going to do, first off, make sure that I have a couple of symbols over here and then I'm going to do is change it to symbol shifter. You can see it over here. You can change it or shift it wherever you want. Okay, then the next tool which we're going to learn about is going to be the symbol scrunch. You can also scrunch them up if you want to. I'm going to do is zoom in. Let me just scrunch it up. You can scrunch them if you want to select on any one of these elements. I'm scrunch it up and it will be scrunched up. Okay. Basically it's not working because it's a single element and very small. You just have to either have a bigger or custom made symbol so that you can scrunch it up if you want to. Then we have a symbol sizer. You can also size them up if you want to. Increase them, if you want to. Now, the next one we have is the symbol spinner. You can also spin them if you want to. Ma, take it over in this angle and it will be rotated. It also works as a rotationary e mail tool. Then we have this stainer. You can also put in stains if you want to. You can see the stains over here. You can change the color. Okay, Then the next one we have is the symbol screener. You can also screen them up if you want to. It just basically works like it's getting blended to the screen. And the next one we have is the symbol styler. You can also style them up if you want to select on any elements. And you can see that it has been styled. And you can also see that there is a couple of, you know, background on it. This is basically how it works. It basically just turns into a type of a pattern so that it kind of looks good. Okay. Then if you screen all of them up, it will look the same. Sima. Click on Symbol Screener, you can see it over here. It will turn into screens. We're going to do the same thing over here. And basically all looks kind of the same, Okay? So this is basically how you use this tool in Adobe Illustrator. The next tool, what you're going to learn about is going to be column and graphs. This is very simple. If you want to make a column and graph, you can see it over here and you can apply in your data from this panel I'm going to do is put one, let's put in three. The next one I'm going to put in 25. I'm going to do the same thing over here. Three, tab 2722, shift tab, there is the one. Tab four. There we go. Press on. Okay. There we go. We have our graph. You can change it up. If you've seen my previous lesson, you already know how you will be able to change the graph or make custom graphs. This is basically how this works. Then we have is our artboard. If you want to apply any artboard on your screen, you go, you have it. This is very simple. If you've already seen this lesson, you already know how you'll be able to make artboards. And the last one we have is the slicer tool. If you want to put slices in between specific elements or make a separate section for your work or your panel, you can make it through here. You'll be able to make slices or separate section for your elements in your own artboard. Okay. Now you can see that there are two section, this is eight photos and this is three photos. This is basically how it works. We have is the sliced selection tool. You can also select the slices one and remove them whenever you want. And you can even drag it and also make copies of them. And you can also take them to another panel over here. This is very simple. Hope you learned everything in this lesson about all the tools and also about the Select Ribbon and Adobe Illustrator and what functionality it has to offer. And our next lesson, we're going to learn about this effect ribbon because there are a lot of it. We might also make this lesson into two parts because these are going to take a lot of time. And then we're going to learn about the last tools and also the color palette about OB illustrator. Without any further ado, let's just hop onto the lesson of illustrator essential. 22. Effect ribbon with rest of the basic tools: Effect Ribbon and Basic Tools. In our previous lesson, we learned about our Select Ribbon and also the five basic tools. In this lesson, we are going to be learning about Effect Ribbon and what functionality does it have to offer an Adobe Illustrator. Now just like I said that we don't have any, like, let's say, not five more tools available in Adobe Illustrator. So what we're going to do is also cover up the rest of the tools which we have on our basic tool panel. So the first thing I'm going to do is going to be opening up this preset. And after I open up the preset, I'm going to be doing is applying in maybe a photo. Or we can also use, let's say, an image. Or maybe, let's say a shape. First thing I'm going to do is click on File. I'm going to click on Open. And then I'm going to do is use the photo which I used in my previous lesson. Now after I opened it up, I'm going to do is obviously zoom out. I'm going to do is make sure that it is fit perfect to my shape of the, you know, let's see the artboard. And take it over here. Take it right over here. And I'm going to do is zoom in. Make sure to hold on the Alt so that you can zoom in. Zoom out a bit. And there we go. We have it right over here. Now as I have my photo right over here. Now obviously you want to use effects on your photo because this is Adobe Illustrator, Even though if it's not a photo, you can also apply in shapes. I'm going to do is make a rectangle and keep it right below this specific image. I'm going to do is change the color into, let's say I'm going to first of select this object over here. I'm going to do is change the color of this object. If it doesn't work, what you can do is first off, make sure that you have this box over here. Then first I'm going to do is select on this. Then I'm going to do is change the color into, let's say whatever you want. Let's say I'm going to use this black, I'm going to keep it black. Then after I have it, then I'm going to do is going to be putting an effect on each and every one. Let's go to, start off with this photo. I'm going to go off to effect and you have this applied last effect and last effect. It allows you to apply the previously applied effect on a specific photo. Let's start off with three D En materials. If you want to work with any three D or any material effect, click on three DN material. You'll find out extrude and bevel, revolve, inflate, rotate material, and three D classic. Now you can make it into our use those of X T. Let's use extrude and bevel. Now after I use it you might see that sometimes it does not take any effect. But it will open up this interface for you. Now you can use fix the depth and I can use this revolve if I, if I want to use inflate I can. But as this is just a photo, it's not going to work. We have to apply this on a different element. I'm going to just click on that element and I'm going to put on Extrude. Now you can see that this is how it will look like when you are applying it on a shape. Now if I use revolve, it will change its shape and also the POV, and then it will look a lot more different, but you will be able to revolve it according to your need. So I'm going to press on Revolve, and you can see this is how it works. Then you can revolve it according to your need. You can see this is where it is now. When you hold onto the path over here. You can click on this, the path, and you'll be able to rotate it according to your desire. Now, I'm going to keep it somewhere around zero so that I can use it whenever I want. Now, the revolving angle. Which angle do you want? You'll be able to fix that. Now you can see only 75% of it. Now, I can also use inflate if I want to. Now you will see that it will change how it looks like. Then I'm going to change the path of how this works. I'm going to select on this rotation, I'm going to rotate it. And this is basically how it works. When you use inflate, you can also make it plain if you want to, but it will also look three deep. Okay? Then you can also apply caps, bevels, then custom rotation. You can fix it from over here. You can fix it from over here. It's going to be up to you how you're going to work with it. Then we have is the materials. Now, if you want to apply material, you can also do that, make it how it looks like. This is the base material. It is how it's going to look like. But you can also apply different type of shades, different type of, let's say, surface. And you know how it will look like, either it's rough or smooth. It's going to be depending up to you how you're going to work with it. That can also apply in a bit of roughness on your specific elements. Seven to fix it or make it smooth. You can see that this is very smooth now. You can also make it metallic if you want to. You can see that this is how it will work, that can go down and this is basically it. The last one we have is this lightning or lighting. Okay? You can fix out the lighting. Now, if you want to use diffuse, you can also use that. Now if I want to use top left, I can also fix that. I can also use right. It's going to be up to me. I'm going to work with it. You can fix that intensity, the rotation, then also the height and also the softness all at the same time. So this is basically how this three D material works in Microsoft or let's say Adobe Illustrator. Let's go off the effect again and then we are almost done with all of them. But the last thing we have is three D Classic, where we have is extrude, bevel, revolve, and rotate. Well, these are the total classic ones. You can fix it from over here. This is basically how it works. You can also fix it from over here, like this dragging this cue. You can also fix it from over here by fixing how it looks like. And you can also fix the rotation vertical. Okay? It's going to be up to you. Then you can press on council if you want to discard how it looks like. Okay. So we are basically done with the treaty materials. Now you can see that you'll be able to apply the previous effects that I applied. This is the last effect, and you can also apply the last effect. Okay. Then we have is convert to shape. You can convert a specific element into a shape. Let's say this one. I'm going to just click on Effect. I'm going to just click it to, let's say I want it to be a rectangle. I'm going to press on, okay. And you'll basically see that this has just turned into a rectangle. This is not an image anymore, this is a shape, okay? Then we can go off effect again and then convert the shape and you can turn it into lyp two. Let's do the same thing over here. I'm going to click on this object. Click on Effect. I'm going to convert a shape. Now I want it to be rounded rectangle. Now you can see I have rounded corners on each and every one. Like part of it you can fix out. Or if you want absolute or relative, it's going to be up to you. Now, I'm going to use relative and press on. Okay? Now if you want a rectangle one, I can also fix it according to my need. Now let's use rotate it and see how it looks like. This is basically how it works. You can see the anchor is not at a specific point of the shape. That is why it is looking like this. That it is jumping right, But the middle part is over here, okay? And this part is a bit bigger, or this part is a bit bigger than the other part. That is why it's looking like it is moving. Now let's go off the effect again. And then we have ellipse. If you want to turn it into ellipse, you can also turn it into ellipse, Apply any effect. And there we go, it is now ellipse. This is basically how it works in Adobe or let's say Adobe Illustrator. Okay, You can see that there is a bit of circular tension over here on the top or on the corner. You can see how it looks like. Then I'm going to do is go off effect again. And then over here I'm going to do is go off the crop marks. Now you can find out the crop marks, or you can mark it up whenever you want. You can see that these are the marks that I need. You can see these are the marks that are going to appear up. Okay. These are the crop marks and these are the parts which is going to be outside of the exact shape. Now, if I do is increase the size, it will increase. But obviously these will also increase and also the shape, it's going to be up to you. I'm going to work with it. Now let's go off the effect again. And then we have the tort and transform. From distort and transform, you can apply and distortion. Let's go off the free distort. Now we can change, like apply the distortion according to my need. I'm going to press on, okay, and the distortion will be applied. That is the free distort. You can see it over here. Those are already applied. But what we're going to do is go off to effect again. I'm going to use distort and transform. Then I'm going to use pucker and bloat. I'm going to make it bloat a bit. What's I'm going to use increase the size. You can see now this is bloating and this is puckering up. So it's going to be up to you how you're going to use this bloat R pucker. Make sure to use it according to your need and according to the desire you can get a preview to how it looks like. This is basically how it looks. What I'm going to do is put in council because I don't need that effect that I'm going to do is go off effect again. And then we have is roughen. If you want to roughen up your element, you can see how it looks like. You can fix the size. You can fix it if you want relative or absolute. And you can also apply the details if you want to. It's going to be up to you. You can just go through and apply in a couple of effects and also fiddle through it so that how it looks like you will get the exact idea. Now I'm going to go off the effect again. And then we have is this transform, you can transform that element into something different. You can scale it, you can move it, you can rotate it. And we have other options which you will be able to select. And you can also select the POV where you want it from. Let's say this is the middle and I want it on the corner. I can also select that. I want it at the top. Okay. A top middle. Or if you want it from the bottom right corner, it's going to be up to you when you press on. Okay, You'll basically see that there is no change. But when you are using a specific part to represent it on or embedded on, you'll basically see only the left bottom corner or whichever party selected will be filled or be used with that. Okay, I'm going to do change the color. Just click on this. I'm going to do is change it to maybe a different one if I can. But if it doesn't work, I'm going to do Active Color is black. Let's try using a bit of gradient. Let's see how it works. If the gradient works, it will be looking a lot more better. You can see rendering three DN materials effect. Now after it is done rendering it will apply in the effect. If it doesn't work, we're going to start off, or let's say we're going to still use this solid color, because solid color is also quite good. Now let's click on Fill with X over here, and then let's try a different color from over here. Let's select on this red, press on Ok. Let's see if the red is being applied. You can see that red has been applied a bit. Now let's change the other color, which we have over here. I'm going to select on this color over here. I'm going to do is make it dark red or dark brownish. We're going to press on. Okay, and wait for it to render a bit after it has been rendered. Let's check how it looks like. If it does look good then it's good. Okay, we're done basically on this. Now let's do is go off over here and you have the strokes over here. You can select the strokes to change the color whenever you want. And you can see that this is how it will look like and this is how it looks. Okay, after we got our result. Now let's go off the effect again. And then we go to go off over here. You'll be able to tweak it up to. It's going to be up to you now. Let's tweak it a bit. You will see that interface will appear on your screen and you can see that the progress or it is being in progress. And after the rendering is done, I will show all, or let's say I'm going to use fiddle with it a bit and let's see how it works. Let's say I'm going to use, do you want to continue and press on? Okay. Now from my screen you can see that I have applied in the tweak and you can also see how it works. Well, this basically just turned my shape into a rectangle. Okay. Now you can like renderize it if you want to. Now we're going to go off to effect again. And then we're going to do is go off to distort. And the last one we have, or the last two we have is twist and tweak. Now you can fix up whichever angle you want to twist to. Two person, okay? And that will be applied to that specific element or object which you have. Now I'm going to do is click on Fill. I'm going to do is find out the color and use whichever one you want, okay? Now you can see that there is a bit of tilt on each and every one of them. We're going to press on cancel, press on V, and you can see that there is this tilt over here right now. You can go off to effect again and then go off to path or distort again. And the last one is zig zag. So make sure to select the object first. You want this over here. We're going to select on that element. Go off effect, go off the distort and transform and find out zig zag. And you can see this is how the zig zag works to press on cancel. But if you want to apply it, you can apply it whenever you want. So it's going to be up to you according to your desire. Now let's go off the next one which is path. Now the path is going to be how the path do you want to be? If you want offset path, outline object or outline stroke. First off, click on the element. Click on Effect. Click on, let's say, Path. And if you want offset path, click on Offset. And now you want to fix it up. Okay, let's, Sam is pick on ten. And you can see that there is the outside offset after, or let's say outside of this actual line which we have over here. I'm going to press on cancel. But if you want to apply it, you can do it if you want to. Then we have this outline object. We can also outline the actual object of the outline. Now you can see that it is basically at the outer part of the shape instead of being inside. Then the next one or the last one we have is going to be the outline stroke. You can apply an outline stroke if you want to. First p, wait for the interface to open up. If it doesn't open up, what you're going to do is go off over on Effect again. Go off to Path and click on Outline Strokes. And you're going to do apply a new effect and you're going to wait for a while until that appears up and you'll basically see the outline stroke will appear up on your actual elements. You can see it over here. This is how it is. Now if I click on over here, you can see that this is basically not the one we need it now. You can also carve it up if you want to. You can fix it up according to your need, even though you can see the effect is still there. Now let's go off to effect again. And then go off to find Out Path finder. Now you can find out the path whenever you want. And how do you want it if you want to add it up, If you want to intersect, if you want to exclude subtract minus back, it's going to be up to you. Let's show you a couple of them. We're not going to be showing you all of them. So let's start off with the ad. Now, if you want to add it up, you have to first off apply in another layer, press on, okay? And then you're going to wait for a bit until that has been applied. You want to start working with it. Okay. You can see that there is a bit of curve over here. Okay? At the same time. Now let's go off to effect again, and then we're going to find out Pathfinder. You're going to find out divide. Now if you want to divide it, I'm going to do to edit the current layer. Double click on the name of the effect and the appearance panel. Now from the appearance panel, this will apply. Another instance of this effect. Apply New effect and press on. Okay. Okay. Then we're going to do is you have to find out two different layers of object. You're going to do Selected over here. Click on, let's say I'm going to select on Effect. Go off the Path Finder, find Add Trim. Do you select on Apply effect appearance panel? Press on. Okay. Let's say you're going to do is fast. You have to select both of them. Click on effect. I'm going to do go Pathfinder minus Back. Press on. Okay. And if you have two layers of object overlaying each other, you'll basically see the difference like both of them, the K. Now what I'm going to be doing is clicking on this element again. And then as we're done with our pathfinder, as you have to use layers. If you want to use pathfinder, then what we're going to do is go off the effect again. And then we're going to do is rasterize the effect so that it turns into a photo. Now as two of them are selected at the same time, both will be rasterized at the same time. You can fix out the PPI, which is going to be our resolution. Then fix out your background if it is transparent or white. If you want something like PNG and you don't want any background, make sure it's transparent. But if you want a background and you can remove it later on, then you can do is select on White and then remove it. Okay, so after you're done, you can also create a clipping mask if you want to and press on. Okay, and that element will turn into a photo. Okay? You can see it over here. And you won't be able to select it. Okay, like this. But even though these are into a photo right now, because these are both rasturized and can be presented anywhere. But I'm going to just press on controls. I'm going to just keep them unrasturized because I don't want them now. When I unrestorized them. You can see the effect that those do not have rough surfaces anymore and those are very smooth. Now's good effect again. And then we have is this stylize, you can drop shadow, feather, inner glow, outer glow, round corners, and scribble. Let me just show it to you. When you want to drop shadow, you can fix on anything and press on. Okay? And you'll basically see that there will be a shadow underneath them. Okay? You can see it over here. Now if I go off effect and go off to stylize drop shadow. Now I also want a preview. You can see it over here, there's a shadow. So this is how you will be able to apply in a shadow. The next one is going to be, let's say the feather. If you want to apply in a bit of feather, you can see the outside is a bit smoothened up. You can apply it to if you want to. Whenever you want you can just go off to stylize and apply it. Then we have is a bit of inner glow, you can fix out the color. Let's say we also have a preview. You can see on the outside we have this M is. Make sure that instead I'm keep it on center tener glow and you can also put an effect on edge glow. And you can also fix the blur if you want to. You can also keep the blur if you want to. You can see how it looks like. And person, Okay, if you want that. Now the next one is going to be outer glow. Now when you press on outer glow, now I'm going to do is fix out the blur. Or fix out the opacity. That's going to be up to you and it can also change the color into something different. Let's maybe somewhere around this. Press on, okay, and then you're good to go. We have a greenish type of outer glow, go off effect again. And then we have a round corners if you want to apply round corners on each end, everyone I'm going to keep it like this or maybe like this. It's going to be up to you. But you can also do the same process in a different way. You have these corners over here. If you've seen my previous videos, you already know hold onto any one of them and you can just drag it in the center or at the outer side so that it looks round. But if you apply rounded corners from go into effect, you will not be able to make it any more pointy. Okay, let's go off effect again and then we're going to do is fine at SVG filter, you can also apply an SVG filter, which is smart vector graphic. You can also do that. The advantage of using SVG filters is that when you apply, when you use this SVG, your resolution or any of the item will not lose any resolution. It will not break or get distorted. Even if you increase it out of its resolution or even decrease it, it's going to be up to you if you want to apply it. Or you can also import your SVG filters whenever you want. And then you can also find out the Warp. If you've seen my previous lessons, you already know how we used Warp and our object ribbon. You can see it over here, Object, and we warped up our shape from over here. You can see it over here, Text Warp and all of them. Well, this works basically the same. When you go out effect and you go off to Warp, you have this arc, lower arc, upper arc, and all of them even fishy. Now let's use this arch over here and person. Okay, and you can see the arch has been applied as an effect. All right, so this is basically very simple. Now let's go off effect again, and let's go off effect gallery. Now if you want to go off the effect gallery, you will basically find out all of the effects, which you can find out over here. And you can see effect gallery 100% You can go through each and every one. You can see it like this, like this neon glow, maybe this film grain paint, plastic bar. Let's just use the photo. I'm going to just click on this photo. I'm going to go off effect and find out Effect gallery. Well, all of the effect which we see on the downside of, let's say the whole thing is going to be appearing over here. Let's, I'm going to use, first off, zoom out a bit, zoom in a bit more. There we go. We have perfect. Let's go through a couple of them. You can see musticks, water color under painting, and all of them. You can see that this is being rendered until it loads up, the effect will not be applied, so I'm going to zoom out a bit and you can see this is how it looks like on water color. We also have a rough pastel. You can see this is how it looks like. You also have paints and also plastic wrap. Then the next one we have is the brushstrokes. Let's see, going to remove this brush strokes and I'm going to find out, use whichever one you want. Let's say I want to use this spray strokes. You can also apply that and see how this works. Then let's go off the distort. If you want to apply any distortion to your photo, you can also apply it and check out it kind of looks like this is glass. So this is how it will look like. Oltan ripple. Then we also have sketch, all of the sketch patterns which and how it looks like. Then also we have stylize, which we have is glowing edge only. And the last one we have is texture. You can also apply in texture grain mosaic tiles, texturizer stained glass patchwork and all of them. Okay, so it's going to be up to you and you can also fix out the cell size like this. You can see the cells are now increasing. You can fix out the border thickness. You can fix out the light intensity. It's going to be up to you how going to work with it. And you can also see the stained glass is being used. Okay. Then you can also import a couple of filters from online or Adobe stocks and you can use them whenever you want. We are basically done with this effect option. Our effect, let's say ribbon. And the last one we have is going to be our video. You can also see Interlace and NTSC color. Well, these are a bit advanced, but these are basically effects when you're using any video or any GIF or animation in Adobe Illustrator. So we're going to do skip these parts and we're going to go off to the last. Tools are the basic tools of Adobe Illustrator. We ended up on the slice tool and also about the next, which is going to be our Slice selection tool. Now the next tool which we have is going to be our hand tool. Well, you can go off and navigate through Adobe Illustrator by using this tool. You just have to hold onto your mouse and click on your mouse or your left mouse key. And then you'll be able to drag it left and right, top and bottom. Now on your right hand we have is rotate view. You'll be able to rotate it if you want to, but one thing is that, you know, your view is just basically being rotated. But when you print it out, obviously are going to get the output, it will obviously be on zero or let's say it's just going to be the same, the straightway. Then the next one we have is going to be our printing tile too. You can fix out whichever tile you want to use. Let's say that you select this part, you can see this part, okay? This part is going to be my printing tile and only this part will be printed out as this tile. Let's say I'm going to use is let's say here. I only want this part to be printed on, up till here is going to be printed out. This is basically how it works on this printing tile tool. Now the next one we have is the zoom in and out. You can see when you see that there's a plus, obviously it will zoom in. And when you press on Control our Alt, you will basically see that it will turn into the minus. And when you click on it, you will zoom out. It can also zoom in and out by different methods, obviously, which I use most of the time, is that I hold onto Alt and then I use the scroll key to zoom in and out. Okay, basically the Alt key, you have to keep that thing in mind. Then we have is this color palette option. Now this is the basic color palette, which is going to be our primary and this is going to be our secondary. I'm going to use, first off click on secondary. I'm going to go off the color guide. I'm going to select on any of the color which is going to be our secondary color. Okay? Now in our secondary color, what you can do is, first off, I'm going to click on this brush tool. And obviously you will see that it will be black. Okay, I'm going to do is click on this and you'll see that this is not working right now. But what I do is click on this brush I'm going to do make another file. Click on New, make another one. So that I can use my brush whenever I want. Press on Create. As I've created I'm going to do is use this over here. Now you can see that there's a black color, right? But if I or apply in a different color over here, let's do swatch, it up. Let's click on it. I'm going to do change it to redress. And you can see this is going to be press on X or select on this so that you can swap in color. Or you can click on this shift X so that you can swap in color. And you'll basically find out that it will turn different. If it doesn't, what you're going to do is select it from over here, and then you'll be able to change it from over here. Even though if it's still working on black, what you can do is go off the brush over here. You can also fix the brush, whichever type of brush you want to use. And there are also a couple of different types of brushes, which you will basically find out from over here. You can also select the color whichever one you want and I'm going to do is find out different wallets. I'm going to go off over here, you can see it use yellow, but still this is black because this is going to be our brush tool. Now what you can do is go off to pencil, our pencil and then also change it, how it works. Okay, now you can also right click on it. I'm going to click on this pen tool, which I have, let's say pencil tool, I'm going to select on yellow. You can see how it works. Okay? You'll be able to apply in the color whenever you want. Now, you can also change how it looks like. Let's say I want red and this will turn into red. Now you can also select a different color pellet at the same time. If you want it back to devolve like black and white, which is it most of the time, then it will turn back into black and white back again. Okay. So it's going to be up to you whichever one you're going to use. Then we have a color gradients and then we have no fill. Basically when you're using color, it will give you a solid fill. But if you're using gradient, it will give you a gradient fill. Okay? So you can use gradients whenever you want. We set to do is make a shape. Make a shape over here and then you can see the gradients. Now if I press on black and white, it will turn into black and white. Let's use black. I'm going to watch it up. Press on, okay. And I'm going to watch it up like this. And there we go. You can see the color has changed. Okay, Then we have is this draw normal, which you'll be able to switch modes, Draw behind and also draw inside. Now let's, I'm going to do is click on Shape. Now I'm going to do is first off, which is going to be draw normal, right? It is normal. Now what if I say I want to draw behind? Now if I draw this, it will be behind that specific box. Now if I use this draw inside, I will be able to draw it inside there. And I'm going to do is you'll not be able to select one underneath because that has been drawn underneath. So you'll be able to select like where you want to apply it. Like if you don't want to arrange the panels, which one you want above, which one you want behind. Like taking it below and taking it forward or front. So you can just directly apply that by clicking on these options and you'll be able to do that. Then the last one we have is changed screen modes. You can keep it on presentation. Normal screen, normal screen with menu bar and also full screen mode is up to you if you keep it full screen, if you want to get back to how it was pressed on escape. And then you'll basically see all the tools will be appearing up again and then on like three dot, you will be able to edit in your toolbar, whatever tool you have over here. Well, you can see that as I'm using essential. Okay, let's say, let's say I'm going to go off the windows again and go off the workspace as I'm using essential classic. Most of the tools are over here. Let's say all the tools are over here, okay? Except for the commands and a couple of them. So now you know about all the basic tools about Adovial Schrader and as we are also done with our effect ribbon. In our next lesson we're going to learn about the view ribbon and also our window ribbon at the end. So let's move on to our next lesson. 23. View options: View ribbon. Welcome to another video of Adobe Illustrator Essential. In this lesson, we are going to be learning about all the tools or all the commands we have in the View ribbon. In our previous lesson, we completed all the basic tools which we have in our panel of Adobe Illustrator. And also we are done with our effect ribbon. Now we only have window and also view without any further ado. Let's open up a preset and start off with our lesson. As you can see that I have opened up my preset in Adobe Illustrator. Now we're going to start off with our view ribbon. Now what is about this view ribbon? So it's going to help you to find out, or let's say it's going to help you to make your workspace like make how you want to make it look okay. And it's all about the viewing point, all about the POV, Okay, So first off, you can see on the first tool which is on our view ribbon is called outlines. The shortcut key for outline is control and Y. Now you can make anything into an outline. So first I'm going to make a shape, Now I'll be making a shape. Now I can also put in a text, put in a text this time. Now I want it to turn into an outline. Press on control Y, and you'll basically see all the Outline control and Y again, you can see how it basically looks. Okay. Now you can also click on any object and click on View and press on Outline. And you can see the outline of this. You can see the whites. And you can see the gray part has been removed. Okay, I'm going to click on this again. Click on View. Now you can see GPU preview. This is how basically it works. This is the basic GPU preview, which is on defile most of the time, but if you want to see the outline, it's going to be up to you how are you going to work with it? Then let's go off to the next one and you can see also preview on CPU. You can also preview it on CPU if you want to, and that is basically a bit different. You can see the CPU preview, this is over here too. If I click on View. If I click on GPU preview, you can only see that this is on Preview right now, 45.86% okay. So this is how much GPU which is being used then we have is Overprint Preview. When you click on this Overprint, you can see that this is basically how it will look like when you are using Overprint Preview. Whenever you're viewing that exact method, our exact process, you can see it over here. Now you can see it is written CPU overprint preview. This is basically how it works and you can navigate through it whenever you want. Now if you don't want to navigate through it or use the scroll bars, obviously I've shown you in my previous lesson that we can use this tool to navigate through Adobe Illustrator. I'm going to click on View again and keep it on CPU and keep it just the way it is. Now I'm going to do is click on view again and then we have this pixel preview. Now if you want pixel preview, you can see this is how it will look like. Now you might not see any differences, but this is basically the preview, how you want it to be. If you want pixel preview, it will look like this. If you want GPU, if you want CPU, it's going to be up to you how you want it to preview. Now you can see the pixels are being used 100% Whenever I use whichever one of them you can see the percentage is now changing in CPU outline. Cpu is being used 45.86% It just helps you to keep track of which component is and how it is working. Now you can see there's also trim view, but this is not going to work right now because I'm not using GPU. Now you can see a view when I use this. Now the trim view is available. You can also see it on the trim view. On trim view it is being processed are working 45.86% Now let's go off the view again and then we have its presentation mode. Before presenting anything or any of your work, you can go through presentation mode so that you can show it to any person or present it in full screen mode. You can see this is how it will look like. It is basically the same one when you present it through, let's say Powerpoint or maybe direct on screen without showing the UI. And if you want to get out of it, just make sure to hit on Escape. And then you will get out of that workspace and it will just land you on this essential workspace of Adobe Illustrator. Now as we're done with this now let's go off to other views. Now, click on View again, and then we have a screen mode. There are basically three types of screen mode, normal screen mode, full screen with menu bar mode, and full screen mode. Well, you can go through whichever one you want. Now if you want a bigger workspace, I will suggest you to use full screen with menu bar mode. And you will basically see more type of, let's say you will get more space and you will be able to put in more things. You'll basically see that on your PC the cross buttons are closing buttons, minimize and you know. Let's say Cascade. And also even your task bar will be invisible for a while, okay? And if you want to click on View again. And you can also change it whenever you want. And you can also keep it on full screen mode. And you will basically see all the UI's will now be invisible. You will not be able to see it this press on Escape, and you will basically see all the tools back again. So this is basically how you get out of these view modes in Adobe Illustrator. Now I'm going to do is keep it where I can. I'm going to hold it back over here and there we go. Looks a lot more better keeping it in the middle. Now let's go off the view again. And then we have is proof set up. Now which type of set up do you want or what is the color type you are going to use now as I'm using a CMY K pattern, or let's say I'm using the color palette of CMYK, not RGB. So you can see that they are not an RGB, or the RGB ones are not now working, are grayed out. But if you are using any RGB color panel or any RGB palettes before making in your preset, you can select an RGB and those will be available over here. Now, Adobe Illustrator also offers you color blindness options, or let's say tools, or limited advantages. If you have protanopia, you can select on this and you will basically get, it will just help you identify which color it is. And then we also have Deuteranopia. It will also help color blind people to detect colors. And you can also customize this panel by clicking on Customize, And you'll be able to select it from over here. Now you can see that I'm using US webcoded swap V two, but you can use whichever one you want. You can see SRGB. Now, if I change it to ESRGB, all the SRGB proofs will be available. Now you can use whichever rendering option I want if you want saturation, if you want vivid colors, and I'm going to suggest you to use saturation because I've worked in with a couple of saturation colors and how I want it to view. Because it just helps me kind of find out which color is being used or which color needs to actually pop up or get alt. Okay, so you can use whichever one you want. And I also keep it a bit vivid when I'm trying to presenting stuff because it just looks a lot more alluring than being all dull. After you're done selecting it, just press on. Okay. And all the proofs will be added up or all the proofs have now been applied. Okay, Nick can go off the view again. And then we have a zoom in. Zoom out. Well, in zoom in, there is also a shortcut key designed to it, which is control and plus, plus. And in, zoom out, which is control plus, minus, okay? Now you can do it over here. You can also use this tool of zoom in and out. But you can also press on Control and plus. And Control and minus to zoom in and out like this, okay? If I press on this plus, you can see it is zooming in. If I press on control and minus it will zoom out. And then you can use two of them at the same time. Okay? So it's going to be up to you whichever one you want to use. Then we have is fit artboard to window. What's I'm going to do is zoom in a bit. I'm going to hold on to all and I'm going to do is go off the view is fit artboard in window. When you press on it you'll basically see, you will be able to view the whole artboard on your screen without getting all zoomed in or all zoomed out. Now it works the kind the same way, fit all in window, okay. You can also click on it and see how it works. It will be placed in your window. You can see this is not that fit, but it will fit up all on the window. Even though if you have a landscape type of preset, it will still be visible in like this. Okay. It will just have more space and all is visible at the same time. Now let's go off the view again. And then we have is rotate view. Now if you want it on the left side, right side, or whichever angle you want to see it as, you can click on View again and we can go out to Rotate View and whichever angle you want. And there's also minus values. Let's say I want it 90 degrees, now it is 90 degrees. If I click on View, if I change it to 150 degrees, put 150 degree. And if I change the view to maybe, let's say I'm going to keep it on -45 it will be -45 So use whichever one you want according to your need, but obviously these are not that important. I'm going to keep it on zero because that is how I like it. Okay. Now the next ones which we have are going to be reset rotate view. If you put on any views or rotations, you can reset the rotate view and keep it how it was. Basically it's just you are reverting how it actually looks like. Or if you put in a couple of re, rotated rotation views and then you want a previous one, you can just reset it or keep it how it was. Now you also have show slices. As you can see that on my screen or on my artboard, I did not put any slices. If you have any slices or if you have hidden any part of it, you can go off the view and you can go off the show slices and you will basically see the slices over on your panel. Okay? As I don't have any, so it will not show any. But I can put on slices by clicking on this. And I'm going to make a slice over here. There we go. And you can see that I have a slice over here are two slices. I'm going to click on view and I can hide the slices whenever I want. You can see that I cannot see any slices anymore except for that I can see the outline of this. Okay? Now I can also remove it if I want to, but when I click on View and show the slices, you can see that there are 1.2 Okay, Now let's go off the view again. And then we have is lock slices. You can also lock up slices so that you cannot remove them anytime you want, even when you're using the tool of slice selection. You can see it over here. I will not be able to do anything because these slices have been locked right now. So I'm going to click on View again. First I'm going to click on Selection Tool and click on View. I'm going to do is unlock these slices just by clicking on it back again. Now you can hold onto it and drag it wherever you want. I'm going to press on the deletes, and you can see the slices have been removed. I'm going to go off the view again. And then we have is this hide bounding box. If you have any bounding box on your slices, obviously you must have the bounding box. Some of these. First off, start from over here. You can see that I have my slice over here. There we go. Now I'm going to click on View. I'm going to show slices. I'm going to click on view again. I'm going to use, first off, click on hide Slices. Click on view again, show slices. Click on View. You can see this is how it will look like. You can see that there are no one I'm going to use. First off, select on it, click on Slice Tool, make a slice. I'm going to click on View again and click on, let's say Hide Bounding box. And you'll basically see the bounding box will be removed. Now I'm going to click on View again. And then I'm going to do is first off click on Show Transparency grid. And you can see the transparency grid is now visible. Now it's going to be up to you how you're going to work with it. And you can also see the pixels on how these actually function or how is the photo actually moved from one pixel to another or any object. The next one which we have is going to be a bit different. First Tom to remove or let's say ma, do keep it however it was. Show live painting gaps, okay, I'm going to click on View. I'm going to do is high transparency grid. And there we go, we have it. I'm going to just click on any of the pads and then delete the section, or delete the slice. As I'm done deleting the slice, I'm going to click on, let's say View again. And then I'm going to do is going to go off the actual size. Now I can get the actual size of, you know, any element when I click on it. Okay. It will give me the actual size of it and how it actually looks like even though it's zoomed out. So it will basically show me that, you know, the elements are kind of, you know, small or either big. But when I click on this show, actual size, it will give me the actual size of any element which I have on my screen or on my artboard. I'm going to click on View again. And then we have is hide creating an odor. If you have any grading oder like available or let's say working on your screen, you can hide them up like whenever you want. I'm going to click on view again. And then we have is hide live pain gaps. If you have any pain gaps, you can see that when you're using brush or when you're using anything. Now you can see this like this. I'm going to click on View again. I'm going to do is show live pain gaps. You can see these are the gaps. Now if I click on View again and you can also show transparency grid and hide live pain gaps. You can also do that whenever you want. Now let's go off the view again. And then there is other ones which you have is hide corner wickets. But first thing I'm going to do is fit artboard and windows so that I can see all of it. Now I'm going to click on this and we have hide corner wiggets. You can see on the corner, wiggets are now removed, or let's say they are hidden. You can also click on View again and you can show corner wiggets. And those will be available back again. Now let's go off the view again. And then we have is this. You know, let's say smart guys, well these smart guys are basically, you know, let's say behind you. Let's say these are most of the time behind. Those are the pixels. When you hold onto any element and you want to drag it, you can see that it is now working this way. But when you like, you know, hide those you know, grids, you will basically see that it is now moving like this. But if you are now, you can see that this is now moving smoothly without, you know, let's say not skipping it, is now skipping the pick cells. But when I click on View and I'm going to use smart guides and click on it, you'll basically see that it will kind of like, you know, skip a couple of pick cells at a time, right? So this is basically how it works. When you are holding on shift and you are dragging any object, it basically gets aligned and then starts moving. But when you remove smart grids, it's not going to work like that. It will be just a full free form. You can just drag it wherever you want. It's basically like this. Okay, but when you're using smart Guide, you'll basically see that it will be arranged on, let's say the pixels or whatever grids there are underneath which are transparent. Now we have a perspective grid. Now you can use whichever perspective grid according to your need. You can show you the grids. You can show the ruler snap to grid, lock grid, lock station, point defined grid, one point perspective. Let's just start off with Show Grid. When I click on Show Grid, you'll basically see the grid is now visible. But as I don't want it, I'm going to just press on, let's say to just cut this off because I don't need any of these grids. You can click on View again and you can go off the perspective grid. And you can click on High Grid and that grid will be hidden well, that grid is basically for the treat elements or whatever design you're making. So if you're not making any designs or maybe you don't want that perspective, or let's say you don't want anything to be like that or according to your perspective, it is three D. So I'm not going to suggest you to use it because it's not that useful unless you're using or making any tread object. Then we have a show ruler. When you click on show ruler, it will basically show us the ruler over here. Now I'm going to click on View again. I'm going to click on Perspective grid. And you can also hide the ruler whenever you want. And basically, most of the time people don't need the ruler because the rulers are basically over here. You can measure up whenever you want. And now you can see that I'm going to click on View. I'm going to go off the Perspective grids and then I'm going to just lock the grid. If you want to lock the grid, you can do that too. You can also define the grid whenever you want. And then we have a snap to grid. Well, basically if you don't turn it on or like click on the snap to grid, it's going to be a total free form, so you can drag it or drop it wherever you want, but when you snap it to grid, it will be at least a line. Okay? So there's also one point perspective, one person normal view, two P, say three point perspective. It's going to be up to you whichever one you want to use. I just don't like fiddling through it, but you can just go through them and see how those works. You can see this is one person and you will be able to see two person. Well basically most of them are three D based, so I'm going to click on this over again. This is one point. Let's get to two point, and then you can see this two point. And the third one is going to be the 0.0 ' going to click on this three point perspective. And you'll basically see the three point perspective over here. Now I'm going to click on View again. Click on Perspective Grid. I'm going to use Hide the Grids because I don't need it right now. Now I'm going to click on View again. And the next one, which we're going to learn about it is going to be our hide artboards. If you have like a couple of artboards activated on your panel, or let's say one document, you can hide your artboards. Clicking on this, you can see that there is no artboard right now. But when you click on View again and when you click on show Artboard, you will basically see the size of your artboard, which you are using for your work, and you can customize it whenever you want. It's up to you how you're going to work with it or how you're going to put it. This is basically how we're going to keep it right over here. There we go. Now I'm going go to View again. And then on the view we have show print tiling. Now if you want to show the print tiling, you can also apply it, but you can also see that we have this print tiling option. Our print tiling tool over here. You can see you'll be able to customize it whenever you want, according to your need. This is basically how it's going to work. Then we have this, let's go off the view. And I'm going to do is you can also hide the print tiling. It's going to be up to you, I'm going to click on again. And then we have this high template. If you have any template working already activated on your document or already activated on Adobe Illustrator, and you want to hide the template and you want to start off fresh over the template. You can just click on High Template. And that template will be hidden for a while until you want to show it back again. Then we have a rulers over here. You can show the rulers whenever you want on a joustraighter by clicking on Show Rulers. And you can see on the left side, and on the top we have our ruler. So that we can see and how it will work. Now you can also go off the ruler again, and then we have this change to global ruler. And you can also see the video ruler. So you can just click change too. You can see how it works. Now if you change it to video ruler, you can also change it. Show video rulers. And this is how the video rulers work. So it just basically helps you a lot when you are working with videos on a jobustraighter. And you want to change or customize it, so this just comes in handy a lot of time someone just keep the ruler here because it looks kind of good. Then we have is hide text threads. If you have any text threads activated, you can also hide the text threads. And you can see I only have one, so it's not going to work. But you can hide them whenever you want. Okay, if you have any text thread then we have is this guides. You can hide guys and you can also lock the guides whenever you want. Then we have is show grid. You can also show up the grid whenever you want. And now you can see the pick cells. You can see that these are not aligned perfectly, but when I hold on a shift, you'll basically see that it will get along the pick cells which are over here. See it just gets very good aligned. Deka, I'm going to click on again. You can just click on Hide Grid. Then you can also snap to grid whenever you want. Just click on Snap to Grid. And there we have it first on shift and it will move like it is moving in pig cells. So click on View again and then I'm going to do is snap to pick cell. You can also snap it to pick cell whenever you want to make sure to hold onto any element. You can see it over here. I'm going to go back a bit again. I'm going to do take this over here. You can see now this is snapping to Pick Cells. Okay. I'm going to click on View again. And then we have snap to point, and snap to glyph, okay? As we're not using points or glyphs, but if you are putting our applying any glyph, you can use that. Then we have new view and also edit views. Okay, In new view you can see that you'll be able to make a new view or save it whenever you want. And you can also edit the view which you're having or which you already have turned on an Do Illustrator. You can add the new view and then you can just press on okay or name it up. You can also delete it as a section or a selection of tools or maybe how you want it to look and so that you can see it later on. It is basically like saving a specific view which you have on your, let's say, workspace. It's basically not the view which I'm having right now, like these elements. Not this. But you can customize your workspace and how you want it to look like the next time you open it. Let's say the next time you want to open it, I want the ruler to be open. I want the grid to be open. I want the scales to be open at the same time. So that is how you'll be able to add the edits, or you can customize it and also save it for your workspace. Hope you understood everything in this lesson about the View Ribbon and what functionality it has to offer. Well, all of them are basically very simple, so make sure to use it whenever you want and go through a couple of them filled with it so that you can discover a lot more things. And these are basically just the basics of what these tools can do. Hope you understood everything. And if you didn't understand a part, feel free to ask me any question. And we will guide you and help you through the whole process. In our next lesson, we're going to learn all about the window ribbon and what functionality it has to offer to us while using Adobe Illustrator. So let's move on to that lesson. 24. Window functions: Window ribbon. Welcome back to our adolescent of Adobe Illustrator. Essential. In this lesson, we are going to cover up all of the tools and functionality the window ribbon or the window tab has to offer. Now in this tab, we're going to find out all about the window or all about the workspace, how you want it to look like, and which tool or which command you want to use. Without any further ado, let's just hop onto the lesson by opening up one of the presets in Adobe Illustrator. You can see that I have opened up a preset. Now we're going to go through our window Ribbon in Adobe Illustrator. Whenever we click on window, the first thing which opens up, or the first command or tool which opens up is new window. Whenever you click on new window, it will open up another window for me without making another, let's say, preset. Now you can see both of the windows are of the same size, which are both letter. I'm going to go over here and you can see they are the same. Instead of sometimes clicking on file and making a new window or making a new preset instead, if you want to use the same preset, you can just go off the window and make yourself a new window so that you can work individual ones. Or let's say do two projects at the same time, on the same work space, but on different windows, so you can save each of them at a specific time. Or let's say each of them one by one. So it's going to be up to you as this is going to be our last ribbon lesson of Adobe Illustrator. So I'm going to be showing you everything which we have in this window ribbon of Adobe Illustrator. Now the first thing I'm going to be doing is going to be clicking on Window again. And then we have is Range. Now what type of preview do you want of your Windows? Now you can keep it on Cascade, which is already on default. Then we have this tile. Then we have is float on Windows and float all on Windows. Now first thing you can do is click on tile. When you click on tile, you will basically see that let's say two of the windows, or let's say two of these panels will be opened at the same time side by side, so you can work on it and see differences on them whenever you want. Well, this is somewhat kind of very advantageous at some point because it helps you to see the differences, what you're doing with it. If you have like simultaneously you want to work on it, you will be able to do that from this K or this option. When you want to revert it back, just click on Arrange and click on Cascade again. Or cut one of these off and then you'll be good to go and this is how it will look like. Then first off, what you have to do is go off the windows and you're going to click on Arrange. And first off, when you make a new window, I'm going to go off a new window, new window. And you will see that it will revert back to this cascade method, or let's say the cascade view. Now next thing which we have over here is floating windows. If you have another window, I'm going to do is make another window. Now I want it to float and I'm going to click on a range floating window. And you can see that the one which I made new is now floating on top. Well, this is somewhat, kind of very advantageous because this is also very, let's say this is also very, let's say, featured full. And also very advantageous when you want to work on it simultaneously. If you have a bigger screen, then you will not have any issues by using this. Okay. And you can also cut them off whenever you want. Save it up. And also apply the same tools, but you have to select the tools from this panel and then apply directly over there. Then you have to go off the Windows and then on Windows, and the last one we have is float all on Windows. You can float all of them at the same time if you have like a couple of them. But if you don't want it, you can just revert it back to how it was. Just click on Cascade and it will be back on how it was now. You can see that it is now floating. You can take it wherever you want. But I'm going to do is keep it right over here. Just drag it over here and it will get back when it is floating. Just make sure to drag it back over to this panel over here. It will get back into casket view or how it used to look like on default. So I'm going to click on Windows again. And next we have is find extensions on Exchange. When you click on this, it will find up extensions for you. What are basically extensions? The extensions are a method of applying or using multiple software, or let's say increasing the functionality of any software. And it also works. In case of Op Illustrator, it will take you to a side. I'm going to click on this. As I've clicked on this, you can see that it took me to the web browser and also to a side which is called Adobe Exchange. From here, you can sign up with your account and also use whichever extension you want. Make sure that you are connected to Adobe account and also let's say Google account, if you already have. After that, you will basically find out all the tools you need or whichever functionality you want to apply on Adobealtraer so that you can maximize or increase the functionality of Adobaltrador. And there's also a couple of extensions such as different categories such as, you know, the video editing or maybe graphics editing, or maybe you presentation making, let's say sound, audio, images and all of those. And you don't have to get out of autobilustraor. You can get full functionality by staying in Adobiltrator and also applying those features directly onto Illustrator. Okay, So it basically saves up a lot of time and work. Okay, now go off the Windows again, and then we have this workspace. So the workspace is basically how your workspace and adobillustrator, or how the interface of autobiltrator is going to look like. Now I most of the time use essentials classic because if you've seen my previous lessons, we already know which one to use, but you can use whichever one you want according to your need. Let's say you want to work only on tracing, you want to work only on typography, you only want to work on Web. They have all these features. Let's say I want to use only painting. I'm going to only paint in the B Illustrator. Click on painting and your workspace will change or customize it in such a way so that you have all the paint tools available on your workspace. Now let's say if I want to use to customize my, let's say Web, go off the work space. Now, click on Web and all the tools of Web will appear up, okay. On your screen you can see that there's links in all of those customizations. Now if I want maybe something else like maybe tracing or typography, I'm going to click on typography if I want that. And all the tools of typography will appear up on your screen and those will be very easy to find out. You can see all of them are most of the time over here or over from here, But not all the tools are visible over here. What you can do is if you want full functionality, I'm going to suggest you to use Essentials. Classic or Only Essentials, because it helps you to find out all the tools and get hold of them whenever you want. And it is very easy to use. Okay, So use it whichever one you want. And then we have this extension libraries. If you have any extension downloaded on your PC or maybe your laptop, just your device, you can just go off the extensions. If you don't have it applied, just go off the extensions, use the libraries, and then apply directly to W Illustrator. Then we have Is controls. Well, you can see when I press on control, the control panel is now off the grid. Now when you press on control again, that grid or that panel will appear up back again. And this is called basically the control panel of Adobe Illustrator. Okay, so you can go off the windows again. And then we have this tool bar. Now what type of toolbar do you want? You can see it over here. So I want advanced, But if you want a basic tool bar, you can see the toolbar, or let's say the basic toolbar panel is now looking quite basic. And not all the tools are there. These are like the basic tools. But I most of the time preferred keeping it on Advanced because it just helps me to get hold of all the tools. And if you want to apply more tools, you have this option called, you know, new toolbar or managed tool bar. You'll be able to manage them whenever you want. Apply it or remove it. You can see that there are basically no tools over here, but you'd have to do is customize your tool bar and then you have to save it so that you can use it whenever you want or it's going to be saved up like a preset. Okay, so it's going to be up to you how you're going to work with it. Then on the next one we have is three D materials. Now, if you want all the tools of three D and materials on your screen or on your workspace, make sure to click on it. And the three D Material or Treat and Material panel will appear up on your screen. Now one thing about Adobe Illustrator is that you can put it up on specific places. You can see now I have my Three D and Material over here. And when I go off the windows, you will see that treaty and material is already active. Now if I want actions, I'm going to do is also apply actions. And you can also paste it wherever you want. You cannot put it inside the project panel, but you can put it inside of this panel. You can keep it over here and you'll basically see the project, you know, the actions panel is over here, the links. And it's going to help you find out what customizations you did recently or what did you do. Now I'm going to do is take this action action panel and directly over here so that I can use it whenever I want. You can see the actions and you can also see, you know, the links which I've used. And as I did not use any link, it's not available or nothing is there. It's like totally empty. And if I'm go to Windows again. And then we have Align. If you want the align, you can see the align over here. We we also have our pathfinder and also our transform Use whichever one you want, then we are going to go off over here. So basically what is that? You can open up or close any of these settings by selecting on them. Let's say I'm going to do is click on Appearance. This time, the appearance over here, you'll be able to customize it. Let's say I'm going to put the strokes to maybe a bit higher. Now first I'm going to do is make sure to select any box, or maybe make a box. And you can see the stroke has been applied and you can customize it from over here. You can also take it directly over here so that you can get full functionality. And to get it closer, I can also increase the stroke. I can also change the color from over here. There we go. You can see that this is how it looks like. I can also change the fill, let's say I want this color. And you can see this has been applied. Now you know how this tab or appearance section works. Then we have artboards. You can also fix up the art boards over here and you can select them whenever you want. It just basically helps you to find out, you know, this Windows panel, basically our Windows Ribbon basically helps you to make that specific type of tools appear up on your screen. And obviously, Adobe Illustrator has a vast amount of tools which you can select from or use from. Now as I already have art boards, now I'm going to do is put in acid export. You can see also the acid export is over here. I'm going to do is click on over, maybe Attributes. And those attributes will appear over here, and I want them to appear over here. In this section, you can also do that. And you can see attributes that are also over here. You can see the documents and also the art boards. Now, you can also drag this one into a specific, you know, let's say whichever panel we have turned on, you can see this one is over here. I'm going to take this, I'm going to drag this whole thing and you can see the comments. And I'm going to do, take this comments into this. Okay, I'm going to do is take the comment or whichever one we have into this panel over here or into this section, and those will be also insidedow. We can go off the windows again. And then we have brushes. If you want to customize your brushes, I'm time have it open because it just helps me find out those tools. You can also take it on this other section which we have over here, and there we go, we have it. It can also take this whole thing over here and you can take it out at the same time, and you'll basically see that this is how it will look like. But I'm going to keep it inside of this altogether because I'm not going to be using them. I'm just going to show you how this works. And it can also go off the windows again and select whichever one you want. Let's say I want image trace and it is available over here. I'm going to do is make sure that this is altogether with this. Okay. I'm going to just press on Kensilelect on this move tool and I'm going to keep it at this corner. Okay, I'm going to go off the windows again. And then in the info, or let's say I want infos, now you can see all about the info has appeared up. I can also take it, or keep it right around over here. If you have a bigger screen, then obviously you can put it up wherever you want and make sure you can increase the functionality. But if you have a small screen, then I'm not going to suggest you to use them, because you know you're going to have like really small congested space. And you will find out that sometimes it is hard to have this small workspace, so I'm going to suggest you to not use them. Okay, so make sure to use whichever one you want, only those, and then keep it. Now one of the most important one is layers. I'm going to suggest you to put layers all the time. I'm going to just make sure that this one is, you know, totally different from the other ones. Now I can go off the windows again, and this time I want this pattern option. Now as I select on pattern, now one thing is that you can also cut it off. And you can also keep it minimized if you want to, whenever you want and also increase the functionality whenever you want. You can see it like this. Click on this option and all of them appears up. And click on this. And all of them appears up. So this is basically how it works. You can collapse it, you can also extend the size according to your need. And you can also do the same thing with property. So you'll basically be able to put up all of the tools which you need over here on this section. There are three different type of sections over here. So make sure whichever one you want to use now, 72 is use strokes and you can see the strokes as appeared up Now instead of that, I'm going to take this over here and put up another one. Now you'll see that we have now four sections of tools now. It just basically helps you to organize them on whichever tray you want to use them, as you can categorize them so that it will be easier for you to find those tools and use it whenever you want. Now, lasso us on window, I want maybe a type section. Now in type section, there are a lot of things. Let's say characters. If you want to customize characters, you want to customize character style. Glyphs often type, you know, paragraph paragraph styles, tabs, all of them are of different section tools, so they are of different tools, each and every one of them. But lasso use only character styles I'm going to use, take this one over here and keep it round over here. And I'm going to do is paragraph styles. I'm going to just keep it right over here. And maybe I'm going to click on Windows again, and on Transparency, I'm going to click on it. And I want maybe another section of tools over here. I'm going to just make sure that it is collapsed. So now we have like five section. Basically you'll be able to apply in or use all of the tools on the section or put them up according to your need. Even though, just like I said, I don't suggest you doing that because sometimes it just gets very confusing and it takes up a lot of space if you have a small screen. Okay, so use only whichever ones you want and it will be a lot more efficient while you're working with it instead of going through a lot of tools. Now if you go down, there are also a lot of other tools which you can find over here. Now if I say I want a version type, you can see it over here. I'm going to take it around over here because I don't have any tools. I'm going to click on Windows again. And then I want symbol libraries. And you can see that there are a lot of these things on symbol libraries right over here. And also the ones such as watch libraries, then graphic style libraries, and also brush libraries. Now you can use whichever one you want. Let's say I want flower type of tools over here, only now I can select on any of them. First I'm going to click on brush. I'm going to select on this, maybe I'm going to do is put up like this. What I'm going to do is put one of them right over here. Take one and put it up over here. Take this one and put it right over here. This is basically how it works and it is very simple. I can also use this spray paint tool and put up more of these elements. If you've seen my previous lessons, you already know how you can do that. So if you didn't see that part, I'm going to suggest you to go see that part and use it. However, you can first off select this tool and then select whichever icon or symbol you want to use. And then you will be able to do that. To do is make sure to use this over here. Mi is selected over here. And there we go, we have our sixth section of tools. You can see that this one is quite bigger because it has to show up what it is. Then we have this Swatch libraries. You have visi bone two, natural, maybe unnatural. I want maybe foliage. Now you can see that this is all the color pattern. Well, there are a lot of color palettes which you will find out on adobltrater. Basically, you find out the one, whichever one you want to use, and you can see it will be basically how it works. Now in brush library, you will be able to find out whichever type of brush you want to use. Let's say this time I want to use maybe bristle brush. I'm going to click on Windows again and I'm going to go off to brush libraries. And I'm going to find out bristle brush and select on bristle brush library and use whichever brush you want to use. You can see it over here. I'm going to use this, I'm going to do, maybe click on brush and you can see the brush type is changed. Now I can also use other brushes. Let's go off the windows. Click off on brush libraries. Let's add one image brushes, this time image brush. And I'm going to use these ones and you can see this is how it will look like. You can see this is how it will look like. And also use another one. Lets use this, you can see how it will look. This is how you'll be able to save them. To let save it over here, I want to use this over here. Only the brushes are going to be over here. You can categorize it in such a way so that you can use it and you can also go through them from here and also change how it looks like. This is very simple to use and also quite fun. I'm going to press on control Z so that I can undo all the process now as it is clean. Now the next one which we're going to do is going to be double clicking on it so that I can get full screen. I'm going to do is, let's say over here I have now Swatch libraries. I'm going to go to the Swatch and you can use whichever palette you want. And then we have is this graphic style library. Let's say I want buttons and rollovers. I can use them whenever I want. You can see this is how it will look like. Okay, currently I'm using the brush, but I can also drag them right over here so that I can use it whenever I want. Okay? So this is basically how it works. And you can also save them right over here whenever you want to. Okay? We can go off the windows next time. And then we have, is this one of the most important features about this having windows is that all the tools are over here. Now I'm going to be showing you one thing which is very important. It's about the transparency. This transparency section is very important. So I'm going to suggest you to use it whenever you want because when you are using masking or, you know, blending it up, it's going to help you a lot. And moreover, when you are using this layer option, we already have the other one, so you don't have to worry about it. So hope you understood everything about this window ribbon in Adobe Illustrator. And the last one we have is the file which is all the time open or the one which is active. Okay. And the other tools that you have over here, I'm going to suggest you to, you know, fiddle through it and see how those actually work and what functionality it has to offer. So whichever one you want, just click on it, use it, and, you know, arrange it in such a way so that you can find it and also use it and see how it works. So hope you understood everything about this lesson and also about the window ribbon and Adobe Illustrator. Now as in our next lesson, we're going to learn about the layers and also a couple of basic things. Now let's click on Help. Which we're going to do is find out what we have or what Adobe Illustrator has to offer us in help. So you can get Illustrators help, you can get tutorials, You can get what's new and the update or the history. You can go off to the community of support and also submit the bug if you are facing any. You have system info about the Illustrator or system compatibility. You can manage your account and also update it according to your need. So I hope you understood everything in this lesson. And now let's move on to our next lesson of Adobe Illustrator. If you have any questions or if you are facing any problems, then feel free to ask me anything or ask me a question. We will be there to guide you and help you through the whole process. So let's move on to our next lesson of Adobe Illustrator. Essential. 25. Layers functions: Layers. Welcome back to another lesson of Adobe Illustrator Essential. In this lesson, we are going to be learning all about layers and what you can do with layers in Adobe Illustrator. Because layer is a very important factor, or let's say, a very important part in Adobe Illustrator. Whenever you are working with graphics or whatever photo object. Okay, let's just open up one of the preset from Adobi Illustrator and start working on it. I'm going to just click on Layer, and I'm going to wait for it to open up, and you can see that it has opened up. Now I'm going to be showing you a couple of things that will make you, give you a better idea about what the layer is. First off, I'm going to do is make a shape. Just click on this Start Tool, and you can see that I have made up my start, right? Make a couple more stars. Just click on this ellipse tool. There we go. We have a couple of these options over here, right? You can see that there are three objects, but all of them are overlaying each other. Now, what if I say that I'm going to customize this one? Let's say I'm going to erase this one, but I don't want the star to be removed, but I'm going to use this razor over here. When I drag this over, this part, you can see both of them are getting erased. Now, how do I stop it? Okay, stop it from happening. If I want to erase this, you will see that the star has also been erased, right? I want to stop, Okay. I want to stop having that issue. What I'm going to be doing is going to be using the eraser tool, or let's say using the layer tool. Now I'm going to just click on this. I'm going to press on control Z. I'm going to click it over here. Press on Delete. And also I'm going to delete all of them. But first I'm going to do, keep this one star over here. I'm going to go off the layers. Now one thing you can do over here is that you can apply new layers and also delete them whenever you want. Now if you want to apply in a new layer, you can see this is going to be layer one. Instead of that I'm going to do is change it into star. Okay, you don't enter. And this is the one if I want to make it invisible, I can also make it invisible. You can see, now I don't have any layer. Now I'm going to do is make another layer over here. Or you can make a sub layer. I'm going to click on Create New Layer. I'm going to name it to be, let's say Circle. Now you can change the color if you want to. You can also keep it white if you want to. It's going to be up to you. Okay? But it's not going to change the color of the board, but it's going to be in something in such a way so that you can differentiate it. Okay? You can see the first one is blue and this one is. Okay. This is like labeling. I'm going to do is make sure to put a circle. There we go. We have our circle. You can see now this one is looking red. It just helps us differentiate from which one is from which layer. Now if I'm going to do is click on circle. I'm going to stay on circle. Okay? And then I'm going to do is use this razor tool. Then I'm going to select on this, I'm going to drag this part out and you can see that only the circle now has been erased, not the star. But if I click on star and then erase it, and then it will be erased. Now you know a couple of advantages of using this layers. Now, we can also do a couple more instead of just erasing or editing. Now let's say you are customizing something, you have a thing. Okay, let's say you have a photo on let's say Adobal sheeter open. Now you want to make a couple of edits on it. Now, how do you do that? Let me just show you advantage of using layers. While you're editing your photo, I'm going to be doing it, is applying in a photo. Click on open, I'm going to use the same photo which I have. I'm going to keep it right over here. Okay, I'm going to wait. I'm going to zoom out. I'm obviously take it in such a way, I'm going to select on this, take it right over here. Then I'm going to do apply it on that page. Then I'm going to do wait for a while. You can see this is how it will look like and obviously drag it down. You can see the anchor points. This ad will look like. I'm going to do crop it up if possible. I'm going to just click on this, edit this image, crop the image first. Wait for a while until the crop option appears up. Take it right over here to take it around over here. Okay, I'm done. First on enter. There we go. We have it. I'm going to get back over here. Take it right around over here. Hold on a shift the zoom in a bit now. Do hold the corner and take it right around over here. I'm going to do is right click on it again. I'm going to do is first I'm going to do is crop this image again in such a way so that I can put it inside my box. I'm going to take this down, right over here. There we go. It don't enter and we have it. Okay. As we have it. Now I'm going to do is going to be making in a couple of sub layers or maybe a couple of other layers so that I can customize it. I can also make duplicates of this specific layer. If I want to, we can just click on the one which you want to duplicate it. You can just click on it. You can see the photo is on this one image. You can see it. And this is the sub layer. Okay. It is showing me that inside of the main layer, our primary layer, there's also a layer of image inside of it. You can write, click on it, you can make duplicates out of it. Okay. You can collect it, obviously. You can also collect it. And you can also target any object two or select any object two from over here. When you click on them, you will basically see it will be selected. If you select on this, the other layer has been selected. Now I'm going to do is click on circle. Now instead of that I'm going to be doing is going to be applying that circle over there. You can see the circle is now visible. Now I want that circle to be underneath this photo. I'm going to do strike it right underneath. And you can see it has been applied. I'm going to do is take it at the top. You can see I have my circle over here. Just click on this. I'm going to do make it a bit of different, maybe red. Okay, now as I have read, what I can also do is fixing the transparency. Now how do I do that? First thing I have to do is write click on it, You can see the circle which is over here. And I can apply in a bit of effect. If you can't find transparency, what you can do is go off the Windows and then find out transparency. Click on Transparency. You can see it over here. I'm going to do is fixing the opacity. I'm going to click on this. You can see that there is this reddish type of color. And it can also increase the size if you want to, But as I don't want any circle now, as I've put that circle inside of this, you can see now it is underneath. I'm going to just take this one at the top, you can see it over here. Now, as I said, I don't want this. I'm going to do is make sure to use a rectangle. I'm going to do find the Intersect, I'm going to drag it right around over here. There we go. Now we have a bit of reddish type of vibe to our photo, which you can see from over here. You can also fix that click on its click, the opacity, and decrease it a bit more so that we can see how it actually looks like. You can also make a mask if you want to. You can see that it has been masked up with it. You can also invert the mask. You can also click on release. Okay. So you'll be able to do a lot of things with layers and stuffs in layers. Another advantage is that you can make another sub layer, you can click on this and another sub layer will be applied to the same layer. You can also group specific layers. Let's sauce group all these together. So use press on Control shift and then down select them. Whichever one you want can selected person control and they will be grouped up. If they are not grouped up, just go on to type or maybe object and then group them up whenever you want. You can group up specific objects to whenever you want. Ma, go up the image and the image, I want to resorize it, but in another layer I don't want it. You can make another copy Lema person. This control C control, we can see now there are two of these I'm going to do person delete to take this over here. Do add another layer. You can see it over here. Make sure this is inside. To put this one, you can also make it invisible or visible, like totally up to you. You'll be able to customize it up to your desire. And you can also paste them up whenever you need it. Okay. And you can also apply in different effects. Say I'm going to do use on this layer of circle which we have over here. This first off selected object. I'm going to go off the effect. I'm going to go off to maybe, let's say effect gallery. You can see the red part which is over here. I want the red to be a bit, let's say like this or maybe on a distort, just make sure that a bit of diffuse or maybe a bit of angled, okay, I'm going to just go up to this diffuse glow. Press on. Okay. When I apply, you can see that there will be a bit of change on it. You can see the diffuse glow has been added and this is basically how it looks like. You can also apply directly on our photo so that it looks a lot more different. And how it is, you can see the difference right now, if a person control Z, you'll see a lot like other difference over here. Okay, use it up according to your need. You can also copy the specific subject or whatever you have. Just click on this object over here. Just make another copy. Let me just select on this, you can see it. This is the rectangle. We have basically two rectangles outside. I'm going to select this, take it on the second layer. You can do that too. You have two images right now. Now you can customize each one according to your need. Let's delete this. Delete this now as I have two images, I'm going to take one at the top. First I'm going to do, first off, on the top one, I'm going to decrease the transparency. I'm going to go off the windows again. Off the transparency I'm going to do. First off, make it, let's say low. You can see if I make it invisible, this is how it will look like. I'm going to make it like this. Now I'm going to be doing is applying a bit of effect. I'm going to go off the effect Now let's say I want it a bit of blur. I'm going to use radial blur. You can see how it looks like. I'm going to fix the amount, press on, okay? And then I'm going to just wait for a while. And you can see that there's a blur effect. But I can also see the main one underneath it. If I make it like this, this is how it will look like. You can also apply in a couple of those rectangle effect panel according to your need. Hope you understood everything about this lesson on how you'll be able to use layers. You can also delete layers. You can just click on them, click on any layer, press on Delete, and that layer will be deleted whenever you want. Or you can just select any layer, let's say I don't want this effect anymore. Click on this Delete, and that layer has been deleted. You can also name up your layers, just like I did at the beginning. Click on them or double click on it and then you'll be able to delete them. Another thing is that you can also apply effect. Okay, you can also release, you can also locate object and you can also collect any object for export. I hope you learned everything in this course of Adobe Illustrator essential if you didn't understand any parts or if you have any confusion or if you have any question, then feel free to ask me anything and I will help you to guide you through the whole process and learning about the essentials of Adobe essential, or let's say, Adobe Illustrator essential. 26. Key features of Adobe InDesign: We're welcome to our introduction part of Adobe Indesign. This is a beginner friendly course. But before getting into our course or our lessons, we have to learn a bit about what Adobe in design is. Let's get to our introduction. Adobe Indesign is a professional dektop software, or publishing software, developed by Adobe, Inc. It is widely used by graphic designers, publishers and marketers to create a variety of print and digital documents released in 1999. In design has become a standard tool in the design industry for its powerful features and versatile capabilities. Now, what are the key features or what is the purpose of using in design? Besides, there are also other softwares. Let's get into the key features, why we should use Adobe in design. There are eight main key features. First, the layout. In the design, it has like vast amount of resources and a vast amount of, let's say, designs and layouts which you can use from which makes it very flexible. Then we have typography. This is like most of the basic, but it also has a vast amount of resources, fonts, customizations, and a lot of them, which makes it more considerate than other softwares. Three, integration with other Adobe Creative Cloud app to increase its functionality. Most Adobe software has this feature which can increase its functionality with the help of Adobe Creative Cloud app Master Pages. This is one of the most, let's say, highlighting features, interactive documents which will help you to interact or make interactive documents very easily and very simply. Six is export option. Now there is also a couple of methods of what type of export option do you want or what format do you want. Then we have is pre flight and packaging. And the last one is one of the most important feature which is collaboration. Now it also gives you off that functionality which you can work on a specific document or specific project at the same time. What is the conclusion? Whether you're working on a simple flyer or a complex multi page publication? Adobe in design provides the tools necessary for creating professional and visually appealing documents. It's intuitive in our face. An extensive feature set makes it an essential tool for graphic designers and decstop publishers. Hope you understood everything about this software and how it works. What should we use it for? And what are the advantages and what are the key features, and what is the conclusion? So I hope to see you guys in my first lesson where I'm going to be showing you about the workspace and also how you will be opening up Adobe in Design. So let's move on to our first lesson of Adobe in Design Essential. 27. Opening up and workspace: Welcome to our first lesson of Adobe in Design. In this lesson, we're going to learn about how we can open up in design, get prepared for our work. Also, I'm going to show you the basics about all of the tools and we're going to find them about the tools and everything basically. We're going to also show you all about the work space of Adobe in design and how it basically functions without any further ado, let's just hop on the lesson by opening up Adobe in Design on our device. As you can see that I have opened up Adobe in Design on our screen. Now this is basically how this workspace looks. Okay, this is not the main workspace, but this is the home panel or the home screen. So I would suggest you to do a couple of things before working on Adobe Indesign. First off, make sure you have an Adobe account, make sure you're connected to the Internet. And also I would suggest you to use the latest version of Adobe Indesign. Okay? Because on the newer versions you're going to get a couple of tools and obviously you're watching this and you will be able to find out those tools easily too. And obviously there are a lot of buck fixes, okay, And a lot of new facilities and functionality which you'll be able to use with time to time when you are keeping yourself updated to the latest version, Okay, so as this is the workspace, or let's say this is the home panel. And you can see that certain things will be a bit different for you because it will be empty when you open it up first. But all of these will remain the same. Now on our home panel, we have new file, open home, Learn. And these are basically presets. And we're going to open up these ribbons or whatever tools we have over here later on in our next lesson. So first things first is that first, when you open up Adobe Indesign and you want to work on it, first thing you have to care about is the size. Now if you want to internationalize yourself, first off, if you have a Mac device, you can click on in design icon. And you will basically find out a section called Preferences or Reference. Then you'll be able to select the size. But if you are using let's say Windows, okay, then you're going to do is go off to edit. And in Edit you're going to find out, let's say color settings and profile, something like this. And you'll be able to change it up. But another method is that obviously if you're using a newer version, you'll be able to change it up when you are trying to open up a new document for you. Now there's obviously this option called preferences. And then you can go off the general interface and you'll be able to fix the units and increase like increments too. This is how it looks like when you are using, let's say a Macos. The thing what you're going to do is go off the units and increments. And then what you're going to do is like this type of interface opens up and on default it will be set off to millimeters or centimeters depending on your region. And then even if you have the different ones, make sure to select the ones which you want because I like using it with inches. And sometimes I also use points because I'm used to Adobe Photoshop. So select the ones which you want. Obviously, fix the vertical and horizontal at the same time. Fix in the other units what type of units you want. But one thing about this is that on units or other units, you will only be able to set it up on points or millimeters. And you can also see the keyboard increments and the baseline cursory key size and all of those, okay? And after you're done with it, like obviously, you are quite prepared to work on Adobe in design and how it works, okay? Now this is the first method of how you'll be able to internationalize yourself with, you know, the size and the increment. But I will obviously show you another method of how you'll be able to fix it up before opening it up. Now here we have a new file, okay? If you want to open up a new file, this is what it will appear up. Now you can see that there are a couple of presets which you'll be able to select with. Okay, select. Now another thing is that if you want to like work faster, you have these couple of them presets which are already pre made. And when you just select on them, it will be created on its own. Okay, I'm obviously going to show you that too. Now, from here, let's say I want to go off the web or the structure of web, then from here I'm going to do select out this four. Okay? And just like I said, you will be able to internationalize yourself with sizes before opening up any documents. Is that when you select any preset or let's say you want a custom size. So first thing you're going to do is first up name the detail of the document which you want to start off with. Then from here you're going to do is fix the width. It's going to be according to you. Now you can see that this is on Pick Cells, now I'm going to change it to inches. Click on this units over here. And then select up inches. And there we go. You also have internationalize yourself with the size. Okay, Then select up or fix up your width and height according to your desire. Then we also have orientations, which you're going to do is select it up whichever one you need. So I'm going to do is keep it on portrait now, the number of pages you want, okay, You can select it up from over here. You can drag your cursor and you can also type in it. Okay? Then we have a facing pages. If you want some facing pages or kind of like a cover page, you will be able to use that too. Then we also, if you have a number of pages, which one do you want it to be starting from? Let's say 1234, whichever one you want. And then you will be able to put in a primary text frame even if you want to. Now from there you're going to do is fix in the columns how many columns you want, of columns, of pages, basically. And then we also have margin settings, fix in the column gutter. Then on the margin settings, you'll be able to fix up the top, left, bottom, and also the right one. And you can also make sure that they are linked up or not linked up. What happens when it's linked up is that when you increase it from over here, all of them will change according to your size. But if you like unlink them, you'll be able to fix out parts of certain certain regions which is top or maybe a bottom or maybe a left or maybe a right. Then on this bleed and slug, you have the bleeding sections where you'll be able to put in bleeds on top, bottom, left, and right. And we also have Slug which also works kind of like the same way and obviously on each and every one of them you'll be able to link and also unlink them according to your need. Now let's show you the first part is that I'm going to open it up as I'm done, and I can also get a preview of how it looks like. Okay, now the first thing I'm going to do is not put a preview, But if you use a preview, it's going to open up this work space for you where you'll be able to see how this works. Okay, this is how I need it. Then you're going to do is just click on Creates and it's going to create up that work space for you. Now just like I said, there is another method just like using the pre used one or let's say the presets select on any one of them will say one letter I'm going to do is click on the litter and it will open up that, you know, format of page for me directly. And I don't need to change any of it. Now, there are obviously other types of presets which you want to use. Click on more presets and then you'll be able to see that you are back on the same panel when you opened up by clicking on New File. Now after you're done, let's say you want to open up a project or a document which you've worked on previously. Now if you want to do that, just click on Open. After you click on Open, you will basically see that this pop up appears up, then select whichever drive you have to file on, whichever folder you have to file on. And after you are done with it, just click on the file set on this one and just click on Open, and it will open up on your workspace. Now we have home, which is this one. Another thing is about this is that you're going to have the recent open over here. Just like I said, I already worked on it. So I have a couple of them. But if you are new to it, you will be able to see all of your recently worked projects right over here on this section. Now, there is obviously a different type of sorting method to now how you want it to sort from let's say time or maybe let's say alphabets. It's all up to you fixing those. So you can just manage or organize your data whenever you want to use and those stuff. Then we also have this account section where you'll be able to fix out your accounts or fix an account settings. Then we also have this one which will obviously just exploring. And then we also have the search tab or the search par, from where you'll be able to find out whatever document you want according or let's say by searching on this workspace. Last thing I'm going to do is entitled to, I'm going to do a search for over here, Untitled, Hit on Enter, and there we go, we have the Untitled files over here. Okay? And obviously it also connects off the internet. So make sure to connect yourself to the Internet so that you'll be able to use online searches to, let's say from here I want something green. I'm going to do search for something green. Hit on Enter, and then it will process it up. And obviously, I don't have any files. But you can see that according to Adobe, according to the research, or let's say resources, it's going to give you the exact type of data you want to use. Or if you want to open it up, you can also do that. But make sure you're connected to the Internet and also your Adobe account. So that you'll be able to use all of the resources Adobe in design, or let's say Adobe Creative Cloud has to offer to you. Now about the learn panel or the learn section, you'll basically find out a couple of tutorials on the web which you'll be able to open up, watch, and also use them if you want to. So this is kind of like a very, you know, beginner friendly and also user friendly software which also gives you kind of like tutorials which you'll be able to see and learn from. And obviously there is obviously rooms for improvement all the time. Okay, so as I've already opened up a couple of let's say. Sections or files which I've made, or documents which I've made. So I'm going to do is click on this back button and it will take me back to its workspace. Now you can see that I have two types of workspace. One is 4.1, is legal, so both of them are kind of like print sizes. But even though this is basically the workspace of how it works. Now when you get into the workspace, the first thing I'm going to do is our first thing, which I will tell you to do, is that sometimes your workspace might not look, you know, obviously the same. The thing what you're going to do is go off the windows, go off the workspace, and then find out essentials. Okay? You can also use Essentials Classic. It is also conflict the same, but you know there are a couple more tools and your ribbon and properties will be over here. Okay. And even if you're using let's say 2016 or CES or AE six, those are basically versions of Adobe in Design. Now from there we will see the difference is that I'm using Adobe in Design 2024 for this whole course, okay? And obviously, I am connected to Adobe account and also the Internet. Now what you will see is that this part will appear on this side if you are using let's say 2019 or if you're using essential. If you're using like previous ones, just like I said, then you will basically find out the properties are going to be over here because the previous versions are obviously not that upgraded or updated. So make sure to use a newer version if that's possible, because obviously you want a better experience. Now, another thing is that as this is a design, let's say graphics design type of software, obviously there's going to be a lot of graphical uses. Now another thing is that I would suggest you to use most of the time, Essentials, not classic, because you know you can find the tools, you can see the workspace, you can see the margins, you can see let's say the rulers, whatever documents or whatever file is already opened up, and also the properties at the same time. Just like I said, when you're using classic, it appears right over here. So I don't like it, but you make yourself yourself comfortable with what type of workspace you want. But the advantage of using essentials is that you have all the tools on the screen and also you'll be able to work with ease because it has more space in it now as we are basically done with this workspace. So let me just show to you, or let's just describe a bit more about it. Now, on the left side of the panel or left side of the screen, we see are the tools panel. So these are like basically different kind of tools. And another thing is that you can see that there is this small, you know, line or small icon at the corner of a couple of tools, right? So that means you can expand it, just right click on them and you will basically see more tools hidden inside each and every categories of tools there are, so all of them which have this corner at the end or dot at the end, you'll be able to extend them up and also use multiple tools at the same time and select the ones which you want. Okay. Another thing is that when you are using these tools, they have like a couple of uses. And also they can be opened up or used up with different methods. One is going to be the general basic, is going to be clicking on them with your cursor or with your mouse. But you can also see that there are a couple of shortcut keys which you can use to make your work a lot more easier. A lot more faster. Okay. And I would suggest you to use shortcut keys or get used to shortcut keys because in the long run, when you're using a specific type of software, you're going to need fast paced work, okay? Even though I would not suggest you to, you know, work on fast, make sure you are self satisfied first, and obviously make sure to make your work a lot more, let's say professional or even decent. Okay. And during that time, obviously you'll see that when you are using your mouse and it takes up a lot of time, then I would suggest you to use shortcut keys or get used to shortcut keys, which I'm obviously going to cover up in this whole course. So this is basically the file panel, or where you are going to construct your file or your design. And then we have the ribbons. Okay, Each of these ribbons are basically how it works and just like it says. Okay, so basically when you click on File, all about the file, all tools and commands according are categorized to files will appear up then if you want to edit anything, there we go. We have this other section, layout, type, object, table view, plug ins, Windows and Help. And I'm going to cover up each and every one of them through each lessons. So make sure the knots skip any part. And then over here are the rulers, which you'll be able to make, let's say margins of your own. On the right side, we have our properties. This is basically the property section or the properties panel. Then we have pages, the number of pages you're using. Now let's say that if you've used Adobe Photoshop or Illustrator, you can see layers, right? But as this works with pages, then you'll be able to apply in more pages just the way you want. And there are a couple of ways how you can make a new page. Now you can see over here, Create new page, select on it, and another page will appear. But if you zoom out, you can see that there are two pages side by side, or let's say vertically or horizontally select the one which you want. And obviously, there are a couple of methods of how you'll be able to navigate. Now, the first way of navigate is the scroll which you have over here. Then if you want to go side by side, make sure to hold on control. Then if you hold on the shift and use your scroll key, you will basically go up and down. And if you hold on a shift and control, then you'll be able to go faster on the sides. Okay. And another way of navigation is you have this tool over here which is called the hand tool. You'll be able to navigate like this too. And obviously there are a couple of methods of zooming in and out from over here. Michael, select your magnification size. Losa Us use 100. The Rico lemonade is 75. It's all up to you. Okay, and we're going to go through the next one on, you know later on lesson how you'll be able to fix in the magnification and how you'll be able to navigate. And you can also remove those ones whenever you want and I'm also going to cover it up. And the last one, we have a CC libraries, which is Creative Cloud Libraries. Now every extension and whatever you apply over here are going to appear in this section. Okay? So you can create up a new library, new presets, save it up, and use the ones which you want. So hope you basically learned everything about this lesson on introduction on how you can open up Adobe in design, internationalize yourself, and then learn about another workspace. Or starting how you can open up workspace and start working on it. So I hope to see you guys in my first lesson where I'm going to be covering up the file ribbon and also show you a couple of these basic tools which I'm going to cover up five in each lesson. Okay, so thank you for watching this video up till the end, if you have any confusion or any question about any of these parts or any of the workspace, then feel free to ask me and I will help you and guide you through the whole process. So let's move on to our next lesson of Adobe Indesign. Essential. 28. File ribbon with related tools part 1: Welcome to our first lesson of Adobe Premiere Pro, where we are going to show you about file ribbons and five of the basic tools Adobe design has to offer to you. Without any further ado, let's just hop on the lesson by opening up Adobe Indesign on our device. If you've seen my previous lesson where I covered up about how you can open up Adobian design and about the workspace. Then you already know how you can open up a new file. From here I'm going to do is click on a new file, or I can also click on new presets. From here I'm going to search for four. I'm going to do is go off the print from there. I'm going to select on four. If there is any, I'm going to just click on all presets. If I can't find it, then here we go. We have click on four. I'm going to do click on Create. Make sure to fix out your orientation and then you are good to go as it has opened up on our device. What we're going to do next is going to cover up all of the tools and all of the commands Adobe in design has to offer to us. In the File Ribbon I'm going to do is click on File Ribbon. The first part or the first one is called New. Now you can see that when I click on New, there are a couple of these options to. First is document, then we have book, and then we have library. Now from here I'm going to do is show you how you can open up a new document from your workspace. Click on Document, and the same type of interface opens up just how it opens up on the home panel. From here, what we're going to do is going to be selecting the size, or the desired size according to my need. Let's say a four fix in the configuration. You can also name the presets. Let's say I'm going to name it two meds. Hit on Creates, then we have two on our screen. Now how do I get back to the one? Just click on this option over here. You can go through each and every one of these workspaces or pages just the way you want to. And this is going to be done in a whole new document, even though it is appearing up on the same workspace. But both are individual documents. Whatever you apply over here will not go over there. And whatever you apply over here, it will not go over there. One thing is that you can save them individually. Okay, I'm going to do is cut out this part. Just click on that cross and there we go. It has been removed. Now the next one which we have over here is called the book. So I'm going to go off the book, click on it, and this opens up. If you want to open up a book or all the documents to make up a book, then you will be able to see this pop up or this screen or this panel. From here, you'll be able to select whichever drive or whichever folder you have the documents on. And after you've done select on it and then you'll be able to save it up as a book or you can also open it up. But here as it is new, it will make up a new book for you. We have is library. Now for opening up libraries, what you have to do first is stay connected to Adobe account so that it will take you directly to Adobe Creative Cloud. When you click on it, you'll basically see that CC library has opened up. And this is opened up most of the times, but you have to select on it and then it opens up. Okay, so from here you'll be able to explore the libraries from Adobe Creative Cloud. We'll sit click on this Explore library. And then what will happen is that Adobe or let's say Creative Cloud app will directly run on your device. And from there what you will do is you can you scroll through whatever apps you want? Whatever extensions you want and all of those. There we go. We have libraries over here. I'm going to click on Done. And then you're going to do is like apply directly to your libraries. And then you'll be able to use it almost on all software wherever it supports, just click on it. And if you want a preview of that software or preview of that functionality or that extension, just click on View and it will give you a preview of how it works on, let's say, you know, your web browser. So I'm going to do is open this web browser up. And you can see the web browser has opened up. And from here, Creative Cloud also opens up. And you can see, let's say the extension which you want to use is kind of like this. Fonts for print design. Select it up and you can create a copy of it. And you can also add it up directly to the library so that it doesn't go off the browser. And you can also use these extensions directly while working on Adobe in design. Okay, so this just increases your functionality, and that's how this libraries work. Now the next tool which we have is called open the shortcut key of opening up the file or opening up the panel where you can select up your files or documents is called Or is control. And so if you press on control and someone to just click on Control and then you can see this type of pop up appears up, select up the file, and you'll be able to open it up directly on your workspace. The next one is called Open in Bridge. First thing is that you must have Bridge or you must have Adobe, let's say Account, So that you'll be able to work on it and install it whenever you want. Use the ones which you want. And make sure you're connected to the Internet. And obviously make sure you are connected or you have the latest version of Adobe in design or Adobe Creative Cloud app for your desktop. Now if you're using, let's say a Macos, then obviously make sure you are also using the newest ones on there. Okay. So that you can get access to almost all the newest tools and also increase your functionality according to time. The next tool which we have over here is called Open Recent. Now the recent ones, whichever file or let's say whichever files or documents which you worked on recently, you can open it up directly from Open recent. From here you can see that I have a couple of files which I've used and I can open them up or use them up just the way I want to select up the file and it will open up on your device or on your workspace. Then we have is if you want to close up any window, these are basically Windows. Sema is press on control and a new file will open up. Let's create up this 14. And now I want to close this up. The easiest method is just clicking on this, but you can also go off over here. Click on close, and that part is closed for you. That is basically how this close option, or this close command works in Adobe in design. Then we have a safe. The shortcut for safe is control. And but when you just press on this save, it will be saved directly. You can save it as something to or whichever format you want to save it. For. That reason we have shift control and S, and if you click it up, the same type of interface opens up and you'll be able to save it up just the way you want to. Okay? But one thing is that if you already did not save it, but when you press on control and S, it is going to save it up As or use the command save As, and both of them are going to be the same. Okay, Then we have a check in. You can check in if you are working on a team project. Then we have a save a copy. If you want to save a copy, just make sure to go off the file. Click on Save A Copy, and it has been saved as a copy. But you can also fix in whatever format you want to save it as and which folder you want to save it to. The next tool, which we have over here, is called the Search Adobe Stock. Now if you want to go off the Adobe stock or you can go off to the web browser and use whichever you know, resource you want to use and get it to their website. Then just click on this and your web browser will open up on your device. And then you're going to do select whichever resource you want to use for that specific lesson or for that specific purpose. Now first off, you have to make sure that you're connected to the Internet so that you will be able to use it whenever you want. Okay, Now the next option over here, or the next tool or command over here is called place. Now if you want to place something, first off, when you click on Place, it will basically place in your page. But you have to select certain, you know, panels if you want to paste it to that area. Then if I click on place right now, it will be obviously placed in this page. So first thing you're going to need an element or whatever you are working with. And when you press on control D or control paste, then you can see this is control D. Just click on that and you will basically be able to paste that certain part up. Okay, there we go. We have place. The next one we have is placed from CC libraries. Now if you want to use the CC library or which is called Creative Cloud Library, if you have any elements or any document in there and you want to use it, just click on that option and it will open up CC libraries for you. And you will be able to use whatever graphics or whatever elements, or even text which you want to use for your purpose. Then let's go up to the next one, which we have is import XML. Now, XML is a specific type of document, or let's say even a file. Okay, file. So it's better, because XML is basically, it stands up for extensive markup language. And it is a markup language, which is a set of codes, or text that describes a text in a digital document. And that is also used in 2024. Okay? And it contains rich text. Rich documents. Okay, So you can also use that. And then what we have next is going to be import PDF comments. Now if you have some PDF files and you want to import those comments directly into Adobe in design, then you will be able to do that too. And obviously Adobe in Design has that facility or functionality to process that up and apply directly on in design. Okay, so we are basically done with this import and place from CC. Now the next options are going to be Adobe PDF presets, Export, and also share for review. Now the first one which we have over here is called Adobe PDF presets. Now, what type of PDF presets you want to use now, it doesn't depend basically what you think like presets, but it's basically kind of like quality and the resolution. Now each of these resolutions are each of them called presets. Okay? So all of them compared, like all of them collectively is called the presets. Now use whichever format, use whichever quality, whichever size you want to use, and then just click on any one of them. And if you don't want to use these presets of PDF. But you want to use, let's say you want to make a custom on, just click on Define. And this type of interface opens up, select them up, You can also make a new one if you want to just click on New. And this type of interface will open up, fix up your width, height, separate PDF files, and all of it. And then you're basically good to go. So I would not suggest you to go through these right now because it is going to be a bit confusing. Because obviously when you want to work on Adobe Indesign, you will save up indesign files. Okay? So I'm going to not suggest you to do this, but if you do want to use any PDF presets so that you specifically want that file or document only for presets, then you can like fiddle through them and select whichever quality you want. But I'm going to make it very simple that if you want like high quality, you already have this option or already have this option over here which you will be able to select. And it will obviously give you a very good quality and a decent quality of PDF print, okay? And you can see the lowered number goes, or let's say the lower it goes, it's going to be less quality. And you know you have this press quality two, you'll be able to use that. But from here I'm going to do, suggest you to use high quality print RPDFX 32002. Okay, It's going to be very good for you. And after you're done, just click on Done and then you are good to go. So let's go off to the next one, which we have over here is called Export. Now if you want to export it up or export your file, you can press on control or you can also click on this. Okay, I'll show you both the methods. You can see this is very simple. Let's try on our keyboard control. And there we go. We have the same interface or the same panel opening up on our device. From here, select whichever drive or whichever folder you have your document on. All you want to save it as, then just press on Save, and then you get to go. And from here you'll be able to use or change up the formats to whichever format you want to use it. There we go. We have HTML, JPEG, PNG XML in design marker, mark up DML. So you'll be able to select them. And then you're going to do is just save it up and then you're good to go. Okay, so the next one after format, or let's say after export, is going to be shared for review. Now let's say you worked on something, or you worked on a document or a file. Now you want to share it for a review. So click on Share for Review. And you can see like this will open up. First off, you have to save it as on in design and then you're going to do first. First off, save it as in design format and then you'll be able to share it for a review. Now one, you know, facility or functionality about this is that if you save it up or if you want to share it for review, the person you're giving it to, either that person needs to have an in design account and also in design downloaded on his device. And then he will be able to open up in design over there. And also you work at the same time. But if it does not have in design or does not use in design, then if you want to review to make sure to save it or export it up as a PDF file, send it over, get the review, and then you're good to go later on, save the whole thing as in design file and let them do the work. Okay, so this is like a suggestion which you're going to do. So let's go off to the next one, which we have over here is called the Publish Online and Publish Online Dashboard. So this basically increases your functionality in such a way that, you know, you can publish it online, so you can basically earn money through selling your designs too. Okay, So if you want to publish online it will, you know, publish it up on Adobe stock or you know, you have to make sure that you are connected to your account and you'll be able to save them. But if you want to publish it, let's say online dashboard on the dashboard, then you'll be able to do the same kind of thing just by clicking onto these options. Okay, so the next options or the next tools which we have is called the Document Presets. Well, this is basically kind of like the same way of fixing up your page or your workspace for you. So from here, click on Document Presets, click on Default, or maybe Define, And then select up your file or your document preset. And then you argued to go, but I would not suggest you to use that. But later on, if you want to make your workspace or let's say your documents a bit different and use a different type of, you know, let's say preset. Then you can use them, import them, or export them just the way you want to and apply directly on Adobe in design, on your workspace. Okay, so that is basically how these options work. And obviously we have default, then we have this document set up. Press on control Alt and P to fix in the document set ups or go off to the settings. From here you can fix like intent, what type of page you want, then the number of pages, the starting page, the page size within height, orientation, then the margins and also bleeding, sluck, basically all of them. Or you can adjust them before opening up a new project or opening up a new file for you in design. So those are basically the same as that one. And after you've done, you can fix in the layout and adjust them and press on. Okay. And then you're good to go. But one thing is that this document settings or the set up which you did is only going to work when you already have one document on. It will not open up a new document for you. Okay? So make sure that you already have one on, but even if you don't have one on, just click on file, open up the new one and it will be applied, okay? So make sure to use this settings, and this is quite convenient for a couple of times, okay? The next one option, or the next option which we have over here, is called adjust layout. If you want to fix the layout, the same type of interface opens up from here. Fix in the width and height, and then you're good to go. Now let's use a bit of shorted key for, for this command. For that reason you have to press on alt shift P. Let's try using that alt shift P. There we go. This interface opens up. Use it just the way or whenever you want to. Okay, so the next options or the next tools is called the user. So in the user option, you'll be able to use your name and also label yourself. Now this mainly works in cases of organizing data or let's say organizing people. Now you can label yourself as a specific, you know, color so that when other people or a team project is being used, you'll be able to, or they will be able to see from which team, from which label you are working on. Okay. And after you're done, just make sure to put in your name. Put in your label or your team, and then you're good to go. Okay, so let's go off to the next one, which we have over here is called the file info. And this has a very big, let's say shortcut key. So from here you'll be able to basically get the info about everything about any file if you have it open. Or you can also put up your own file name or own properties, or info about your project or your work. From here, you'll be able to put in the title of the document, the author, which is you, or even if you're working for someone else, they're going to put in the author. Then we have author title description, the rating of your work description, writer, the keywords, copyright status. If you have them, then we have copyright notice, copyright info, URL. And then we have the creation date, modification date, application, and also about the format. And after you're done, just press on. Okay. And then you're good to go. So make sure to fiddle through them. And obviously that's going to be kind of like at the ending when you're saving up something. So let's go up to the next one where we have this package. Click on this package, and what happens is that, you know, this package type of, you know, interface opens up. This is also kind of like let's say reference, which you'll be able to use, but from here you'll be able to see their scope of entire publication. And then there are like a couple of options which you can see over here about the fonts, links, you know, print settings, external plug ins, all of them. And when you click on package, what will happen is that your publication should be saved and you'll be able to save it up as a package. So that is why it is called basically package. Okay, now let's go off to the next one we have is print presets. Now from here, click on Define or use whichever one you want. If you don't have any, load it up, edit it up and save it, and also use it for various purposes. After you've done just like press on, okay, and then you are good to go. Then we have a print, if you want to print it up, go off to the print settings now. It will open up the print settings for me. From here there's going to be a couple of things, okay? So sometimes people think it's like quite complex, but basically it is not. So first thing you're going to do is going to go off the print preset fix in that. In what printer you want to use? Fix in, let's say the copies, the reverse order if you want to, then we have pages. What type of pages or how many types of pages you want to use? Use the sequence, the options. And you also have this preview, overture. And then we also have set up marks and bleeds, output Graphics, color management, advanced, and also summary. So you don't need to go through all of them, so basically just you need to fix it up in general. But if you want something about graphics, fix it up from graphics or color management. And then after you're done, just make sure to click on prints and then you'll be able to like print up your file or your document. Okay? So the next one which you have over here is called the print booklet. Now if you have a book opened or a book saved and you want to print it up, okay, go through these settings. Basically, kind of like the same thing as printing up, but obviously this is going to be like a book setting how you can finish up or print up a book. So make sure to fix up the ones which you want to customize it. And after you're done, just click on Print. And obviously you can go through print settings too. Okay? The last one is Exit. If you want to exit Adobian design, then press on Control and Q, or just hit on Altscape or let's say Alta four. So basically all of them are quite the same. Okay, We are basically done with this file ribbon arts file tools, which we have over here. In our next part of this video, we're going to cover up, let's say the five basic tools. And we're going to go through them one by one. So first we're going to do is we're going to start off from selection tool up to, let's say this is going to be our content collector tool. And we're going to show you examples about that too. Let's move on to our part two of File Ribbon lesson. 29. File ribbon with related tools part 2: Welcome to part two of File Ribbon and five basic tools. Without any further ado, let's get back to where we left from in the first part. From my screen you can see that I have left off from where I am back. Okay, as you can see that in our first part, we covered up almost all the tools and how it works and also a couple of shortcut keys which we have to know. Among them, the ones which are most important is control N control. Then we have is control control, Shift control. And that is not basically that important control W, because also you can close it whenever you want. But if you want to close up let's say windows, then press on control. And then we have a place which is control. D, export is control, document set up is control of P. And then we have like print, which is control. Okay? So make sure to use those whenever you can so that you can save up a lot of time. Let's go off to the first tool over here on the tool panel. The first tool over here is going to be selection tool. Now you can also press on V to use it. Just now. Use it, this and V, and this goes off to that tool. Basically you'll be able to select certain parts or whatever graphics elements you have on your device, on your workspace, okay. You'll be able to select them up. This basically works as your mouse pointer. Now, the next tool which we have over here is called the Direct Selection tool. Now you can use it by using a V for selection tool and press on V A. For this direct selection tool, you'll be able to select direct object, even if there are a couple of elements which you can see on your workspace. Now the next to which we have over here is called the Page tool. You can open it up by clicking on Shift and P. You can see it over here, Shift and P. And then you'll be able to fix out the page. This is the way you want to, sa, wants another page. You'll not be able to open up another page, but you can fix up, let's say settings by using this tool. Now, the next tool, which we have over here is called the Gap Tool. You can open it up by pressing on. This doesn't basically open up, but if you want to make a gap in between let's say text or elements, then you'll be able to do that. Let me show you an example, Sema make up this object. Now let's go for the tools. First off selection tool V, select that part out, there we go. And then you'll be able to move it wherever you want. And if you press on a, this direct selection tool, you'll be able to select it up directly, You can selected, and then you will be able to use it or move it by pressing on this V tool. Now the next tool which we did over here is called the Page Tool. You'll be able to use this Page tool to click on this Page tool. And then you can see the page is now actually going up. It was not visible on, let's say when we did not have an element. But when we use this, you can see now there is a difference that it does move. Okay. The next one which you have over here is called the Gap Tool. You'll be able to see the gaps if you use this tool, you can see it just like this and you'll be able to fix out or see this margin over here. You can see on the left side, there is also this part where you can see over here, there we go. There we go. See this part. It is matching up to the part where we are using it. Just like this over here, you can see. Okay. So this is how you'll be able to use the Gap tool. And if you just press on them, there will be like just, you'll be able to see the preset or how much size it is. You can see with over here. You'll be able to fix it just like this. And you can also fix it just like this. Okay, so that is basically how it works, or how this Gap tool works and Adobe in Design. Now the next tool, or the last tool which we have is called the Content Collector Tool. Now what does this content collector Tool do? This is going to be a bit complex and a bit simple. Basically, if you have any content collected, then you'll be able to use them up by using placeholders or use a placeholder tool. You'll be able to place it up wherever you want. You can see that I can use it. You can see I have my content, which is this one. And then you'll be able to paste it up right over here, you can see I've made another one just by using this tool. Just like I said, it's not that complex, neither that simple either. You just have to fiddle through a couple of these tools and then you will know how these tools work and how these function up. So make sure to fiddle through each and every one of them. In our next lesson, what we're going to do is going to be covering up all the tools in Edit, Ribbon and also the next five tools. Which is going to start off from this tool which is our content place tool which is B. And if you want to use this content collector tool, first off, hold on to B, will some to use Hit on B. Then you'll be able to toggle through each and every one of them. So these are basically the two tools, one is going to be collecting and one is going to be placing it up. I hope you understood everything about these tools and how you'll be able to use them in our next lesson. Let's just start from our text tool, which I'm going to be using for this one, and we're going to show you how you'll be able to use them while you're working with it. If you have any confusion about this lesson and if you have any confusion about the first part of this lesson, feel free to ask me anything and question me. And I will guide you and help you through the whole process without any further ado. Let's hop on to our next lesson, where we're going to learn about the Ed ribbon and also the next five tools of Adobe in design. 30. Layout ribbon with 5 basic tools part 1: As you can see that I have opened up Adobe in design on my device. Now I'm going to do is open up the new file, just like I do most of the times. And there we go. We have our workspace ready for this lesson. Now we're going to cover up all about this layout ribon. Also, we're going to start off with the Shape tools which we've already used in our previous lessons. But I'm going to show you a couple of methods of how you'll be able to apply them. So the first thing we're going to do is going to be going off to the Layer layout ribbon. The first tool which we see is called the pages. Now the work space or the page which you're working on, that is basically the page. Okay. Now what if I say that you need a couple of pages to make out your booklet or maybe you can also make couple of projects, couple of templates to do that. We're going to need a couple of pages, right? We can also make pages or a couple of pages from the start of making our workspace or getting a project ready. First off, if you are on home and you want to make the pages before you even, let's say start off the project or start off the file, click on like new file and then from there you're going to do is put in the number of pages you're going to need. But obviously, sometimes what happens is that sometimes you are not satisfied with the number of elements inside a small number of pages for that reason, you put on another page for that reason. And to fill up that criteria, you can go off the Layout, go off the Pages, and click on Add Page. The shortcut is going to be control shift, and you can see that I have two pages, 1 and 2. You can go off the pages and select the one which you want to use. This is the one, and this is two, okay? 1.2 So you can also navigate truts. When you zoom out, you'll basically see two pages. Okay? So I'm going to go off the first one. Let's see how it works. Okay, there we go. Do assume a bit out. We have our first page now the short key is control shift. And there we go, R, you can go off the layout, Go off the pages, and then you can see Control shift plus some is control shift plus, there we go. It will make the number of pages for you. Okay, there we have the second page to delete this, you can also delete this page from here. Delete spread, there we go. And press on control shift that you make another page. Okay, Make sure to use the short keys to so that it just works a lot more faster. Okay, then let's go off to Lay out again and go off the pages. Then we have insert pages. You can also insert the number of page where you want it to be inserted. Let's say I want this first page insert after page or before the page at start of document. And you can also fix in the parent. Now I want a parent, which is this one. Press on. Okay. This is the parent of this page. Okay? The parent of this page is this one and this is the A group. Do delete the spread. Delete or you can also make duplicates if you want to. There we go. Is going to be holding or dragging it in such a way so that it just fills up my whole area. There we go. Then go off to Layout again, and the next option is move page. If you have multiple pages, I'm going to do is move one. What I'm going to do is click on Layout. Move the Page. Okay, there we go. And we'll be able to move them wherever we want. I did not apply anything but make sure to fiddle through these tools and you'll be able to see changes. Then you also have duplicate spreads. I'm going to click on Duplicate. There we go. We have two of it at the same page or the same group, and you'll be able to make more duplicates out of it. You can press on control Z to undo the process. There we go on our first and the default page go off to layout again. And the next option is going to be duplicate spread at end of document. Now what happens is that you have a couple of spreads, but there are a couple of groups right now. For that reason, what you're going to do is going to be, first off, duplicate spread at the end of this document. And it will make a document or make a page at the end of the document. Okay? But what happens is that sometimes it creates up on the same group or even on the next group, but both of them are going to be duplicate. But if you have a couple of them, let's go off the layout places. And then Duplicate at the end. There we go. It is now at the end, but this is the parent, so there is no duplicates over here. Okay, so going to press on controls and then remove the ones which I do not need. Now the next one is delete page. You can also delete the page if you want to. You can see Hid spread and also make it visible. It's all up to you. Let's go up to pages and I'm going to do is show spread. We need to spread. The next option or the next tool is called the print spread. Now if you have spread like screens or spreaded pages, if you want that to be printed to, which is double pages, you can also print that up. Now you also have applied parent to pages. You can assign specific pages to specific parent pages if you want to. And you can go through these options. Make sure to apply the parent to a parent or whichever parent you have, and then click the number of pages or click to page where And press on. Okay. And that will be assigned let's show to you, click on Pages, Add the page. I'm going to click on Page at Page. And I'm going to do go off to the second click on it. I'm going to go off a Layout Pages Apply parent page, select it on all pages or select the number of page where you want it to be saved. All pages press on, okay. And you'll be able to assign that parent to that specific, you know, let's say specific file or specific page which you are working on. Now let's take it a bit to the top. The co we off the layout again. The last tool which we have is called the page transition. If you want to apply any transition of how it does move, then fix out the page transition. You can choose or you can edit the ones which you want. You can see the box, the comb, the cover dissolve, fade, push, split, and all of them select the one which you want to use, press on. Okay? And that transition has been applied. I'm going to show you how this transition works later on, at a later lesson. But as this is about the layout ribbon, we're going to finish up these parts and then go off to the next one. Then we have a margins and columns. If you want to fix your margins and columns, which is kind of like the same, you know, it looks like something we've covered up in our previous lessons. So fix out the margins by fixing the top, bottom, inside, outside, fixing the number of columns and gutters. And you can also, by adjusting your layout, by fixing on adjusted fonti, set the font size to the certain size which you want. You can also lock up the content so that you cannot change it later on, or neither, you have to move it. Okay, So I would suggest you to use lock, lock up the elements when you are using margins because obviously you don't want the margin to move, right? And when you're working, you don't want to hold onto the margin. And you know such in a way that you will not be able to align it. So make sure to lock up the elements. When you are using margins, we often layout again. The next to which we have is called the ruler guides. If you want to fix out your ruler guides by fixing the threshold less want, use this person. Okay. And it has been specifically applied. Okay. Now fixing the guides if you want to, even though this is not visible. Because I already have one layer of margin over here, so it's not visible. But if you're using something else or a different color, you'll basically see the difference. Now we also have create guides. You can fix in the number of rows, columns, and also the options. Now I want the number of options to be one column to be one, and I want the gutter to be a bit higher, three. Okay. And I'm going to use Fit the guides to margins and remove existing ruler guides. Percent. Okay. And it has been applied, you can see at the corner of these pages. Okay. Now the next one which we have is called the create alternate layout. Now if you want to create an alternate layout so that you can apply it on that different page or the source page, fix it up, fix the name. Fix on which source you want to make an alternate layout. Then fix in the page size, width, and height, orientation. Fixing the options and the link. Copy text dials and also smart text reflow. Make sure to click on each and every one of them if you want the same things applied on that specific layout. If you don't want them, you can also unlink them or unclick them and then press on. Okay. And it will make up another alternate layout for you, even though this looks the same, but it's going to work up kind of like layers. Okay? So make sure to use it if it, sometimes it is very useful because obviously you don't want to make changes on the default page. So if you want to use these type of layers or alternate pages, make sure to use this and you'll basically see a preview. And you'll be able to see the difference of how you are working and how you are progressing at the same time. If you make any mistakes, just make sure to remove the layout. And that is it. Obviously you will have the base layer or let's say the first layer to be untouched. Okay, so that is why we use that. Now sc, the next tool which we have over here is called a liquid layout. If you want to make a liquid layout, make sure to use this. And you have to go through a couple of these settings which you will find out over here. Okay, so from here, fixing what type of liquid page rule do you want? Fixing the content, fixing the objects. First off, let's want maybe scale, okay? Maybe I say recentered fixing, fixing that option. And then you're going to do is going to be let controlled by parents fixing the outfit. If you want to, if there's any content, if there is any object constraints, fix it up. Fixing the pins. And you are good to go. And this is basically a panel, so you can also paste it right over here. Let's, I want to use this over here so that I can use it for later purpose. Now the next one which you have is called the first page, previous page. Let's make a new page first at a page. I'm going to go off to the first page over here. Go off to Layouts. Let's go off to the first page. This is the first page. On the next page, you can see it over here to the second page over here. And so I'm going to use you the last page. This is the last page which I'm not using, but this is an alternate page. Okay, let's go off the layout again. And then we have this previous page. There we go. We have the previous page go after this one previous page. This is the first one, okay? So you'll be able to toggle through them however you want. And the previous page, and you know, the next page is going to be a bit different because it's going to depend on the one which you've opened up and which one you want to open next. Okay. Or which one is in serial. Then you're going to do is navigate through each and every one of them. You can also use the last page which I've used, just like I said. You can also go to the previous spread. This is the previous spread which is two you can do is fix in. What you're going to do is just fatal through each and every one of them. And each of them have like specific shortcut keys. If you don't remember any one of them or remember like these, make sure to use these tools and make sure to use these commands, which is also sometimes I like to do when there are like a couple of combination. Then we have this previous spread. You can go off to the previous spread just the way you want to. Let's go off. The next tool which we have is go to page. If you want to go to page, let's say I want to use the second page. Let's go over there. And there we go. It has opened up the second page. Let's make a difference over here. I want this circle over the first page. Maybe I want a rectangle to make sure to make a rectangle over here. There we go. Click on Layouts. Let's sum, go to page number two. Hit on, okay, there we go. It has appeared up on the second page. Okay, Make sure to use it and see which one is doable or let's say which one is considerable for you and which you're comfortable with. Then you're going to do is go back. You can also go back to the previous page if you want to. That is basically all about this layout ribbon. Now we have is go back and also front, which is basically also the same as next and previous. Okay? Now the next one is called the numbering and section option. Now, what do you want to set it up as now the starting page. You can also name it up. Let's say I want the starting page to be named as A. Okay. I want automatic page numbering, which is obviously opened up or obviously applied most of the times. You can also fix in the suffix like section prefix. You can fix in, let's do is use three Instead of that, you can fix in section prefix, fix in the style which one you want to use. Let's say I want a couple of zeros and then I want to use this section marker. You can also mark it up with certain text. Then we have this document chapter numbering. Fix it up, whichever one you want to use, and after that press on. Okay. And you can see 003, okay? So this is basically how it works. 11.003 you can put up whichever number you want to use and apply it directly on your page. Now let's go up to the next one, which we have is Table of Contents. Now click on Table of Contents, and you'll be able to change the Table of Contents or what content you are using. Now from here, you can fix in the TOC style, fixing the title, the name. Basically fixing the style of that paragraph. Include paragraph style with whatever content you want to add or remove. Fixing the order style, basic paragraph and no paragraph style. Then we have a style entry style. Okay, which one you want to use it. We have TOC body, basic paragraph and no paragraph style. And you can also make up your new paragraph style if you want to apply any go over here and it will open up those reference settings. Fix on based basic paragraph and from here fix in the new paragraph style. And you can also customize it and apply it directly from here. You can apply style section or selection and press on. Okay. And then you're good to go after that. Make sure you click on. Okay. But there's this create PDF bookmark. Well, I would suggest you to use Create PDF bookmark because if you want a review of your project, of your work, you have to make a PDF and send it to that person. So make sure to click on Create PDF bookmark. You can also make text anchor in source paragraph so that you'll be able to use it like a shape. And you can also remove forced line break. Okay, Make sure to use the ones which you need to fill up your criterias and then press on. Okay. And you can also save up your style if you want to. And there are more options, which is entry style, page number between entry numbers, styles, levels. Run and include text. Click on each and every one of them. Fiddle through each and every one of them, make sure that you are satisfied with what you're working with and then press on. Okay. And all of those edits, or all of those customizations will be applied directly over to your workspace. Now let's go after the next tool, which we have over here is called Table of Contents, which I've already did. So let's go after the next tool which we have over here, which is called update table of contents. Now let's say you made your customized table of contents. You fixed up your criteria, you filled up your criteria, but you want to update the table of contents. Let's make a table of contents first. Samad is use basic paragraph entry style. No paragraph style before entry, number between entry. Say two style to be new character style. There we go. I'm going to do is make sure to select the one. Okay. None I'm going to do is make sure to cancel it up, fix up the levels, sort entries, include press on, okay. You must include one or more paragraph style I'm going to do is click on Basic Paragraph or let's say TOC Include paragraph style with whatever you want and press on. Okay? And you can see that the need, a couple of other ones I'm going to do. Go to Fer Options Entry style, TOC, Body, Basic, Add Person. Okay. And there we go to select on this. And you can see the text has been applied. Now if you want to update the table of contents, just select on the content you want to use and you'll be able to update that content whenever you want. The same type of interface might open up, but if it doesn't open up, you'll be able to update that table of content and customize it just the way you want to. Okay, now one thing is that if it doesn't open up, what you're going to do is change it directly from this option over here or directly from your workspace so that it makes changes on that table of content. Okay, then go of the layout. In the last option is table of content styles. You'll be able to use whichever styles you want, you'll be able to edit them. You can see it from over here. Toc body text, Add TOC tile, add price on, okay. And you'll be able to use whichever one you want to use on your workspace. That is basically all of the tools which we've covered up in this table of contents and also about the layout ribbon. And you can see that there are a couple of these shortcut keys. Now the one thing which I would suggest you to use, one thing I would suggest you to keep thing in mind is that use control shift P to apply on pages or at pages if you want to go, if you want to navigate which number of page you want to open up, press on control J from this layout ribbon. I would suggest you to keep those two things in mind, which is quite simple. Control P is for opening up print, but control shift P, it will open up a new page to go to a page or a certain page measure to click on control J. And it will take you to that certain page from wherever you are on your workspace. So I hope you understood everything about this lesson on how you'll be able to use this layout ribbon, how you can use the shortcut keys, how you can toggle through the number of pages, go back and forth. And also you can also fix the number and section option. And also about the table of content. If you have any or if you have any confusion about any part of this lesson, feel free to ask me anything or feel free to question me. And I will guide you and help you through the whole process. Now in our next part, or let's say the part two of this layout ribbon, we're going to cover up the five basic tools of Adobe in design. And how those tools actually work. So without any further ado, let's just hop onto the lesson by opening up Adobe in Design and also moving on to our part two of this layout ribbon and five basic tools. Hope to see you guys in my part two of this same lesson. 31. Layout ribbon with 5 basic tools part 2: Welcome to part two of Layout Ribbon and five Basic Tools. In this part, we're only going to cover up all of the tools because in our first part we have covered up everything about the layout ribbon without any further ado. Let's just hop on the lesson by opening up Adobe in Design on our device. I'm going to do is open up another file. Let's say I'm going to use this default one and I'm going to use press on Create. We have our work space. Now the tool which we're going to start off with is the Shape tool. Now there are three types of shape, polygon, rectangle, and ellipse. Ellipse is basically the circle. Let's start off with the rectangle. You can make a shape by holding onto your clicky, which is your key, left mouse key. Now if you want a perfect shape, make sure to hold on the shift and make the shape. And there we go, we have our perfect square, we can do the same thing. The shortcut for rectangle is let's press on U and we'll be able to make a rectangle. Press on control z. Now let's go off to the Ellpsol, which is L. For this one I'm going to do is hold on the L, I'm going to make a circle. I can see sometimes this might turn out to be oval. But what if I want a perfect shape? Do the same thing. Hold on the shift, there we go. We have our perfect circle on our work space. The last one which we have is called the polygonal tool. There are basically no shortcuts assigned to this specific shape. Sam is make one. And you can see this is not the perfect shape. But if I hold on the shift, we have our perfect sized polygamal. Another method is that when you are making a shape, when you reach your perfect size, just click on your route mouse key or right mouse key, and you can see the shape has been created. So that is basically how you'll be able to use these tools if you want to color these tools. First off, hold on to V so that you can toggle or let's say switch to the selection tool, select the shape. What'm going to do is put green over here. Go off the Properties, click on Fill and select the color. Now on this polygonal, I want pink. I'm to select on this, go off to fill and find out the pink. Now on this circle I want red. Click on the circle, Click on the fill, and I'm use Red. There we go. We have used or made up our shape colors, Obviously you can customize these shapes. Click on them once, and this yellow option appears up. It helps you to make your corners rounded. Double click on them, and this is how it appears up. You can drag it and you'll basically see that it will be rounded. It doesn't appear up on polygonal or ellipse. Okay. You can just hold onto this drag to and you'll be able to customize a bit more. You can double click on it. Okay? You can see that this is basically the drag into next anchoring point. If there is any anchor point nearby, you'll be able to drag that. Okay, we are basically done with this shape tool. The next tool which we have is called the scissor. If you want to cut up certain parts of an element, you can click on this. There we go. And we can change the way it looks. Let's Sam, click on this. There we go. It has been selected. Use this selection tool. First off, click on this. There we go. Make sure to hold onto that. There we go. You can cut out certain parts and you can see that this line appears up and you can make your customized shape, Salma juice, maybe use something like this. See you'll be able to cut out parts from specific elements when you select on them, I'm going to select on this element. Click on this cut tool and then hold onto this part. And you'll be able to cut them the way you want to. I want this. There we go. We can do the same thing over here. There we go. So is maybe I'm going to press on control Z so that I can undo the process. Okay, not this control Z. You can cut out certain parts and make them look just the way you want to fatal to each and every one of them. And see how it looks. Now the next tool which we have is called the free transform to. There are obviously a couple of other tools to which you'll be able to use. Click on them and there are different tools. The free form tools basically helps you to change them or make them into a free form. You'll be able to move certain elements wherever you want, and if you select on them, you'll be able to customize them too. Okay, The next one we have is Rotate tool. You'll be able to put out your anchor in a specific like part. You can see the anchor over here, put it at the center. And you'll be able to move them from wherever you want in whichever degrees you want to put it up, which angles you want to put it up. And you can also use 13 parts. But one thing you can do is that you'll not be able to move it. Click on V again and make sure to change it now. Click on this again, and you can see that when you right click on these specific tools, whenever you open up this type of interface opens up. Fixing the angle, let's say wants 180 degree angle, press on, okay. And there we go, 180, We're going to put it, this over here. Now the next tool which we have over here is called the scale tool. If you want to extend or maximize the size or increase the size and use this tool, you'll be able to change the size. Let's increase it. There we go. You can also apply press wherever you want, but still it will increase because that is how this tool works. Scale tool, you'll be able to lessen the size and also increase the size whenever you want to. And then we have a sheed tool if you want to share out certain parts like make diagonal something like this, this, this, this and this. There you go. We'll be able to customize it just the way you want to. Okay, So make sure to use this tool whenever you want to and see how it works. Okay, I'm going to do is put it just the way it was if it doesn't just press on control and just undo it to how it was on default. Now the next to which we have over here, we're almost done. Now let's show you the short keys for free form. R for rotate, for scale 2.0 for shear two. Okay? The next to which we have over here is called the gradient to. Now you can hold on to shift or click on shift to us. This now click on any element and you will basically see that it will turn into ingredients. Let's say I want to use this drag on from where you want the gradient to be applied. Let's say I want the gradient to be applied from here, this point to this point. So I'm going to do is hold on like this point and drag it right over here. You can see now this has been applied, I'm going to do is hold onto this element. First off, select the element. My bet m is going to be selecting on this color. There we go, we can see it has been applied. And click on Fill, so that you'll be able to use different kinds and different colors of gradients. Go off the gradient first, click on Type, or click on whichever color you want to use, and then you'll be able to apply them. Okay, Make sure to click on this fill over here. Make sure to select on different colors and then go off the gradients and then change the color how it looks like. Okay, I hope you understood about this gradient tool. And the last tool which we have over here is called the gradient feather too. If you want to apply feathers so you can make it look a lot more smoother, then you can see that this is how this gradient tool works. Okay, Now first off I'm going to do is apply this gradient over on this tool. First I'm going to do is going to be selecting this tool, there we go. And then I'm going to do is going to be applying the gradient first and then apply the feather. First off click on gradient tool, I want this from this side to this side applied. And then I'm going to do is apply this blue color. And then I want to do is make sure to use the gradient. So I'm going to do, just click on this gradient feather tool. Hold on the shift on or you can click on for the grading tool. I'm going to hold on shift and G for this one. And I'm going to do apply the feather. There we go. It has been applied. Now, if you want a different color, make sure to fix the color. Whichever one you want, press on. Okay, there we go. It has been applied and you'll be able to customize it just the way you want to. You can also fix the strokes if you want to. You can fix the color. And you can also apply in filters anytime you want. One thing about this is that you will be able to fix out radial or linear and apply to wherever you want. You can also apply the specific color or specific gradients on let's say text two. That's also up to you whichever one you want to use, but I want to use it on the shape. So I applied it directly on the shape, instead of using it on the text, you'll be able to apply in the angle. So let say wants it as a 40 degree angle and it will be applied in a 40 degrees and you'll be able to apply in effects from over here. You can go off over here, fix in what type of obesity want grading in feather over here. And then you can also apply specific grading two. From here you'll be able to fix out how like let's say the amount of black and amount of whites. You'll be able to swatch it up to if you want to fix in the location, the opacity, fixing the type, and fix at the angle. There you go. Press on. Okay. And it has been applied. If you want to change the color, just make sure to apply whichever color you want to use. We also have deep time as a deep team fix in the color. And you can see the feather and also the gradients has been applied directly. Let's try it out with this last shape over here, Deuce, hold onto. First off, hold onto V, select this element. And then hold on to the fixing the gradients. Fixing a different color. Le Sma Golf over here. Click on any one of these colors. Let's, I want to use pink this time. And then I'm going to do apply on shift and at the same time and then fix in the feather. There we go. We have learned how you can use this gradient tool and how we will be able to apply in feather on our elements or gradients, applied elements. So in our first part we covered up the layout ribbon and in our next part we covered up the next five tools of Adobe in design. And hope you learned everything about this lesson. If you have any confusion about any part, then feel free to ask me any question or, you know, ask me anything and I will guide you and help you through the whole process. So in our next lesson, we're going to fix up, or let's say we're going to cover up all of the tools and all of the commands in this type ribbon. And also the next tool which is going to start off from this one, which is called the node too, Even though you can see that there are not five tools anymore. I'm going to show you how all of these tools work in our next lesson. Then after that lesson, we're going to cover up objects, table view, plug ins, Windows and so on, step by step, lesson by lesson. Thank you for watching this video up till the end. And hope to see you guys in my next lesson of Adobe in Design. 32. Type ribbon and rest of the basic tools part 1: Welcome to our new lesson of Adobe Indesign. In this lesson, we're going to cover up and show you all about the type urbon, whatever tool there is, whatever command there is also. We're going to cover up in the second part of this lesson about the rest of the basic tools which you will find out in the tool panel of Adobe Indesign. Without any further ado, let's just hop on the lesson by opening up Adobe Indesign. As you can see that I have opened up Adobe in design. Now I'm going to do is open up a new file. But before that I would suggest you not to skip any part. Because there are a couple of things which you have to cover up and know before. Let's say starting off or knowing all about the essentials of Adobe in design, let's click on New File. And I'm going to do is make sure to use the default press and create. If you want to make any customizations before getting into the new file, just make sure to customize them and open up your workspace. Now you can see that in our previous lesson we ended up on this grading feathered tool. And we're going to cover up all of the rest of the ones. Okay? But that's going to be in the part two of this lesson. Before that we're going to do is show you all of the things which we have over here on the type ribbon. The first tool which opens up is called the font. If you want to apply any font on any specific text, I'm going to do is make a text over here. Click on this text option, type two I'm going to do is make a box. There we go. We have your type tool and then I'm going to do is use this field with placeholder text to fill it up with text. And then I'm going to do is going to be changing the font however I want. I'm going to do triple click on it. All of them has been selected. Or you can also hold on to control A. Let's show it to you. Keep the cursor inside of this text control. You can see that all of the text has been selected. Now go off to type and click on Font and select whichever font you want to use. Let's say I want to use, this has been applied. If I want to use a different one, Joker Man has been applied. So now you know how you'll be able to use this font or this font command in Adobe in design, in this type ribbon. Now let's go off to the next tool. Let's go off to Type, and the next one is Size. Now all of these settings or all of these tools or commands are basically simple ones with the properties. Just like it says, it's all about the type. It's the type about, let's say the text and all of them. Okay, we're going to fix out and show you all of them on how it works though. If you've seen my previous lesson on how you can use properties, this is basically the same. If you did skip any part, then this lesson is basically for you. So the next to I'm going to do is first off fill with placeholder text. Now you can see the text or the font has been applied already. Now go off the type, now we have the size. If you want to fix out any size, just click on any one of them. We'll say 124. Click on that. And you can see that on a couple of ones there are not all of the sizes. So if you want to fix out or if you want to use that specific size, even if you can't find it on the type or let's say the size command. Just go over here on properties. You can see this over here. Let's say I want to use 23 instead of 24 because there is no 23. Hit on 23, Type it over here, hit on Enter, and there we go. The 23 sized text has been applied on this space. Now I'm going to go off the type again, and the next one is called autostyle. It will detect up that text whichever you have on your workspace and apply a specific text. Click on Autostyle, and you can see that it is processing on the cloud, which is Creative cloud. And after it has been applied, you can see the auto style has been applied over here. And it also gave us a bit of stroke on it and also different type of text. This is a specific paragraph style and this is a specific paragraph style with a different size of that text. This is how it works when you are using autos style. Now you can also suggest or you can also rate, I'm going to do is use no and I'm going to use this and submit. I don't like it that I'm going to do is select it again and go off the type and click on Autostyle. Let's see what changes does it make or does it keep it the same way? Now you can see that like as it has kept it the same way we have to use it. Okay. So sometimes it's going to give you different types of results on different types of text. Make sure to use it. If you have something like a bullets board or something like a list, then obviously it will just suggest you to use the list or use the bullets. Okay? Make sure to use it and see what's up to your desire. So I'm going to keep it selected. Now as we're done with font size and also the auto style, let's go off the character paragraph, tabs, gilts and Story. Now there are specific shortcut keys over here too. I'm going to show you both the methods. Click on character if you want to fix out the character, what type of character you want to use. Now from here, you can also select the first word only. There we go. Let's say it is kept like that and you'll be able to find it out. Well, st'm going to use copy one of it. Now you can see that when this character option opens up and when I have selected any one of it, it is showing me what font is being used, what type of the text it is being used, What's the size, what's the spacing? What's the vertical spacing, or the vertical area? In metrics you can see, then we have is letter R, let's say alphabet spacing. The text spacing, or the line spacing, which you can see from over here, word spacing. And you can see the dents on this one, which is going to be baseline shift and also italic. You can also turn it a bit italic. You can see when you increase it up, it will turn into italic. What I'm going to do is keep it on zero and keep it on enter. Okay. So you can see that whichever one you select it will give you the info or give you the properties of what it is using for that specific type of text or even for that specific type of paragraph. So make sure to use it and check out your text which you're using, which you've selected. Now let's go to the next one which you have over here. It's called the Paragraph. Now you can also open up this character to by clicking on control C. And you can see that this option appears up. And then you'll be able to select whichever text you want to get the info for. Now the next tool which we have over here is called the paragraph. Click on this control alt and, and this paragraph panel opens up. From here, you'll be able to fix out the alignments. You can see fix it out alignments. Fixing out the space. You can see left end. Then we have first line right. You can fix out whatever you want. And then over here we also have the space. Before you can see, we'll be able to apply in the spaces you can see in the middle. Then we also have the spacing of the first text. You can see that you'll be able to make sure that you can capitalize or make it upper scaled and bigger than the other text, which is going to be the first one. And you can also fix it up just like this. You can apply it if you want to, which is going to be the second text or the specific text. But you have to fix it up, okay? Then you can also fix in the shading if you want to. And you can also apply in a bit of border fixing those, Let's say I want shading, I want borders. Then I'm going to do is make sure to change the color if you want to. Let's say I want blue. And you can also fix the border. Let's say I want the border to be read. You can see now this is how it looks like. Okay, let's just zoom in a bit because you know, this is quite small. So I'm going to do is cut this part off because we are basically done with, you know, the paragraph settings or the paragraph tool and commands. Now the next tool which we have over here is called the tabs, if you want to apply tabs. Now I'll show you how the tabs work, Okay? Now, first things first I'm going to do is make sure to, let's say I want a bit of tab right over here. Here's going to be the first tab. There we go. And then I'm going to do is going to be make another tab over here. Put this over here, another one over here, and another one over here. Now what I'm going to do is going to be cut this one off. Okay, let's just keep it over here. Now, when I hit on tab, you will see that it will make a spacing. You can see this is the tab where I have my line on. This is the place I have my tab on. So you can also applied right over here by clicking on them, or you can fix it up just by clicking on this. Now if I click on something over here and it will align to that specific line. Well, someone hit on this and you can see that it is on the specific line. Okay? So this is how it works. You can also see the changes on the stay space or let's say you working space, so you'll be able to find out whichever, let's say sometimes when you are making, let's say a list. Now you want all of them starting from the same line or the same space, or the same inches. Then you can use this. Instead of like using space over and over again. You can just hit on tap and that is how you'll be able to navigate. I'm going to do is let's show it to you again. I'm going to press on controls for a couple of times and keep it at like same line. Now I'm going to do is going to be finding out, let's do keep it over here. Okay. Now I want this line to be aligned to this one. Take this over here, hit on tab, and you can see that it has been aligned directly to this text. We can do the same thing over here, tab. Now it is a bit more space because there are a couple of texts which are going missing. Okay? So that is why it is not doable sometimes, but make sure to use it whenever you want, because now this text or this sentence over here is kind of very congested. Now, whenever it finds some space, it will go off to the next line. So now you know how you'll be able to use tabs. Now if you want to remove these, just drag it out. Or just drag it out of this ruler. And then you're good to go. I'm going to press on this one I'm going to do is take it at the beginning. There we go, and we are done. I'm going to select on them again, and I'm going to do is justify them just the way I want to. Okay, now as we are done with tabs, let's go off to the next one. Now the next tool which we have is called the glyphs. Now if you want to apply glyphs, which is going to be kind of like symbols. Now first things first, find out open space. There we go, go off the type, go off the glyphs, and then you'll find out different ones. Okay. Now you can see that there are none, but obviously there's going to be something usable. So you'll find out the glyphs option over here. You'll be able to use whichever glyphs you want to use. Let's say from here I want to use currency. It will appear up over here. And if you still don't find them, just make sure to open up another one and try using it. And sometimes it does appear up when you have an open space. And let's say you can also use different types of gifts. Okay, glyphs over here. And it will be applied directly off to your workspace. Select them, make them it's bigger and you are good to go. Okay, now let's go to the next tool, which we have over here, is called a Story. Now the shortcut for guild, or glyph is called the Alt shift. And F two eve, or let's say F 11. And if you want to make a story now there are optical margin alignments and fixing of Dan. You have to fix them up, select on them, and then make sure to apply them so that it looks a lot more better. And you can also justify them just the way you want to. Okay, make sure you get your desired size and desired customization and then you're good to go. So the next tool which we find over here is called the character styles. Now, what type of character styles do you want to use? Let's say I want to use tabular lining number, you'll be able to use none and also customize it just the way you want to character style one. Now first off, what you have to do is make sure to make your own character style, customize them a bit, and then make it up first. And then keep it on your character style so that you'll be able to use the same style, same customization, same formatting on different texts too. Okay, now the next tool which you find over here is called a paragraph style hit on F 11 to open this up. Now this works the same way. Make sure you have your own type of paragraph style. And you can also see that there are a couple of styles which you can use from over here. Make sure to use the one which you want and if you don't want any of them, make sure to just undo the process. You can see subheading and this is how it will look like. So that is basically how it works on paragraph styles. And you can obviously make your own type of styles and apply it. First off, save it, and also apply it on your specific text. Okay, now the next tool which we find over here is called to create outlines. If you want to make an outline of those specific texts, make sure to make that you can see the outline has been made and you'll be able to use it just the way you want to. And in other software of Adobe, such as Illustrator, Photoshop, when you make an outline, you'll be able to use it like a shape. But over here, as this is also like a graphic designing software, you can also go over type and make outline and use it just the way you want to. Then we have is find and replace font. Now from over here, we have to check first what font we're using. Then you're going to do is going to be find first, find out the text, what is being used. And then you can see font family meaning pro regular. But you will be able to change it and obviously the font which is being used will also be founded. And then you'll be able to change it done, and change the ones which you want to. Okay, So that is how you'll be able to find and replace fonts. It works the same way how you use find and replace on the text or any element. Then we have a change case. You can use this, you can see the same thing is over here. Change case, You'll be able to use this change case from this section two. Make sure to use it. I'm going to keep it on let's say sentence case. And you can see first alphabet, our first alphabet over here is capitalized, same is over here, capitalized. And even after every question or every full stop, there is a capital Okay. So make sure to use the ones which you want. And you can also turn it upper case and lower case just the way you want to. Then we have this type on pat, which is basically the same tool over here. If you have a text, you'll be able to use it. In our previous lesson, we covered it up, so I'm going to skip that Spart out. Then we have notes. Now, how does this notes work? First thing is that if you've used a couple of softwares like Presentation Canva, then we have Word, Photoshop, Illustrator, you have comments, right? So that is the same work of these notes. Make sure to put a note, or let's say note mode. You can see this is a note mode right now. Then you'll be able to put in your comments whatever you want to put or you know how a note looks like. You'll be able to customize it and apply whatever type of effect, whatever notes you want to put it there. And you can also convert a specific text into a convert to note. And you can see that this has turned into a note right over here. You can see that this is the part, when you select on it, you can see the whole text, okay? So that is basically how it works on notes. Okay? You can convert to note and you'll be able to apply a note to just the way you want to. And when you click on that icon, it will show you the notes or show you the comment which any person has applied or given to you. So that you can, you know, specify or specify to you that you have to do this or that. Okay. Then we have track changes. Now I can also track the changes just the way you want to. You can also change the track in current story, enable tracking, accept changes, reject changes. Well, this is a bit complex so I'm going to do is just skip this part, but you can also see accept all changes in the story now if you are working simultaneously with a team. Now you want to see that what changes did they make? And you can accept it, or even rejected according to your need. And it can also make changes previous, next change. And you'll be able to track them down however you want to. And it just makes your work a lot more easier to see what changes have been made to your work. Then we have this Insert Footnote. If you want a footnote, you can see the footnote has been applied. If you want a headnote to, you will be able to use that. Then we have this document Footnote Options. It will open up the interface. You will be able to see the options which you can see over here, properties. Now there's basically nothing. So there's nothing to apply or no settings over here. The next one is called the insert end note, and that is basically the end note over here. And that is how this end note works. You can see the end notes over here. Now this makes a new page for a certain reason because obviously you don't want the end note or you don't want the end paper to be visible on, you know, let's say sequence or on your work project. So you'll be able to save this up individually and also save it up individually. So it's up to you however you want to work with it. Now, the next one is called the let's say Document end note option. If you want to see the options, you can see it over here, basically the same one. If you've seen my previous lesson, you already know how this works. You'll be able to fix in the prefix suffix, paragraph style, positioning, the numbering, everything, okay? So make sure to fiddle through each and every one of them and see how it works. Okay. Now the next one which you have over here, you go off to type. And the next one is called this Convert Footnote End Note. You can click on it and you'll be Footnote to End Note. And you can also turn Endnote to Footnotes and fix out the document or the selection. If you want to use selection, first off, you have to select the page first where you have the footnote or where you have the end notes. But if you click on Document, it will, you know, just, you know, just analyze this whole file which you have, open and convert footnote to end note and also end note to footnote. If you're done, just click on Convert and it will turn the footnote into the end note and end note into footnote. So that is it. We're done for this part. Now the next one is called the hyperlinks and cross reference. You can convert URLs to hyperlinks too if you have a couple of URL's opened up on your text or if you put a couple of texts there. So I would suggest you to use hyperlinks because sometimes when you're using PDF or you are saving it as a different format of data or format of file, sometimes it is not able or sometimes you cannot open up URLs because that turns into a text. So for that case, hyperlink is used so that you will be able to use the hyperlink whenever you want in whichever format you want to use. Okay, So make sure to use that. It is like the same way which we did on properties. The text variable is a bit different. You can apply variables of chapter number, let's say going to click on this text. I'm going to go off on type and I'm going to go off the text variables. You can insert the variable, let's say one on the chapter number. You can see chapter number one. And you'll be able to put in dates and a lot of them just the way you want to. Okay? Make sure to use it. It will look a lot more better and professional at the same time. Now, the next one we have is called the bulleted and numbered list. Apply the bullets if you want to apply the text. Now if you want to go through the settings, you can go off to the settings from Go to type go over here and you can go off the defined list and you'll be able to customize the way you want to. Okay, then we also have the settings. In our previous lesson, I've shown you how you'll be able to use the settings. Even if you do not know, just go off over here on your properties. First off, select on this text, go off the option, and then fix out the type of list you want to use, okay? And you can also fix out the indents, the spacing, how it's supposed to work, and everything, Okay, so the next tool which we find over here is called the Insert special characters. If you want to use symbols, markers, hyphens and dashes, quotation marks, and others. If you cannot use it on your keyboard, but you want special characters, you'll be able to use them directly from over here. And each of them have like specific shortcut keys. You can see it over here. Make sure to use them, fiddle through them, just click on them and it will be applied. Okay, so I'm going to do is first off zoom in, keep it over here. Text symbols, let's say I want to use ellipsis. There we go, has been applied. You can obviously just put in a couple of pull ups, but it doesn't look the same way. Right? You can see all of them selected at the same time. Make sure to use it if you want to and see how it works. Okay, go off to type again and the next tool which we find over here is called the Insert white space if you want to apply in a bit of white space. Now this white space plays a very good role in making your work look a lot more professional. Now, there are a couple of things you have to understand before making in a design. The first thing about it is you have to know the alignments. You have to follow a couple of steps, which is going to be alignment hierarchy and the wide space or which is called the spacing. Now when you combine these together, you will obviously be able to make your work look a lot more professional because alignment plays like a very essential role. Then we have hierarchy, what elements you're putting and where you are putting that, which combines it together with alignment. And the last one is spacing. If you have like a lot of elements in your page and it looks very congested, no breathing space. So make sure to apply in a bit of white space so that it looks a bit of clear and clean, and also spacious. Okay, so let's just let the elements breathe a bit, okay? So you have to follow that. And then you'll be able to put in space if you want to. You can see this is how it works. Nothing but you'll be able to see a space over there. Okay? And you can also fiddle through each and every one of them and apply whichever one you want to use here. Space, six space, tin space. And you can also see that there is a shortcut key for them. And you can also see non breaking space which you will not be able to break. You can see this is the part, so this is how it works. Okay. So what is this non breakable space? It's because that you cannot put your text or you cannot put anything in between them. So it is like a very small space, but when you make a couple of them, it will be something like that which you can't put any text inside of it. Okay. So it's just going to make you a space for the breathing room. Okay, Then the next type to Gove over here is going to be Insert Break Character. If you want to apply in a column break, frame, break, page break, ultra prag break, and so on, make sure to click on any one of them. Let's say I want a page break, and the page break has been applied directly on your workspace. Let's click on over here to see the changes by brake characters frame break. And you can see the brake has been applied. Okay, so that is basically how it works in Adobe in design. Let's use this tool, Reduce, press on control Z, and there we go, it is back again. Okay, so let's click on them again so that I can go after my text tool because we have a couple of them to cover it up. The next tool which we find over here is called the fill with placeholder text. Basically the same one as this one. Click on this and it will fill it up with text whichever one you want. The last tool which you find over here is called the show hidden characters. When you apply in text, there are a couple of hidden characters indents. There are a couple of ellipses and a lot of them. When you click on this, you'll be able to see the couple of breaks, a couple of spaces, which you can see over here, and also a couple of spaces in between them. It also even shows the spaces and how it is working. If you want to see them, just make sure to apply it or make sure to click on Show Hidden Characters and you'll be able to see them. One thing is that make sure to not remove those because those are quite important because those mainly fix out your alignments, fix out your textile, and just basically fix out everything over there, okay? You can see that this is this part over here where it is taking a space so that it can start off the text right over here. But if I cut this part off, it will go off on this space or go off on this open space, which I had. So that is basically how it works. Make sure to use all of these tools and commands so that, you know, just find out the ones, whichever one you need fiddle to each and every one of them to see which ones you need and how you can use them. Hope you understood everything about this part of this lesson on this type ribbon. In the next part of this lesson, I'm going to cover up almost all of the tools, or the rest of the tools which you have on this tool panel of Adobe in design. Just like I said, make sure to not skip any part because there are a couple of things which you have to learn before getting into or before learning the whole thing or the essentials about Adobean Design. And the rest of the things, you can just, you know, fiddle through each and every one of them and see how it works on your own. So thank you for watching this video until the end. So let's move on to our part two of this type ribbon and also the next, or the rest of the five, or rest of the tools, or the basic tools of Adobe in design. If you have any question or any confusion about this lesson, feel free to ask me and I will guide you and help you through the whole process without any further ado. Let's just hop on to the second part of this lesson. 33. Type ribbon and rest of the basic tools part 2: Welcome back to the part two of this type ribbon and rest of the basic tools. In the first part of this lesson, we covered up all of the commands, all of the tools of the type ribbon. Now in this lesson we're going to do is finish up the rest of the basic tools which we have on the tool panel of Adobe in Design. Without any further ado, let's just hop on the lesson by opening up Adobe in Design on our device. As you can see that I have come back to where I left from. Okay, we covered up all of the tools in this type ribbon. Now we're going to do is start off from this tool which is called the node to Now, in our first part of this lesson, I've shown you how you'll be able to apply in notes. But there is a specific tool for that, which is the note to when you click on this note too. And you can also apply the notes on any specific part. But make sure that it has a text in it. Click on the textbox, which you can see over here. Click on it and you'll be able to apply in whatever text you want to apply as a note. So that you can deliver it or convey it to someone you want to see or you want to publish. Okay, so make sure to apply the notes. And another advantage is that it's going to also show you the author name, the date you created it, the date you modified it, also the time. And if there's a story units, how many pages the note number and how many characters, words, everything is going to detect basically everything. Okay, so that is basically how this note tool works in Adobe in design. So make sure to fiddle through it and use it up and see how you'll be able to use it. It's basically just like a comment or attaching a comment to any specific word so that you can convey up any specific stuff or any specific, you know, text, what you want that person to do or maybe you want that person to notice. Okay, so there we go. We have done our note to the next tool which we find over here is called the color team tool. Now first of this is basically like let's say an eyedropper tool or let's say color picker tool select on it and then it will give you out the color. Okay, You can see you have selected one color and then you'll be able to select out more and you will be able to apply the team. I can see when you drag onto it, you'll be able to see the color and then you'll be able to use whatever color you want to use. Let's say you'll be able to apply it and also take that specific color whenever you want. Okay, So that is basically how it works and Adobean Design. So first up, what you get to do is click on that color. You can see that I have picked up some color and I can also apply directly on that specific text or even on the stroke. Okay, so that is how it works and you'll be able to apply in more colors. If you want to go off to add team, you'll be able to add that specific team too. And it can also change the color. Let's say I want to use blue. You can see Swatch blue. Press on. Okay. And then you'll be able to change out colors. Let's say I want to use this press on. Okay, there we go. Do swatch it up. And I can apply whatever color I have and also apply directly to my whole text altogether. Okay, so that is basically how it works in Adobean design with this Team tool or Team color pick to the next one is called Eyedrop or two, which is specific over here. Select what color you want to use. You can see that there is still a bit of black. I'm going to do this, right click on it. I'm going to click on this tool. There we go. You can still see black if I click on this. Okay, it's going to detect your text first. But later on detect, let's say first off, try to change the color of this text. First off the properties, I'm going to just click on Phil. From here I'm going to just put in yellow, There we go. And is going to be use this color tool. And you can see that even though there is this black color applied, you can see over from here. But it will select up the parts which it has blacks in it. Okay? So make sure to use the tool whichever one you want. And the last one is called the measure tool. If you want to measure out any part will Sema is use this up from here to here. It will show you the measurement the Sam do is want to measure it from here, two here. And you can see the measurement which is on the x axis, Y, X is and WH, and also the angles and also the diameter, 12 and unnamed. And if there is, gradients are not, so make sure you use it just the way you want to summon. You just click on this and there we go, the ruler has been removed. Okay, so the next tool which we have is very basic, and I've already covered about it. So this is the hand tool which you'll be able to navigate through this whole document or file which you have opened up in Adobe in design. And when you press on your right mouse gate will stop. Okay, So that's how it works with this hand tool. And the last tool which we have is called the zoom too. If you want to zoom in and out, you can see now it is only zooming it. But if you hold onto Alt, you can see the magnification glass has turned into minus. First it was plus. You can see when it's plus when I'm not holding onto Alt on my keyboard. But when I press Alt on my keyboard, it will basically turn into a minus. So you can toggle through them. Just click on that once, and it will turn out to be different. Now this is plus. If I hold onto Alt again, minus, and then I will be able to zoom in. You can see I'll be able to zoom in now or zoom out. Okay? And then I'm going to use this hand tool to navigate through it, and that is basically how it works. Okay, Now let's go to the next tools. So the next tools are basically all about the color. Okay, now there is this color palette over here, and then we also have another one. Now this is basically the primary color, which is opened up at the top, and the one sitting under it is called the secondary color. Now from here, which is no field, so I can also apply a bit of color on it, double click on it, and this RGB space opens up Fix in whichever color you want to use. Let's say I want to use something like this. We can also apply in hex codes. You can also apply HSB or RGB and also see in Y K, whichever color you want to use. And then what you're going to do is press on, okay, If you need that color and you can see you'll be able to apply that specific color too, and you can swatch them up. First thing is that when you click on this field X, and then we have a stroke. Click to activate, press on X again, and it will just toggle through each and every one, apply whatever color you want to apply. And you'll be able to see the color of that specific text or specific line. You can see now this is black, control Z, but I want a different color, so you'll be able to apply that color to whenever you click on this stroke. Okay, So that is basically the stroke and that is basically the feel. So if you have any text applied, what I'm going to do is select up this text. And then from here I'm going to use fixing the text color. First, double click on it. Let's say I want a bit like this on the stroke, I'm going to first on press on, okay? And I want a bit of stroke. I'm going to just keep it black person, okay? And you can see that I have black stroke. And also the color, or let's say this color of stroke and also the color which I need. So that is basically how it works, black and pink at the same time, okay, So this is how you will be able to swatch up colors and then we have a secondary pellet. Now if you want to just get back to the black and white very fast, just click on this option and it will swatch up fast. Let me just show it to you again that we'll click Person. Okay. Double click person. Okay, We have the special color, right? But I want to switch back to, you know, black and white. Instead of just, you know, removing them and selecting on black and white, just click on this one. And there we go. It has been swashed up very easily. Click on it again, and it will remain the same. Okay? So make sure to use that, and you can just press on D, you'll be able to use the default, okay. That is basically the default color, which is black and white. Now the next one is called the Formatting Effect container. And also we have text. Now if you want to apply effect on a text, make sure to click on this text option. It will detect it up on its own, but you can also use it whenever you want. That is for the box or any object. If you are applying any object, you can see it has detected the object. And you'll be able to apply colors to press on. Okay. And you can see the color has been applied. That is basically how it works on text, also on elements or graphics, whichever one you're using. And the next ones which we have over here is called the Apply color. Apply gradients and also Apply None. Click on None and you can see that there is no color. If you want to apply gradient, just click on gradient. Gradient has been applied. If you want field color, click on that and we'll also have a field color. Then you can also swatch up the colors directly from over here. Fix in whichever color you want and then you get to go. If you want to get back to its default color, just click on default. There we go. It has been applied directly. The next ones or the last ones which you have is called the View option. Now what do you want or how do you want to view your workspace? Do you want frame edges? You can also keep it. You can see frame edges has been removed. Now, you can also remove the rulers. You can even remove the guides. You can remove the hidden characters too. If you want to apply those, you can just lock on them. Again, we'll say I want baseline grids, I want smart guides, I want guides too. And then I want rulers. And also I want Framemages. You'll be able to use that and also align up your text and elements just the way you want to and fix it up at a correct position and make it look a lot more professional. And the next one is called the normal view and also preview. So there are a couple of views which you'll be able to select from. You can see this is the normal view and then we also have preview of how it's going to look like of your page. Then we also have bleed, if you have any bleeds applied, you can see like the bleeds off your text of the bleeds off your elements. The next one we have a slug. If you have any slugs applied, you'll be able to see those slugs. You'll be able to customize it just the way you want to. And the next one is called the presentation mode. Now you can go off the presentation mode and present up your documents or any of your file whenever you want to. And that is going to look a lot professional, okay? And if you want to get out of this viewing mode, just press on Escape and then you are out of this mode. So if you've used Adobe Photoshop, Illustrator and all of those after effects, then you already know that there are a couple of viewing modes in Adobe software of how you are going to present up your file or how you're going to work on it. So that is basically the same thing over here on the modes over here of preview bleeds, lock and presentation. And then we also have the normal view. So that is how it looks like and how you'll be able to work with it. In our previous lesson, I've already showed you how you'll be able to zoom in and out by clicking on this options too, fixing the number of magnification, and then you'll be able to use whichever zoom size you want to use. So hope you understood everything about this lesson. And we are done with our tools ribbon or let's say our tools panel of Adobe in design. And we have covered up everything about it. So hope you guys understood everything. And I would suggest you to not skip any part about these tools on how these work. Because later on in this lesson or later on in the course, we're going to use a couple of, you know, let's say a couple of these ribbons where we're going to need usage of these tools. So let's say if you skip any part in these previous lessons and you might face a couple of problems later on, so I would suggest you to work, or let's say practice on these tools a bit and see how those work. But if you still have any confusion and any question about any of these parts or any of these lessons, feel free to ask me and I will guide you and help you through the whole process. So hope to guys see you in my next lesson where I'm going to cover up everything about this object ribbon. And also what we're going to do is fix out, or let's say complete all of the commands which we have and everything about this on how it works. So let's hop onto our next lesson of Adobe in design. 34. Object functions: Welcome back to an adolescent of Adobe in Design. In this lesson, we're going to cover up all the tools and commands in the Object ribbon. Now there are a couple of them. Make sure to not skip any part, because if you do, you might miss out on something without any further ado. Let's just hop on the lesson by opening up Adobe in Design on our device. As you can see that I have opened up Adobe in Design. Now I'm going to do is open up a new file. We'll say I'm going to do is use this default just like I did in my previous lessons. And then what I'm going to do is going to be going off to this object ribbon. Now before that, just like it says, it's about the objects or customization on objects and how you want to format it. We're going to use this format tool for this lesson too. I'm going to do this. First off, make a rectangle tool, okay? Now as I've made in a rectangle and then we have a shape and then I'm going to put in a bit of color on it so that we can see the changes or however we want to format it. I'm going to do keep it on the selection tool and keep it at the middle when you go off the object. Now the first command or the first tool which we have is called a transform. Now there are a couple of things how you can transform up a shape. Now you can move it up, scale it, rotate it, and even share it up. And there are a couple of other methods which you can also quickly apply, or those are like quick applied buttons. From here we have this option of move. The shortcut key of move is control shift. And click on that, and you can see that this type of panel opens up. Now from here, you'll be able to fix out the position on the horizontal scale and also the vertical scale. And then from there, you'll be able to fix the distance and also the angle of how you want it to look. Now it's going to rotate it just a bit. First off, make sure to fix in your horizontal and vertical scale, you can see it is in inches. I've already shown you how you'll be able to internationalize your sizes in Adobe in design. Now I'm going to do is going to keep the distance to be, let's say I want one inches or let's say 2. ". An angle I'm going to do is put in a 30 degree angle. After that, you can get a preview if you want to. Or you can either choose to, you know, directly apply it. Let's directly apply it. And if there is any changes then we're going to do is under the process invalid numeric value, MD is going to be put in. Let's say five or four. Okay, from here vertical I'm going to do is put in. Okay, there we go. And then we have the change of the specific object over here. It has been taken from here to here. Let's just show it to you by undoing the process. Now you can see this was over here and it should be over here. Okay, that is where it has been. Now I'm going to do is going to be going off the Object ribbon and go off to transform again. And then we'll be able to scale it up to, let's say from here I'm going to do is make sure to put in 120, 5% so that it increases a bit on the scale of y. I'm going to put in 150. Enter. Okay, there we go. Now you can see the scale or the size of this shape has been changed and also extended. Now the next tool which we have over here in transform is rotate. If you want to rotate up your shape, which you have on your work space, just click on this over here or this box, and then put in the rotating angle. Let's add 120 degree angle. Press on Ok, and this is how it looks like. Okay, now let's go to the next one which we have is called the shear tool. Now if you want a shear angle on the specific object which you have selected, then fix in on which angle do you want it to shear, horizontal or vertical? Let's just show it to you by vertical. And then from here I'm going to fit the shear angle to 30 made, press on. Okay, so now you can see that it has been shared up in the vertical axis by 30 degrees. Okay? So make sure to customize it on your own and see whichever size you want and you'll be able to customize it, format it just the way you desire. Okay, now let's go off the next one on transforms. We have like these quick applied settings. Now you can see flip horizontal, flip vertical. Then we have rotate at certain degrees. And then we also have cleared the transformation. Let me show two of them to you. Let's say I want 90 degrees or 180 degree. You can see 180 degree has been applied. We press on controls under the process, go off the object, the next one is going to be flip vertical. And there we go, we have our vertical text, our vertical shape being flipped. The next one over here, I'm going to press on control shift, can see to under the process. And I'm going to keep it inverted. And then I'm going to do is going to be removing these transformations so that it gets back to its default form. Click on that and you can see it has been taken back to its default form. Or you can also go off the object and make changes by sharing, it will be more visible. 30. Okay, and that I'm going to do is go off the object transform, clear transformation, there we go. We have our shape totally in the default form. Okay, so now you know about how these tools on transform or you know, move works. Okay, so the next tools which you're going to find out over here is called the transform again. Now this is basically kind of like an undoing and redoing process. From here you'll be able to transform it back again to how it was. And this is kind of like undoing the process. Let's just click on that. And you can see transform again. And you'll be able to transform whatever you want with the specific text or specific options. Now click on the ones which you want. Let's Emma duce transform sequence again, individually and there we go. It has been transformed. Okay, So make sure to use this and you find out the ones which you want to use. So the next tools which you're going to cover up is going to be arranged. Well, in our previous lesson, I've already shown you how you can use this arrange option in Adobe in design. And that is basically kind of like the same. Let's make another box over this, Emma us put it to be pink in color. Let's just take this and use this. Okay, so we have two colors I'm going to do. Make sure to hold on to the or, click on the selection tool and then I'm going to do is put it underneath this blue one. So I'm going to go off the object, click on arrange, and send it backwards. So now I can see that on this panel it is underneath, or the square is underneath this rectangle, okay? So find out the use of this and make sure to use it well. Okay, I'm going to do is go off the object again. And the next one we have the select options. Now there we have first object above, then next object above. And you'll be able to select out surtain elements in your workspace. Now I'm going to do is make sure to or let Sema select this part or this shape, but this one is underneath it. Now if I want to use this shape, I can either click on it or you can also go off Object, click on Select, and then select the next object above Jens, next object. I'm going to go off the object again, click on select next object above. Or you can also go off the object again. And then from here you're going to select next object below. Okay, so make sure to use the ones, whichever one you want to use. And if any Certane object is on the same panel or the same layer, then you'll be able to select them too at the same time. But for that purpose you cannot use Shape, but instead you have to use like a couple of photos, or elements, or graphics which you have on your device. And you have to import them or place them up in Certane frames. Now you know how you'll be able to use this select. Now I'm going to do is going to be selecting all of them at the same time. Now if you want to do that, just make sure to press on control eight on your workspace. Both of them has been selected object, and then we have this group. If you want to group up any element together, then click on Group. And there we go, we have this group and they will move together. Okay, So you can use them too. And you can also ungroup them if you want to, so that you'll be able to use them individually. From here I'm going to do is go off to the next one which you have is lock. When you lock up any element, graphic or photo, you will not be able to customize it or even move it. So if you feel like you want to use it, then make sure to lock it up. And obviously you don't have to worry about it because there is this option to unlock it. Click on it and it will be unlocked, or I'm going to do is lock it up again. And then you can also go up Object and also click on this option called Unlock All Spread. There we go. It has been unlocked and this is also underneath this panel or underneath this workspace, not even the workspace. It's just underneath this rectangle which we see on our screen. Now on the next one which we have is called the hide. If you want to hide up any element from your workspace, just click on Hide. And obviously you can go off the object and show it back again. So you can see all show all spread and the element will appear up back again. But if you have it hidden, you will not be able to customize it or do anything on it. Okay. So make sure to use it and if it comes to handy, obviously keep on doing it or keep practicing about it. And you also see that there's going to be a lot of work space left. And obviously, just like I said in my previous lesson, that, you know, making a professional type of, let's say design is going to need a couple of things. Alignment, chi, and also the spaces or the white spaces in your project or your file. So you can use it to see which one you can discard or which one you want to use. And then now I'll just continue the same steps over and over again. Now the next one is going to be Insert HTML. Now if you want to apply any HTML or URL on any specific object, just click on Insert HTML. And then this type of interface opens up. And then you'll be able to use whatever HTML is to put, so that you can customize it too. So obviously you know what HTML is. Hypertext, okay, Hypertext markup language. You'll be able to use those two, and obviously you'll be able to use CSS. Okay. So make sure to use it if you want to. But obviously, I'm not going to suggest you to use it if you are a beginner. It's going to be a bit complex when you start off CML, because that is a whole different section of, let's say, learning and studying about it. The next one which you have is called a generated QR code. Now if you want to make a QR code out of your project, or out of your file, or whatever element you have on your workspace, then click on Generate QR code. Click on that and it will make you up. A QR code over here. Then put in the content and it will make it up. So I'm going to do is put GHG press on, okay. And you can see the QR code has been applied. Now you can use any of your scanners to check whatever it is and obviously make sure to, let's say, use the Internet or keep the Internet connection because that's going to help you a lot. You can just drag it out whichever or wherever you want to, and you can see this is how it will look like. Okay? So make sure to hold on to that. The circle is going to be the holder where you'll be able to place it. Okay? So make sure to use it whenever you want. I'm going to drag it a bit at the top so that I can see it. Now, the next ones which we have over here, the next tool which we have on the object is called extract from image. Now you can extract certain parts. There could be color teams, shapes or types. Let's say I want to use the color team. So there we go. We have the blue. You can see the blue has been selected. You can see this is how it works, color team next. And you can see the teams which you'll be able to use for this specific color. Okay? So it just gives you off an inspiration or ideas about which colors to use and how it will look good. Now let's get the shapes. You can see the shape is a cure code. You'll be able to fix the details. This is like a very simple editor. Then you will be able to smooth in on save and invert it up even if you want to. The last one is type, now place the section around it. Now I'm going to select it and then I'm going to find similar funds. So what happens is that it detects surtain photos or surtain text or fonts, whichever you want to use. Let's say you want to put in text and you want to find out what type of funds go out or go on with this specific font which you've scanned up. So make sure you use that, okay. And after you've done, just save it to CC Cloud or you can use the ones which you want to use. You can see and you will be able to use it directly from Adobe in design. Now the next tool which we have over here is called the text frame option. Now if you have any text, I'm going to do is make sure to put in the text over here. There we go. I'm going to do is put it over here. Go off the properties I'm going to do is fill it with placeholder text. Go off the object again, and then we have this text frame option you will be able to fix in the text frame, you're going to fix out the columns, the numbers, the gutter width, maximum. Then we have is insert spacing, vertical justification, and also ignore text rep. Rather than that, we also have column rules, baseline option, auto size, and also footnotes. Whichever one you want to use, just make sure to enable them. You can see all is turned off. So make sure to enable and then press on. Okay. And that specific customization or formatting will be applied directly off to your, let's say Textbox, which you have over here on your workspace. Now the next ones or the next tools which you have over here on this object panel or this object ribbon is going to be this anchored object. Now you can put in anchors in your specific object. I'm just click on Insert and just customize it a bit. Fiddle to each and every one where you want it. Let's say you'll be able to name the content. Fixed object style paragraph style height, then positioning relative spine. Then we have this reference point, Lisa, two is put in the middle. Then we have this reference point on the pages or the booklets. Then we have this x relative, okay, Then we have this y relative, and then we have a keep within top bottom column boundaries. The last one you see is called the prevent manual positioning. Okay? So fix in the ones and put the data or whatever customization you want to put on this panel. And then if you're done with it done editing it, just press on. Okay. And you'll be seeing that the changes has been applied. So as I did not put anything there, you can see that, you know, I'm just skipping at that part because it is kind of, you know, kind of complex when you just go off to cover a lot of tools. But even if you do need any of these tools, which you can see anchored objects and you want to insert that part out so you'll be able to use them to, let's say I'm going to do is just put on an example. From here I want to use this basic text frame. And then from here I'm going to put in one inches on all sides. The positioning I want in line. And then you can fix in the white offsite. Okay? Then what you're going to do is going to be pressing on. Okay, And it will be applied directly. And you can also see the anchor being used. Okay, So I'm going to do is just put this anchor a bit at the bottom. You'll be able to fix it up just the way you want to. Okay, now as we are done with this anchored object, now the next tool which we have is called the fitting. Now if you have any elements on your workspace, and then you want to fit it up, fit the content on a specific frame. Then use these options. Use these tools. Now from here, I want to fit frame to content. You can see the frame has been fitted directly to content. Use it, fiddle with it, and find the one which is useful for you. Now, the next tool you have over here is called the effects. Okay, first off, let's go up to content, which is basically the ones as fitting. If you have any content there, you'll be able to use these content tools. From here, you'll be able to put in graphics, text, or unassigned content inside of a box or inside of a shape, or even a text box. Now the next one which we have is called the effect. Now, whatever effect you want to apply on a specific text or object, you will be able to apply it. L senado, select this object, go off the object and then we have this effect. And I want a bit of transparency, sad is put in a lot to us. Here we go. I'm going to cover up all of these tools. From here I'm going to press on, okay. And you can see the transparency has been applied. Now let's go to the next one over here on effect we have drop shadow. You'll be able to get a preview too if you want to let set put in a preview. Now I'm going to do use whichever mode I want to use. You can apply whatever you want. And from here you'll be able to fix the opacity. To fix in the Xy offset, the distance, the angle. And then we also have size spread and also a bit of noise. Let's set a bit of noise on there. And there you go. It has been applied. Now, the next one is called inner shadow. If you want to put in a bit of inner shadow, the same settings, but it's going to apply the settings or apply the formatting inside of the box. Now the next one which we have over here is called the outer glow. We can also apply a bit of outer glow over here, you can see the modes. Let's say I want a bit of overlay. And that I'm going to do is fix the opacity, the noise spread, and everything. Now the next one is called the inner glow. You'll be able to fix out what type of glow you want. Let's say I want a bit of blue press on, okay. And that I'm going to do is going to be increasing the size. You can see now the size of this inner glow. The next one is called the bevel and emboss. You'll be able to fix that up to. Let's go to do is use this to fix in the embass and you know the structure of it, the bevel. Now you'll be able to fix out the altitude, the size soften, and also use a bit of technique, whichever you want. Let's say one chisel hard, and you can see that it has been applied. The next one is called the satin. You'll be able to also apply different type of modes on it. Let's say I want a bit of color and the color is going to be blue. I'm going to use press on. Okay, fix in whatever you want. Let's go up to the next one, which is called the basic feather. If you want to know you want to feather it up or smoothen up your hard objects on a shape, then you're going to use this feather option. Fix in the width, you can see that now it has become a lot smoother. And you can also fix the choke level. You can see how hard you want it to be and then the corners round it, and the noise is going to be a bit higher. Okay? So use the ones which you want and press on, okay? The last one is called the directional feather. You can see over here, you'll be able to fix out the top and bottom, left and right, and the noise choke. And also the shapes and the angles. The last one is called the gradients. So you'll be able to use gradients on feathers two if you want to. After you've done this, press on. Okay. And you'll see that your object has been customized and made the way you want it. Okay, so fiddle through these tools and check out whichever type of effects you want to use. Now the next tool which you're going to cover up is going to be the cornea option. So we've applied all fit and it can also clear the effect if you want to, you can see the clear effect. It can also fix in the transparency or clear the transparency effect too. You can see clear transparency and it will be applied just like that. Okay, as we're done applying the effects on it, let's go to the next tool. From here we have cornea options. So you can fix in the cornea option, so this is like kind of like perspective. You can fix it up plus in person, Okay? And you can see that like this effect has been applied on cornea. Now the next tool which we have over here is called Object Layer Options. Now there are several objects or several layer options, when you apply any sortane object on your word space, just like I said, on the layer, we have this shape underneath this rectangle. So there are two layers. And then we have another object over here. We can also take it up and down if you want to, what I'm going to do is delete this object. And you can see that this is how this layering works. But from here we can also fix it up. Just go off the object and then we have this object layer options. And then you'll be able to fix out the layers of that specific object. Okay, then we have this object export option. You can also export up Certane objects by clicking on it. And then all text fix in the all text tagged PDF and also pop and HTML. Make sure to apply those and then press on okay. And it will turn into whatever you want it to be. Now here, the next one over here is going to be captions. So you'll be able to save up objects to on your device. And the next one is called the captions. If you want to apply any Certane captions or you want to set up the captions before making any graphics design, click on caption like option. And then you're going to do is fix on this text, what text you want before, and then fix out the meta data. Let's say the meta data is basically kind of like the info about any of the resource, basically all info. It could be either location, the author, which device it has been using, then the date, modified date, and also the created date, and basically everything. Okay, Then you can also like fix in the text after you want to put it. And then we have is the positioning and also the style from here, you'll be able to fix out the alignment opposite and also the paragraph style fix in it. And then press on. Okay, And then you're good to go. The next tool which we have over on this object ribbon is going to be captions or let's say the clipping pap. Now if you want to use clipping path, let's say you want to mask out certain objects in a certain, let's say box. And then you want to clip the path. You can use it, just go off the clipping path. Let's just show you. So the first thing which I'm going to be doing is going to be, let's say I'm going to go off on the frames and first off make a photo frame. I'm going to show you both fits both of the methods I'm going to do is going to be applying one of the photo. I'm going to take on file, Click on Place, and then I'm going to do is use this bad option. Press on Open. There we go, we have it. Then I'm going to do is going to be clicking on this via our selection tool. And then I'm going to do is going to be pressing on it and make sure that it is inside of the specific box. There we go, I'm going to do is first off click on this. There we go, We have this photo. Now what I'm going to do is going to be use this as a clipping mask. I'm going to do. Take it over here. There we go. We have it. Then I'm going to do is click on its outside. And I'm going to just make sure to group them up. And then I'm going to just take it right over here. There we go. Now the thing I'm going to do is going to be clipping it into go off the object that we have is clipping path. Go off the option from here I'm going to just click on it and detect edges and fix in the threshold tolerance and everything. You can also include insides and also restrict the frame, you'll be able to fix that part of you can see now there is a part of it or the white part or the white background has been removed and you have created a clipping mask out of that specific shape. Okay, that is how you basically use this clipping path option. Now the next tool which we have is called the Image Color Settings. If you want to fix out the color profile and color space, click on the profile. Fix in whatever you want. So let's say I want three from here, I want to relative press on Ok and that will be applied as an effect. The next one is called the interactive, there is convert, button convert, checkbox, combo box, and all of those. You can convert it into certain elements. Let's say I want to turn it into a list box there, Rico. Then fix out your criteria and then press on. Okay. And then you're good to go, but if I don't want it, I'm going to press on control Z as I do not want it right now. So you can also fiddle through these, but I would not suggest you to use them. The next one we have is path. You can open up a path close up the path if you want to. You can see the path now you'll be able to customize it just the way you want to, so make sure to use it and find out your needs. Then we have is path binder. You can also open up Pathfinder when you reverse or when you apply a path on it. Then if you do not want it, you can also undo the process and click on Pathfinder so that you will be able to apply those effects on the certain elements or certain photo which you're using. You can see it over here. And then we have is convert the shape. Now if you want to convert any surtane shape into something else, see you select on the shape, go off to object, then we are these ones. Okay? Convert shape. Now I want it to be triangle, now it has turned into a triangle. Now the next one, what you have is called the convert point. If you want to convert your points into corners or smooths or planes like symmetrical, find out your need, select the one. And then you can see that it has been applied directly on your workspace and also on your shape. The last tools which you have over here is called the Display performance. Now what type of performance it is being applied on your workspace or even on your device is going to show up over here. Let's say I want a bit of fast display. You can see the fast display. The next one over here is maybe called typical display. And just fix out the one, whichever one you want and then you will get your restlt. So hope you learned everything about this lesson on how you will be able to use this object ribbon in Adobe in design. If you have any question, then feel free to ask me anything and I will guide you and help you through the whole process. In our next lesson, we're going to cover up all of the elements, or let's say all of the tools and commands in this table ribbon of Adobe in design. I hope to see you guys in our next lesson and thank you for watching this video up til the end again. 35. View functions: Welcome to our new lesson of Adobe Indesign, Essential. In this lesson, we're going to cover up all of the tools in the View ribbon. Without any further ado. Let's just hop onto the lesson by opening up Adobe in Design on our device. As I've opened up Adobe in Design now, the first thing I'm going to do is opening up a new project, or opening up a new file for myself. Now as we're going to show you all of the tools in the view ribbon, so let's just get into it now. The first thing which appears up or the first tool which appears up is called the overprint preview. Now in couple of cases, you can see that you want an overprint preview of your specific work or even your file. For that, you can click on that and you can see that this is on the overprint preview. If it gets overprinted, or let's say if it just goes up exceeds its limits of resolution, how would it look like? So that is going to be this type of preview. Now it's going to work in cases of when you have any certain object, of any resolution and how it will look like, that is going to be it. Okay. Now the next tool which we have over here is called the proof set up. Now from here, you will be able to change or toggle through the color space of Adobe in design. Now there could be, if you are using CMYK for your specific file, then you'll be able to toggle through whichever type of CMYK color space you want to use. But if you are using RGB, it's going to appear up or it's going to show you all the color spaces of RGB and then you'll be able to set it up. But even if you do not want to use that, what you can do is click on Custom. From here you can see Device to Simulate. Now select the one which you want. There's also Apple R EC, which is Record. Then we see the Apple over here. Then we have Adobe Buro scale. Then we also have SRGB. I'll suggest you to use SRGB if you do have it. One thing about this is that if you have an older version of Adobe in design, then you might not see, let's say, all of these, okay? So you can toggle through the ones you want and select the one. But from here I'm going to do is click select on RGB because I'm going to be needing that. So I'm going to do click on the rig. We have SRGB selected and then you can preserve the RGB numbers two if you want to. Then we have Is Display options on screen. Now you can also deselect it, but it works only in cases of specific color spaces. Now we can go off the Uroscale. Let's click on Uroscale. See if it works. You can see when I selected this, you'll be able to display it in different options on different screens. You can simulate paper color and you can also simulate black ink. It's going to be up to you whichever one you want to use, and you can also preserve the CMYK numbers. After you're done, just hit on Okay, and then you're good to go. Now the next tool which you will find out over here is called the proof colors. Now the proof color works in cases of if you want a proof or a justification of what color it is, or if it's using the exact shade, you can prove of colors two. And the shortcut key for it is going to be control Y. If you press control Y once it has been turned off, if you press control Y, again, that it's going to show you the proof of it too. Okay, So that is how it works. Then the next one is called the zoom in and out. That is very simple. It has the shortcut key of control equal or control hyphen, or let's say the dash. Now I can also select on this zoom in. Now I can see it has been zoomed in. And I can also go off over here and click on Zoom Outs, But I can also use the shortcut key on my keyboard. Control equal and control hyphen. So use the one whichever one you want and see the difference. The next one which we have is called the Fit page in Windows. So in my previous lessons I've told you that how you'll be able to go through these, let's say the zoom settings. So this is one of the most important features and I would suggest you to keep this shortcut key in mind, which is going to be control and zero, not but zero, okay? So what you're going to do is if you have it, like totally zoomed in or something where you know it is not aligned perfectly, but you want it to be visible to the whole screen. Then what you're going to do is just click on Control and zero, it will be fit to your screen perfectly so that you will be able to see all of the elements inside of your workspace. You can also do the same thing by clicking on View and clicking on Fit page in Windows. Okay, so make sure to use that. It just helps you out in a couple of times. And just like I said, make sure to use the shortcut key too, because it is a lot easier. Okay, The next one which you have is called the fit spread in Windows. Now the spread is a totally different thing. So let me just create a couple of pages. First we'll see I have two pages now. I want two of them to be visible on my screen. So I'm going to go off the view and click on like Fit Spread in screen. And both of the pages are even more will be visible and fitted to your screen so that you'll be able to see all of it. Let's try applying another page. We have another page, we can also drag it over here. We can try that. Let's make another one. There's two pages over here. Now, you can only use two pages only, so it is now turned different. Or by the update, it has been different because in our previous versions you could use like three pages at once, but now it is only working on two pages. After you're done, just press on the selected file, whichever one you want, and then you'll be able to see how it works. Double click on it. I'm going to click on View. Click on Fit Page in Windows, and you can see now it is at the center. Okay, Now the next tool which you're going to find out over here is called the actual size. Now if you want to see the actual size of that page in opened up in Adobe in design as your file, click on it Control and one. And that is how it will look like because all of the elements are going to be inserted in this specific area. Nothing outside of this. So click on it to see the preview of when you print it up, how it's going to look like. And that is how it's going to show you on your screen. Now the next tool which we have over here is called the entire pasteboard. Now you can see the entire pasteboard over here. And you can see, you can toggle through the ones, whichever one you want. These sections or these groups are called paste boards. Make sure to use it too if you want a preview of all of these pages on your workspace opened up in Adobe in design, you can use this. Now the next tool which we have over here is called the paste, Paste books. But first off, I'm going to use Fit page to screen so that I can see one page at a time. Now the next tool which we find over here on this view ribbon is going to be Rotate the spread. Now first thing is going to be match pasteboard to theme color. Now if you have a specific color selected for any one of their pages, let's say You can see now if you have any page color different, you'll be able to match it up directly to the pasteboard to, so make sure to use it if you want to. But if you have a different color, you will be able to customize it too. But I'm going to do is revert this action I'm going to do is just go off to View and click on Match Pace board to Team Color again. And it will turn back to how it was. And I'm going to use the shortcut key control and zero to make sure that, you know, it looks, you know, fit to screen. Okay. Now the next tool which we have over here on the view ribbon is going to be a bit different. Now, The next one is called the rotate spread. If you want to rotate up, your spread at a certain angle so that it looks different, you can see there are a couple of quick measures or quick angles. Which is 90 degree C and 90 degrees C, which is going to be left and right respectively. And then we also have 180 degrees and you can also clear up the rotation. Let's same put 180 degrees and go off the table or view again and go to rotate. Spread and clear the rotation if you want to. Okay, so make sure to use it just the way you want to. We are basically done on this part. Let's go to the next one. Where we have are the screen modes. Now in my previous lesson, I've already shown you about the screen modes. You can also toggle through different screen modes directly through your table or let's say your tool panel. You can see the motions, you can see the options are over here. Review, bleed, slog, and presentation. That is basically the same one as this one. So press on control Z. I'm going to just click on this view again. Match this one. Madu, turn it into let's say medue hit on Escape and it can also get up, you know, basic preview. Just click on this view again and match Pasteboard, and you can see that it has been undone. So one thing is that it cannot be undone or you cannot press control Z. And it will make a difference because the viewing section is totally up to you. Make sure to use the one which you want. And if you want to go through this tool panel and also change your preview, make sure to click that or use those. Now let's go off through screen modes. Let's say I want a preview. This is how the preview looks like. Let's I'm going to do is I want a bleed and this is how bleeds look like. The last one we have slug, so I'm going to just click on slug and the rest or the last of it is called the presentation mode and you can press on Escape to get out of it. I'm going to do is make sure to keep it on normal so that I can differentiate the page. And also it looks good. Just the page looks good. Now the next one, which we have over here is called the display performance. Now what type of performance is being worked on your device? If you want to see that you can use this, we have fast display, typical display, then we have this high quality display. And you can also allow object level display option and also clear it up. Let's see how it looks like on fast display and you can see 80% of it is being used. Now the next one over here is going to be, let's say I want typical display and that is also quite the same. And the last one which we have over here on display performance is high quality display. Okay, so use whichever one you want and the higher you get, it's going to be more processing on your CPU and GPU. So let's go off for the next one. Over here we have is display performance. And you'll be able to clear it up to, you can also clear it up if you want to. But I would suggest you to keep it visible because you can see how it is performing or your device is performing. The next one is called the hide rulers. If you want to hide the rulers, you can just press on rulers or control R. And when you press on it again, it will return back. So 11 is going to be opening it up or making it visible on your workspace. And to toggle it up, just press on the same keys and it will get reverted back to how it was. Okay, but I will suggest you to use the ruler because it is quite helpful. And you'll be able to align certain objects by seeing where you are placing it. Okay, Now the next tool over here is called extras. And extras. There are a couple of these options. There is hide frame edges, show text threads, show assigned frames, hide hyperlinks, hide nodes, hide link badge. So if you want to hide up any elements or any object inside of your workspace, you can hide them. Now let's just show to you las Sema U is going to be making a shape. There we go, we have our shape. Now let's go off the view. Go off the extras, and you can hide out certain shapes. Or let's say I'm going to use hide frame edges and the edges will be removed. Now from here, if I say I want to maybe hide out, let's say a live commerce or maybe show signed frames. You'll be able to do that too. Let's use sign a frame. There we go. A frame has been assigned and you can see that this is hidden. Okay, because we've used hid it. So I'm going to go off the extras again and then I'm going to use show frame edges. And I'm going to go off to view again and I'm going to do is show text threads and also apply the ones which you've applied directly from over here. You'll be able to show them too and that is how it will look like. Okay, so there you go. We have the shape, certain shape over here. This is how it will look like. Okay, I'm going to press on controls you to undo the process. And the next tools which you find over here is called the Grids and Guides. If you want to use those grids and guides on your workspace, just click on, let's say I'm going to do is apply one so that you can see M lock the guides. And there we go, we have the guides locked in and you'll be able to customize it wherever you want. And you can see the guides, you can see it over here, the middle. And you'll be able to paste it wherever you want. And you can see this is now scrolling really fast because it is being adjusted to specific grids and guides. Okay, now the next tool over here are the last of the ones which you can find over here on grids and guides, you can show baseline grids and also document grids. Make sure to use them if you want to and if you don't want to just skip them. Okay. The next one is called the structure. If you want to show the structure on your workspace la sale, want to show the structure over here. And there we go, We have the root. And the structure is going to be based on a CML or CSS. Okay? So all of whatever you like apply over here, less, go off the property. I'm going to do is change the color to blue. There we go. And you'll be able to see the structure of this. You'll be able to change it by using HTML codes directly on Adobe in design. So that is how Adobe in design, or the newer version of Adobe in design increases your functionality. Okay, now the next tool over here on the view is called let's say hide structure. High tag marker. You can hide the structure if you want to. It has been removed. Now, the next one over here is called the high tag markers. You can also remove the tag markers. The tags are basically the codes which you'll apply on HTML. And the next one we have over here is called a snap to document grid. Now you'll be able to snap it up directly to document from wherever you want and make sure to use it just the way you want to, okay? You can see all of them has been dragged and you can see a bit of transparency on it. So this is how it will look like on Adoban design. The last tool which we have is called the story editor. If you make up a booklet or a book and you want to make a story or you want to edit a story, just click on Story Editor. You can hide the changes if you want to. And you can see that if you have story, you will be able to hide the style, you will be able to hide the depth ruler. You'll be able to show like paragraph break marks and also expand all footnotes. So make sure to customize it and fiddle through each and every one of those tools this view ribbon has for you in design. So what you're going to do is just practice a bit on these options or practice a bit and fiddle in through each and every one of these tools and just get friendlier with it and get more familiar with it, so you know where to find which tool and how we can change our, you know, POV. So make sure to use these tools and hope you understood everything about this. And if you have any confusion or any question about this lesson, then feel free to ask me and I will guide you and help you through the whole process. In our next lesson, we're going to cover up everything about this plug ins and also about our Windows, Ribbon and Adobe in design. Without any further ado, Let's just move on to our next lesson of Adobe in Design Essential. 36. Plugins and windows panel: Welcome to our last lesson of Adobe in Design. In this lesson, we're going to learn about the plug ins and about the Windows panel, or let's say the Windows ribbon. Without any further ado, let's just open up Adobe in Design on our device. You can see that I have opened up Adobe in Design. The last ribbons are plug ins and also the Windows. The first thing I'm going to do is going to be opening up one of the files, which I need. Now I'm going to do is go off directly to plug ins. Now, what are basically plugins? Well, if you've used Adobe Photoshop, Illustrator, Microsoft Powerpoint, Microsoft Documents, well you can see that there is this option called extensions, and those are basically plug ins. Those basically increase your functionality on a software. Let's say you want to work simultaneously to softwares at a time, but you can use it directly from the softwares from Adobe in design. First thing you're going to do is going to be going off the plug ins panel. And you can see that we will be able to discover the plug ins. You can either click on Discover Plug Ins or you can go off to Plug Ins and click on Browse Plug Ins. Both of them work the same way. And when you click on it, you will basically see that Creative Cloud Desktop app will be opened up on your device even if you're using a Macos or even if you're using Windows. Okay? From there what you're going to do is get whichever one you want from here. First you have to make sure that you have Adobe account signed in and also connected to the Internet. While you're working with it, find the one, whichever one you want and press on Get. When you click on Get, you're just going to click on. Okay. And it will be applied directly off to your libraries over here on plug ins. Okay. But make sure that you are connected to the Internet. Okay. So do is cut this part out. Let's go to the next one. We have managed plugins. Now, whichever plugins you have on your creative cloud applied to your software, you'll be able to manage them up whenever you want to. Let's say you want to use a specific type of plug in and you want to use it, or you want to disable it or you want to delete it, you'll be able to clear them out and also you'll be able to remove them or also enable them whenever you need Made Cut off Creative Cloud app for now. Okay, so we're basically done with this plug in Windows in Adobe in design. Let's go off to Windows. I'm going to make it very short, okay, Because it's almost done. And all of them works kind of like the same way. Now the first thing which appears up on this Windows Ribbon is going to be arrange. Now how does arrange work? If you've used Adobe or let's say Microsoft Powerpoint, you've seen a selection pane and that is basically the same thing on Range. Now you'll be able to put out Lasmadu. Make sure to apply two boxes made. Make one, let's say blue. And I'm going to do is click on this one and select this one. And I'm going to do is make sure to put it red so I have two of them now I have the red one below the blue one, but I want the red one to overlap the blue one. Now how to do this I'm going to do is click on Windows. Go off the Range, and I'm going to do is make sure to put it up just a bit. Now you can also tile it all vertically. You can apply that. Or you can also take it above. If you want to just click on the Arrange. Bring to Fort. There we go. You have it. It has been brought to Fort or brought to the, you know, forward. Now the next tool which we have over here is called the tiles. Now if you want to apply it on certain columns and rows, you'll be able to apply them whenever you want. And you can also floated up on Windows. What I'm going to do is click on Floating Window. There you go. It is now a floating window. You can see. That is how it is working. But we cannot go down anymore because that is the pasteboard, okay? You can also make them flow around this work space, okay? So that is how it works. Now the next one over here is called the float all in windows and consolidate all windows. And you'll be able to make new windows to, and split the window if you want to see this is how it works and you can go off the windows, click on Arrange, and you'll be able to make new windows. Make another one. So you can see we have three windows opened up now. We can also remove it. I'll say I don't want this window anymore. So I'm going to do is click on Windows. Go off the Range, and then I'm going to do is unsplit windows. And there we go, we have one window opened up and only one work space. Okay, so this works in cases if you want to get a preview or you want to differentiate something or differentiate any elements or graphics inside of your workspace. Now the next one is called the workspace. Now there are specific type of work spaces for a specific type of works, so we are using essentials. Now if you want to use typography or you are using Adoban design for typography, make sure to click on typography and all the typography based tools will appear up, and you can see the workspace has changed a bit. Now you'll be able to also toggle to each and everyone. Let's say I want to use a book, so I'm going to use click on Book. And all of the book typed, or let's say the book section two will appear up now. The next one we have is Advanced. If you want advanced features available on your workspace, click on Advanced and you'll be able to use the Advanced, okay? And you can also change your workspace just by clicking on this option at the right top, you'll be able to use it. You can also make a new workspace and also reset the workspace back to essential. Okay, so make sure to use them too. Now the next tool which we have over here is called defined Extensions on Exchange. Well, Exchange is basically a type of interface, or a type of software, or a web page, which you can see over here. Now you'll be able to browse up, you know, different types of extensions or plug ins. Now one thing is that sometimes on Creative Cloud you will not be able to find out specific, you plug ins because you know that uses specific resources. So if you do not find anything on Creative Cloud app, but you want to use specific type of let's say extensions or plug ins. Then you're going to do is just go off the Exchange or Adobe Exchange and then find out your extension. Click on any one of them you want to use and click on Get. Okay, so this will appear up, make sure you're connected to the Internet. And you can see this one is free. So click on that free option and it will be applied directly over to your Creative Cloud app. And you're going to do is allowed Creative Cloud app to use this press on. Okay. And there we have it installed or there we have it. And then I'm going to click on install, Press on. Okay. And then we'll be able to use it directly on Adobe. In design I'm going to do is go off to Plug Ins. Click on Plug In Panel, Discover plug Ins, and then you're going to do is find out your plug ins which you already have downloaded or which you already have on your Adobe account and then you'll be able to use it whenever you want to. So that is basically how this fine extension on exchange works. And then the ones which you see over here are basically all the same. Now these are basically panels which you see on Adobe. Okay, in most of the softwares. Illustrator, Photoshop, after effects like Premiere Pro. Now I'm going to also show you a couple of the examples. I'm going to show you like five examples of each and every one of these panels. Now you can see that I have my control panel on, but what if I do not want it? Click on it, and the control panel has been removed. Now as I've shown you one, let's go off, I need articles panel. Click on it. Your articles panel will open up. Now if I say I want color spanel, I'm going to select the color panel which I want to use. And there are obviously a couple of categories which you'll be able to open up directly in Adobe Indesign. Now the next one I'm going to open up is called the effects panel. Now you can see that a couple of them have specific short Cts. But first off, let me just show you five of these panels that we have. Three. Now, the last two ones I'm going to put in one layer panel. You'll be able to work with layers two in Adobe Indesign. The next one over here is going to be the overlays panel. We have all of them together, but I'm going to do is put it inside of a specific panel. Two, you can also put that Lesmajuus, put this layer inside of this. I want the links inside of this. I want the pages inside of this, and I want all of these inside of it. Two, there we go. And there we have five of the panels directly opened up in Adobe in design. And it can open up whenever you want. Smog, use colors, maybe I want to use pages. I'm going to do extend it up. And if I say I'm going to use overlays, I'm going to use open overlays. So there we have a couple of panels opened up directly in Adobe in design. And you can also remove them, but just by clicking on it. And you'll be able to extend it up even if you want to. You can see this is how it works. And you can see that I cannot see my workspace. So I'm going to go off the Windows. Then fix in the workspace. Click on Essentials, and it will appear back up again. Even if you still cannot see it, just click on this option over here and you'll be able to open up back again. Now what you're going to do is go off the windows from Windows. What you're going to do is click on the file which you want to open up. Click on it, and it will reappear again. That is basically how you'll be able to use the plug ins ribbon and also the Windows Ribbon. Now I'm going to show you a couple of shortcuts. Lets do is press on eight for info F eight. And you can see the info panel opens up. Lemina Do is use the properties or the stroke panel to put in F ten on my keyboard. Obviously, if you want to make your work a lot more faster, so make sure to use the shortcut keys because it will make your work a lot more smoother and ongoing, and on with the flow. Obviously, if you want to convert it together or you can put in all of them together, just drag it inside of the box or inside of the panel and they will be merged up together. Hope you learned everything about Adobe in design. And even if you have any confusion or any question about it, then feel free to ask me a question or whatever. Then I will help you and guide you through the whole process. And obviously, just like I said, I have attached in a resource file with this whole course, you're going to have those supporting resources to use in each and every one of these lessons. So make sure to use them too. And even if you don't want to use them, if you want to get like photos or videos, make sure to go off to Pexels.com and download those and use those because those are basically royalty free. And hope to see you guys in my next course. And we're going to do is hop onto a couple of our class projects of this whole course though that you'll be able to use a bit of practice on it and obviously upload it on our project panel without any further ado. Let's jump off to our class projects and in this whole course.